1. 巴拉基格篇义注巴利 1. Pārājikakaṇḍaṃ
全篇 1169 段
1. 第一巴拉基格巴利
1. Paṭhamapārājikaṃ
苏丁那诵分的注释巴利
Sudinnabhāṇavāravaṇṇanā
24 从此之后,“那时,在离毗舍离不远的地方”等句子,大部分意思都很浅显。所以,这里不再逐词解释,只对需要说明的地方加以说明。所谓“迦兰陀村”:迦兰陀就是黑鸟,这个村子因为这种鸟而得名。所谓“咖兰达之子”,就是依村得名、被国王认可、拥有四亿财富的迦兰陀富商之子。不过,因为那个村子里还有别的也叫迦兰陀的人,所以先说了“咖兰达之子”,之后又说“富商之子”。所谓“与众多”,就是和许多人一起。所谓“朋友”,就是共同经历苦乐、彼此往来的人;朋友本身就是“朋友众”,即和那些朋友一起。所谓“一同”,就是一起。所谓“因为某件事”,就是因为货物买卖、债务清算、传递消息之类的事务;也有人说,是为了参加迦提迦星宿节的庆祝活动。因为世尊是在迦提迦月白分到达毗舍离的,而那里的迦提迦星宿节庆非常盛大,应当知道他就是为此而去的。巴利
24. Ito paraṃ tena kho pana samayena vesāliyā avidūretiādi yebhuyyena uttānatthaṃ. Tasmā anupadavaṇṇanaṃ pahāya yattha yattha vattabbaṃ atthi, taṃ tadeva vaṇṇayissāma. Kalandagāmoti kalandakā vuccanti kāḷakā, tesaṃ vasena laddhanāmo gāmo. Kalandaputtoti gāmavasena laddhanāmassa rājasammatassa cattālīsakoṭivibhavassa kalandaseṭṭhino putto. Yasmā pana tasmiṃ gāme aññepi kalandanāmakā manussā atthi, tasmā kalandaputtoti vatvā puna seṭṭhiputtoti vuttaṃ. Sambahulehīti bahukehi. Sahāyakehīti sukhadukkhāni saha āyanti upagacchantīti sahāyā, sahāyā eva sahāyakā, tehi sahāyakehi. Saddhinti ekato. Kenacideva karaṇīyenāti kenacideva bhaṇḍappayojanauddhārasāraṇādinā kiccena; kattikanakkhattakīḷākiccenātipi vadanti. Bhagavā hi kattikajuṇhapakkhe vesāliṃ sampāpuṇi. Kattikanakkhattakīḷā cettha uḷārā hoti. Tadatthaṃ gatoti veditabbo.
看见是如何看见的呢?据说,他看见一大群人从城里出来,他们已经吃过早饭,穿着干净的上衣,手里拿着花环、香和涂香,是为了去见佛和听法,就问他们:“你们去哪里?”他们回答:“为了去见佛和听法。”于是他想:“那我也去。”就跟着去了,看见世尊被四众弟子围绕着,用梵音在说法。因此说“看见了……在说法”。“看见后”:就是他看见之后。“他这样想”:这位善家子因为过去所造的福行而受到策励,生起了这样的念头。什么念头呢?就是“我何不也去听法呢?”这里的“我何不”是在表达他的思惟方式。据说,他这样思惟:“这群人一心专注地在听法,啊,但愿我也能听到!”巴利
Addasa khoti kathaṃ addasa? So kira nagarato bhuttapātarāsaṃ suddhuttarāsaṅgaṃ mālāgandhavilepanahatthaṃ buddhadassanatthaṃ dhammasavanatthañca nikkhamantaṃ mahājanaṃ disvā ‘‘kva gacchathā’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Buddhadassanatthaṃ dhammasavanatthañcā’’ti. Tena hi ‘‘ahampi gacchāmī’’ti gantvā catubbidhāya parisāya parivutaṃ brahmassarena dhammaṃ desentaṃ bhagavantaṃ addasa. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘addasa kho…pe… desenta’’nti. Disvānassāti disvāna assa. Etadahosīti pubbe katapuññatāya codiyamānassa bhabbakulaputtassa etaṃ ahosi. Kiṃ ahosi? Yaṃnūnāhampi dhammaṃ suṇeyyanti . Tattha yannūnāti parivitakkadassanametaṃ. Evaṃ kirassa parivitakko uppanno ‘‘yamayaṃ parisā ekaggacittā dhammaṃ suṇāti, aho vatāhampi taṃ suṇeyya’’nti.
那时,咖兰达之子苏丁那为什么这里不说“前往世尊那里”,而说“前往那大众那里”呢?因为当时围绕世尊坐着的是身份极为高贵的大众,他来得晚,没法走近世尊坐下,但在大众中的某个位置还能坐下,所以他就直接走向那大众。因此说:“那时,咖兰达之子苏丁那前往那大众那里。”
“退坐一面的咖兰达之子苏丁那这样想”:并不是他刚一坐下就这样想,而是在听了世尊少许与涅槃相关的法谈之后才生起这个念头;不过,这个念头是在他退坐一面时生起的,所以说:“退坐一面的咖兰达之子苏丁那这样想。”想了什么呢?就是“正如……”等。巴利
Athakho sudinno kalandaputto yena sā parisāti idha kasmā ‘‘yena bhagavā’’ti avatvā ‘‘yena sā parisā’’ti vuttanti ce. Bhagavantañhi parivāretvā uḷāruḷārajanā mahatī parisā nisinnā, tatra na sakkā iminā pacchā āgatena bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā nisīdituṃ. Parisāya pana ekasmiṃ padese sakkāti so taṃ parisaṃyeva upasaṅkamanto. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho sudinno kalandaputto yena sā parisā’’ti. Ekamantaṃ nisinnassa kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa etadahosīti na nisinnamattasseva ahosi, atha kho bhagavato sittayūpasaṃhitaṃ thokaṃ dhammakathaṃ sutvā; taṃ panassa yasmā ekamantaṃ nisinnasseva ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisinnassa kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa etadahosī’’ti. Kiṃ ahosīti? Yathā yathā khotiādi.
关于这一点,简略地说:我凡是依照世尊宣说法的样子而了知法,当我这样反复观察时,心里就想:这清净的梵行生活,应当连一天也不让它破损,为了达到临终一念也保持圆满,所以要修得绝对圆满;也应当连一天也不被烦恼的污垢染污,为了达到临终一念也保持清净,所以要修得绝对清净。应当像打磨光亮的贝壳、洗净的贝壳那样,修得洁净无瑕。这对一个住在家里、生活在家庭中的人来说,不容易做到绝对圆满……绝对清净地修行。不如我剃掉头发和胡须,穿上染成黄褐色的、适合修梵行的人穿的衣服,从家里出来,出家过没有家的生活吧。这里,在家人的利益,比如农耕、经商等事业,叫作“在家的事”,而出家生活中没有这些;所以应当知道,出家就是“无家”。那种无家的状态,就是出家。“出家”:就是到处游行修行。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepakathā – ahaṃ kho yena yena ākārena bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, tena tena me upaparikkhato evaṃ hoti yadetaṃ sittayabrahmacariyaṃ ekampi divasaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ caritabbaṃ, ekadivasampi ca kilesamalena amalīnaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparisuddhaṃ. Saṅkhalikhitaṃ likhitasaṅkhasadisaṃ dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāgaṃ caritabbaṃ. Idaṃ na sukaraṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā agāramajjhe vasantena ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ…pe… carituṃ. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ kese ca massuñca ohāretvā kasāyarasapītatāya kāsāyāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni acchādetvā paridahitvā agārasmā nikkhamitvā anagāriyaṃ pabbajeyyanti. Ettha ca yasmā agārassa hitaṃ kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ agāriyanti vuccati, tañca pabbajjāya natthi; tasmā pabbajjā ‘‘anagāriyā’’ti ñātabbā. Taṃ anagāriyaṃ pabbajjaṃ. Pabbajeyyanti paribbajeyyaṃ.
25 在大众尚未散去时,苏丁那并没有向世尊请求出家。为什么呢?因为那里有他很多亲属、血亲、朋友和熟人,他们可能会抓住他的胳膊把他拽走,说:“你是父母唯一的儿子,你不能出家。”那样就会成为他出家的障碍。所以,他等大众一起起身离开,走了一段路之后,再借某个身体上的需要折返回来,走到世尊面前请求出家。因此说:“那时,咖兰达之子苏丁那在大众散去不久后……请世尊让我出家。”巴利
25.Aciravuṭṭhitāya parisāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti sudinno avuṭṭhitāya parisāya na bhagavantaṃ pabbajjaṃ yāci. Kasmā? Tatrassa bahū ñātisālohitā mittāmaccā santi, te ‘‘‘tvaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ ekaputtako, na labbhā tayā pabbajitu’nti bāhāyampi gahetvā ākaḍḍheyyuṃ, tato pabbajjāya antarāyo bhavissatī’’ti saheva parisāya uṭṭhahitvā thokaṃ gantvā puna kenaci sarīrakiccalesena nivattitvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamma pabbajjaṃ yāci. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho sudinno kalandaputto aciravuṭṭhitāya parisāya…pe… pabbājetu maṃ bhagavā’’ti.
世尊则因为自从罗睺罗王子出家以后,就不让没有得到父母允许的儿子出家,所以问他:苏丁那,你得到父母允许出家了吗?巴利
Bhagavā pana yasmā rāhulakumārassa pabbajitato pabhuti mātāpitūhi ananuññātaṃ puttaṃ na pabbājeti, tasmā naṃ pucchi – ‘‘anuññātosi pana tvaṃ sudinna mātāpitūhi…pe… pabbajjāyā’’ti.
26 从此以后,按照经文顺序继续讲下去,在“办完那件事”这里,应当这样理解它的意思:就是彻底放下担子,把那件事完成;因为一个出家欲求强烈的人,心不会转向货物买卖、讨债、送信这类事情,也不会转向星宿节庆嬉戏之类的事。在“阿妈、阿爹”里,“阿妈”是在叫母亲,“阿爹”是在叫父亲。“你就是”:意思就是你就是。“独子”:就是唯一的儿子,你没有别的哥哥或弟弟。这里本来该说“独子”,但出于怜爱,说成了“独子儿”。“可爱”:能令喜悦生起;“可意”:能令心意增长;“安乐长大”:安乐地被养育长大,意为安乐地成长;“安乐被抚育”:安乐地被抚育。从出生时起,就被乳母从膝上转到膝上抱持抚养,坐着马车、小马玩具车等孩童玩具嬉戏,吃着上妙美食,安乐地被抚育。巴利
26. Ito paraṃ pāṭhānusāreneva gantvā taṃ karaṇīyaṃ tīretvāti ettha evamattho veditabbo – dhuranikkhepeneva taṃ karaṇīyaṃ niṭṭhāpetvāti; na hi pabbajjāya tibbacchandassa bhaṇḍappayojanauddhārasāraṇādīsu vā nakkhattakīḷāyaṃ vā cittaṃ namati. Amma tātāti ettha pana ammāti mātaraṃ ālapati; tātāti pitaraṃ. Tvaṃ khosīti tvaṃ kho asi. Ekaputtakoti ekova puttako; añño te jeṭṭho vā kaniṭṭho vā natthi. Ettha ca ‘‘ekaputto’’ti vattabbe anukampāvasena ‘‘ekaputtako’’ti vuttaṃ. Piyoti pītijananako. Manāpoti manavaḍḍhanako. Sukhedhitoti sukhena edhito; sukhasaṃvaḍḍhitoti attho. Sukhaparihatoti sukhena parihato; jātakālato pabhuti dhātīhi aṅkato aṅkaṃ haritvā dhāriyamāno assakarathakādīhi bālakīḷanakehi kīḷamāno sādurasabhojanaṃ bhojiyamāno sukhena parihato.
孩子苏丁那,你根本不知道什么是苦。孩子苏丁那,你对苦连一丁点儿、极微小的部分都不了解;或者说,你从来没有用苦来感受过任何东西。这里是用属格表达工具格的意思,而“知道”是在“感受”的意义上用的。另一种解释是:你从来没有忆念过任何苦。这里是用属格表达宾格的意思,而“知道”是在“忆念”的意义上用的。在这两种解释里,都应该看到前一个词和后一个词之间同格关系的省略。这一切都要依据语法学来理解。即使因为死亡,我们也会不情愿地和你分离——意思是:即使在我们还活着的时候你死了,因为那个死亡的缘故,我们也是不情愿的、不甘心的、不是出于自己意愿地和你分离;或者说,我们会不得不面对和你的别离。那么,我们凭什么——既然如此,那到底是什么理由,让我们会允许你活着去出家呢?或者说,我们到底凭什么理由,会准许你活着去出家呢?这里应该这样理解其含义。巴利
Na tvaṃ, tāta sudinna, kiñci dukkhassa jānāsīti tvaṃ tāta sudinna kiñci appamattakampi kalabhāgaṃ dukkhassa na jānāsi; atha vā kiñci dukkhena nānubhosīti attho. Karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, anubhavanatthe ca jānanā; atha vā kiñci dukkhaṃ nassarasīti attho. Upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, saraṇatthe ca jānanā. Vikappadvayepi purimapadassa uttarapadena samānavibhattilopo daṭṭhabbo. Taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena ñātabbaṃ. Maraṇenapi mayaṃ te akāmakā vinā bhavissāmāti sacepi tava amhesu jīvamānesu maraṇaṃ bhaveyya, tena te maraṇenapi mayaṃ akāmakā anicchakā na attano ruciyā, vinā bhavissāma; tayā viyogaṃ vā pāpuṇissāmāti attho. Kiṃ pana mayaṃ tanti evaṃ sante kiṃ pana kiṃ nāma taṃ kāraṇaṃ yena mayaṃ taṃ jīvantaṃ anujānissāma; atha vā kiṃ pana mayaṃ tanti kena pana kāraṇena mayaṃ taṃ jīvantaṃ anujānissāmāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
27 就在那个地方,意思是:就在他当时站立、父母没有准许(他出家)的那个地方。没有间隔,意思是:没有被任何铺垫的东西隔开。巴利
27.Tatthevāti yattha naṃ ṭhitaṃ mātāpitaro nānujāniṃsu, tattheva ṭhāne. Anantarahitāyāti kenaci attharaṇena anatthatāya.
28 “去享受吧”的意思是:把歌舞、戏剧等安排好之后,在那里和同伴们一起随心所欲地让感官活动、游走,也就是“把这些那些快乐都带来”。另一种说法是,“去享受吧”的意思是:把歌舞、戏剧等安排好之后,在那里和同伴们一起嬉戏、游乐、欢娱、玩耍。“享受诸欲”的意思是:和自己的妻儿一起享用财富。“修造福德”的意思是:以佛、法、僧为对象,做布施、供养等能净化善趣之路的善业。“他沉默了”的意思是:为了打断谈话的延续,他陷入了无话可说的状态。那时,他的父母说了三遍都没得到回应,就叫来他的同伴们,说:“你们这位同伴想出家,去拦住他。”那些同伴也走到他跟前,同样劝了三遍,他对他们也依然沉默。因此说:“那时,苏丁那·咖兰达之子的同伴们……他沉默了。”巴利
28.Paricārehīti gandhabbanaṭanāṭakādīni paccupaṭṭhāpetvā tattha sahāyakehi saddhiṃ yathāsukhaṃ indriyāni cārehi sañcārehi; ito cito ca upanehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā paricārehīti gandhabbanaṭanāṭakādīni paccupaṭṭhāpetvā tattha sahāyakehi saddhiṃ laḷa, upalaḷa, rama, kīḷassūtipi vuttaṃ hoti. Kāme paribhuñjantoti attano puttadārehi saddhiṃ bhoge bhuñjanto. Puññāni karontoti buddhañca dhammañca saṅghañca ārabbha dānappadānādīni sugatimaggasodhakāni kusalakammāni karonto. Tuṇhī ahosīti kathānuppabandhavicchedanatthaṃ nirālāpasallāpo ahosi. Athassa mātāpitaro tikkhattuṃ vatvā paṭivacanampi alabhamānā sahāyake pakkosāpetvā ‘‘esa vo sahāyako pabbajitukāmo, nivāretha na’’nti āhaṃsu. Tepi taṃ upasaṅkamitvā tikkhattuṃ avocuṃ, tesampi tuṇhī ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa sahāyakā…pe… tuṇhī ahosī’’ti.
29 那时,苏丁那的同伴们这样想:如果这个人得不到出家许可就死了,那不会有什么好处。但他出家以后,父母还能时常看到他,我们也能看到他。再说,出家这件事本来就很辛苦,每天都要拿着陶钵去乞食,独坐一处、一日一食、修梵行,实在太难了。而这个人娇生惯养,出身城市人家,他要是受不了这种生活,一定会再回到这里来。走吧,我们去请他父母允许。他们就这样去做了。父母也允许了他。因此说:那时,苏丁那·咖兰达之子的同伴们来到苏丁那·咖兰达之子的父母那里……你已得到父母允许,可以从家出家,过无家的生活了。巴利
29. Athassa sahāyakānaṃ etadahosi – ‘‘sace ayaṃ pabbajjaṃ alabhamāno marissati na koci guṇo bhavissati. Pabbajitaṃ pana naṃ mātāpitaropi kālena kālaṃ passissanti. Mayampi passissāma. Pabbajjāpi ca nāmesā bhāriyā, divase divase mattikāpattaṃ gahetvā piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ. Ekaseyyaṃ ekabhattaṃ brahmacariyaṃ atidukkaraṃ. Ayañca sukhumālo nāgarikajātiyo, so taṃ carituṃ asakkonto puna idheva āgamissati. Handassa mātāpitaro anujānāpessāmā’’ti. Te tathā akaṃsu. Mātāpitaropi naṃ anujāniṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa sahāyakā yena sudinnassa kalandaputtassa mātāpitaro…pe… anuññātosi mātāpitūhi agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajjāyā’’ti.
30 “欢喜”就是喜悦。“昂扬”是指因为喜悦而身心振奋。“几天”就是若干天。“增强体力”的意思是:吃合适的食物,又用涂油、沐浴等方法来保养身体,让体力恢复之后,礼拜父母,离开满脸泪水的亲族眷属,前往世尊那里……“世尊,请让我出家。”世尊对站在旁边的一位乞食比丘说:“那么,比丘,你给苏丁那出家并授达上吧。”
“萨度,世尊!”那位比丘答应世尊后,就收苏丁那·咖兰达之子为阇那达多的共住弟子,给他出家并授达上。因此说:“苏丁那·咖兰达之子确实在世尊面前得到了出家,得到了达上。”巴利
30.Haṭṭhoti tuṭṭho. Udaggoti pītivasena abbhunnatakāyacitto. Katipāhanti katipayāni divasāni. Balaṃ gāhetvāti sappāyabhojanāni bhuñjanto, ucchādananhāpanādīhi ca kāyaṃ pariharanto, kāyabalaṃ janetvā mātāpitaro vanditvā assumukhaṃ ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ pahāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami…pe… pabbājetu maṃ bhante bhagavāti. Bhagavā samīpe ṭhitaṃ aññataraṃ piṇḍacārikaṃ bhikkhuṃ āmantesi – ‘‘tena hi bhikkhu sudinnaṃ pabbājehi ceva upasampādehi cā’’ti. ‘‘Sādhu, bhante’’ti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā sudinnaṃ kalandaputtaṃ jinadattiyaṃ saddhivihārikaṃ laddhā pabbājesi ceva upasampādesi ca. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘alattha khosudinno kalandaputto bhagavato santike pabbajjaṃ, alattha upasampada’’nti.
在这里先停一下。不过,所有的义注里都讲到了出家与达上,而我们则要完全按照现存巴利圣典的次第,在《犍度》中来讲说。而且不只是这些,凡是义注师们在《分别》中已经讲过的、又应当在《犍度》或《附随》中讲说的内容,我们都会在各自相应的地方一一讲说。这样讲说时,注释就是顺着圣典的次第来完成的。因此,那些想依据各种判定来了解的人,只要顺着圣典的次第阅读这部律藏注释,各种判定就会很容易明白。巴利
Ettha pana ṭhatvā sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca kathitā. Mayaṃ pana yathāṭhitapāḷivaseneva khandhake kathayissāma. Na kevalañcetaṃ, aññampi yaṃ khandhake vā parivāre vā kathetabbaṃ aṭṭhakathācariyehi vibhaṅgekathitaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ tattha tattheva kathayissāma. Evañhi kathiyamāne pāḷikkameneva vaṇṇanā katā hoti. Tato tena tena vinicchayena atthikānaṃ pāḷikkameneva imaṃ vinayasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ oloketvā so so vinicchayo suviññeyyo bhavissatīti.
“受达上不久”是指:受达上之后时间还不长;也就是说,从受达上那时起,还没过多久。“这样的”是指这种类型、这种性质的。“头陀功德”是指能抖落烦恼的功德。“受持而住”是指接受、持守之后,依之而行、而生活。“是林野住者”是指舍弃村落附近的住处,依林野头陀支而成为住在森林里的人。“是乞食者”是指拒绝额外的获得,舍弃十四种食,依乞食头陀支而成为乞食者。“是粪扫衣者”是指舍弃居士布施的衣服,依粪扫衣头陀支而成为粪扫衣者。“是次第乞食者”是指舍弃贪欲而行,依次第乞食头陀支而成为次第乞食者;他挨家挨户地入村乞食。“跋耆村”是指跋耆人的村庄,或跋耆地方的村庄。巴利
Acirūpasampannoti aciraṃ upasampanno hutvā; upasampadato nacirakāleyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Evarūpeti evaṃvidhe evaṃjātike. Dhutaguṇeti kilesaniddhunanake guṇe. Samādāya vattatīti samādiyitvā gaṇhitvā vattati carati viharati. Āraññiko hotīti gāmantasenāsanaṃ paṭikkhipitvā āraññikadhutaṅgavasena araññavāsiko hoti. Piṇḍapātikoti atirekalābhapaṭikkhepena cuddasa bhattāni paṭikkhipitvā piṇḍapātikadhutaṅgavasena piṇḍapātiko hoti. Paṃsukūlikoti gahapaticīvaraṃ paṭikkhipitvā paṃsukūlikadhutaṅgavasena paṃsukūliko hoti. Sapadānacārikoti loluppacāraṃ paṭikkhipitvā sapadānacārikadhutaṅgavasena sapadānacāriko hoti; gharapaṭipāṭiyā bhikkhāya pavisati. Vajjigāmanti vajjīnaṃ gāmaṃ vajjīsu vā gāmaṃ.
在“富裕、大富”等说法里,因为受用之物和资具广大,所以叫“富裕”;也就是说,他们受用的东西和受用的资具都广大、众多、质地优良。因为储存积攒的财富广大,所以叫“大富”。因为每天开销所算的受用广大,所以叫“大受用”。比起其他受用物,金和银本身更丰足,所以叫“金银丰足”。因为作为装饰、能让人生起喜悦的资财资具丰足,所以叫“资财充裕”。因为用来交易周转的财谷丰足,所以叫“财谷丰足”,应当这样理解。巴利
Aḍḍhā mahaddhanātiādīsu upabhogaparibhogūpakaraṇamahantatāya aḍḍhā; ye hi tesaṃ upabhogā yāni ca upabhogūpakaraṇāni, tāni mahantāni bahulāni sārakānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Nidhetvā ṭhapitadhanamahantatāya mahaddhanā. Mahābhogāti divasaparibbayasaṅkhātabhogamahantatāya mahābhogā. Aññehi upabhogehi jātarūparajatasseva pahūtatāya pahūtajātarūparajatā. Alaṅkārabhūtassa vittūpakaraṇassa pītipāmojjakaraṇassa pahūtatāya pahūtavittūpakaraṇā. Vohāravasena parivattentassa dhanadhaññassa pahūtatāya pahūtadhanadhaññāti veditabbā.
把住处收拾好,意思是把住处整理好;把它安放妥当,使它不会损坏。六十锅左右,是按数量来说,有六十锅。这里每一锅饭够十位比丘吃,那么全部加起来就是六百位比丘的饭。他们送来食物供养:这里“送来”就是“供养”。送来什么?食物。食物本身就是供养,所以叫食物供养,也就是那份食物供养。“送来”的意思是迎面送来,也就是拿着它来到他面前。这有多少呢?六十锅。所以说“他们送来六十锅左右的食物供养”。分给比丘们之后:因为他自己是严格只吃乞食的修行者,想按次第乞食,所以为了给比丘们享用而让出、布施给他们。这位尊者正是为了“比丘们能得到利养,我也不会因为乞食而劳累”这个目的才来的。因此,他做与自己来意相符的事,把食物分给比丘们后,自己就进村乞食了。巴利
Senāsanaṃsaṃsāmetvāti senāsanaṃ paṭisāmetvā; yathā na vinassati tathā naṃ suṭṭhu ṭhapetvāti attho. Saṭṭhimatte thālipāketi gaṇanaparicchedato saṭṭhithālipāke. Ekameko cettha thālipāko dasannaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bhattaṃ gaṇhāti. Taṃ sabbampi channaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ bhattaṃ hoti. Bhattābhihāraṃ abhihariṃsūti ettha abhiharīyatīti abhihāro. Kiṃ abhiharīyati? Bhattaṃ. Bhattameva abhihāro bhattābhihāro, taṃ bhattābhihāraṃ. Abhihariṃsūti abhimukhā hariṃsu. Tassa santikaṃ gahetvā āgamaṃsūti attho. Etassa kiṃ pamāṇanti? Saṭṭhi thālipākā. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘saṭṭhimatte thālipāke bhattābhihāraṃ abhihariṃsū’’ti. Bhikkhūnaṃ vissajjetvāti sayaṃ ukkaṭṭhapiṇḍapātikattā sapadānacāraṃ caritukāmo bhikkhūnaṃ paribhogatthāya pariccajitvā datvā. Ayaṃ hi āyasmā ‘‘bhikkhū ca lābhaṃ lacchanti ahañca piṇḍakena na kilamissāmī’’ti etadatthameva āgato. Tasmā attano āgamanānurūpaṃ karonto bhikkhūnaṃ vissajjetvā sayaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi.
31 亲族婢女,就是亲属家的女仆。隔夜粥,是指放了一夜、超过一夜已经变质发臭的。这里的词义是:因为变质的过失而被压倒,就叫隔夜;隔夜本身就是隔夜的。或者说,这是对超过一夜之物的称呼,也就是隔夜的这个东西,那就是隔夜的。粥,是指大麦粥。想要丢掉,是因为这东西连奴仆、佣人甚至牛都不值得受用,所以像丢垃圾一样想把它扔到外面去。如果,是指如果这个。姊妹,是用圣者的称呼方式叫那位亲族婢女。应舍弃之法,就是具有应当被丢弃的性质。这里说的是:姊妹,如果这个应当被舍弃、已经放弃执持的东西要丢到外面去,那就把它倒进我这里的钵里吧。巴利
31.Ñātidāsīti ñātakānaṃ dāsī. Ābhidosikanti pārivāsikaṃ ekarattātikkantaṃ pūtibhūtaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ padattho – pūtibhāvadosena abhibhūtoti abhidoso, abhidosova ābhidosiko, ekarattātikkantassa vā nāmasaññā esā, yadidaṃ ābhidosikoti, taṃ ābhidosikaṃ. Kummāsanti yavakummāsaṃ. Chaḍḍetukāmā hotīti yasmā antamaso dāsakammakarānampi gorūpānampi aparibhogāraho, tasmā taṃ kacavaraṃ viya bahi chaḍḍetukāmā hoti. Sacetanti sace etaṃ. Bhaginīti ariyavohārena ñātidāsiṃ ālapati. Chaḍḍanīyadhammanti chaḍḍetabbasabhāvaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘bhagini, etaṃ sace bahi chaḍḍanīyadhammaṃ nissaṭṭhapariggahaṃ, taṃ idha me patte ākirā’’ti.
那么,能不能这样说呢?这算不算是一种表示或运用言语呢?不算。为什么?因为已经放弃了对它的执持。凡是应当丢弃、已经放弃执持、物主对它已无贪着的东西,对这一切说“给吧、拿来吧、倒在这里吧”,都是可以的。就像出身于圣者世家、地位崇高的护国尊者也曾说:“把这该丢弃的粥倒进我钵里来吧。”所以,像这样该丢弃的东西,或者其他没有被执持的,比如林中的果实、药材之类,全都可以随意让人拿来享用,不必心生疑虑。“手”:为了接取食物而把钵递出去时,从手腕开始算起的两只手。“脚”:从下衣边缘开始算起的两只脚。“音声”:说出“姊妹,如果这个……”这句话时的音声。“取了相”:认取了在家时曾经留意过的形貌特征,认出了、辨认出来了。因为须丁尊者在世尊成道第十二年出家,到第二十年时进入亲族家中乞食,那时他自己已经出家八年;所以那位亲族婢女一见到他并没有认出来,但她取了相。巴利
Kiṃ pana evaṃ vattuṃ labbhati, viññatti vā payuttavācā vā na hotīti? Na hoti. Kasmā? Nissaṭṭhapariggahattā. Yañhi chaḍḍanīyadhammaṃ nissaṭṭhapariggahaṃ, yattha sāmikā anālayā honti, taṃ sabbaṃ ‘‘detha āharatha idha ākirathā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Tathā hi aggaariyavaṃsiko āyasmā raṭṭhapālopi ‘‘chaḍḍanīyadhammaṃ kummāsaṃ idha me patte ākirā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.299) avaca. Tasmā yaṃ evarūpaṃ chaḍḍanīyadhammaṃ aññaṃ vā apariggahitaṃ vanamūlaphalabhesajjādikaṃ taṃ sabbaṃ yathāsukhaṃ āharāpetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ, na kukkuccāyitabbaṃ. Hatthānanti bhikkhāggahaṇatthaṃ pattaṃ upanāmayato maṇibandhato pabhuti dvinnampi hatthānaṃ. Pādānanti nivāsanantato paṭṭhāya dvinnampi pādānaṃ. Sarassāti ‘‘sacetaṃ bhaginī’’ti vācaṃ nicchārayato sarassa ca. Nimittaṃ aggahesīti gihikāle sallakkhitapubbaṃ ākāraṃ aggahesi sañjāni sallakkhesi. Sudinno hi bhagavato dvādasame vasse pabbajito vīsatime vasse ñātikulaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭho sayaṃ pabbajjāya aṭṭhavassiko hutvā; tena naṃ sā ñātidāsī disvāva na sañjāni, nimittaṃ pana aggahesīti.
须丁的母亲,她这样说道:因为面对这位已经出家、身份极为尊贵的少主,她不敢直接说出“尊者,您是我的少主须丁吗?”这样的话,便急忙走进屋里,把这件事告诉了须丁的母亲。“喂”是表示告知意义的语气词。“姊妹,如果是真的”这里,“je”是用于称呼的语气词。因为那个地方的人习惯这样称呼女仆,所以这里应当理解为:“尊贵的女仆,如果你说的是真的。”巴利
Sudinnassa mātaraṃ etadavocāti atigarunā pabbajjūpagatena sāmiputtena saddhiṃ ‘‘tvaṃ nu kho me, bhante, ayyo sudinno’’tiādivacanaṃ vattuṃ avisahantī vegena gharaṃ pavisitvā sudinnassa mātaraṃ etaṃ avoca. Yaggheti ārocanatthe nipāto. Sace je saccanti ettha jeti ālapane nipāto. Evañhi tasmiṃ dese dāsijanaṃ ālapanti, tasmā ‘‘tvaṃ, bhoti dāsi, sace saccaṃ bhaṇasī’’ti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
32 在某一个墙根:据说在那个地方,施主们的家里都有厅堂,里面摆好了座位,还备好了饮用水和酸粥。出家人乞食之后,就坐在那里吃。如果愿意,他们也会拿施主家的东西。因此,那个“某一个墙根”也应该理解为某个家族这样一间厅堂里的某一个墙根。因为出家人不会像可怜人那样,坐在不合适的地方吃东西。巴利
32.Aññataraṃ kuṭṭamūlanti tasmiṃ kira dese dānapatīnaṃ gharesu sālā honti, āsanāni cettha paññattāni honti, upaṭṭhāpitaṃ udakakañjiyaṃ; tattha pabbajitā piṇḍāya caritvā nisīditvā bhuñjanti. Sace icchanti, dānapatīnampi santakaṃ gaṇhanti. Tasmā tampi aññatarassa kulassa īdisāya sālāya aññataraṃ kuṭṭamūlanti veditabbaṃ. Na hi pabbajitā kapaṇamanussā viya asāruppe ṭhāne nisīditvā bhuñjantīti.
“父亲,难道真有吗?”这里,“有”是“存在”的意思;“难道”是表示疑问和揣度的虚词。这段话的意思是:“父亲苏丁那,我们难道有财富吗?我们不该被人说成是穷光蛋,可你却坐在这种地方吃隔夜的凝乳食品。”同样:“父亲苏丁那,我们难道有命在吗?我们不该被人说成是死人,可你却坐在这种地方吃隔夜的凝乳食品。”同样:“父亲苏丁那,我想,你心里应该是依着教法得到了沙门的功德吧,所以你虽然是被美味滋养长大的,却能面不改色地把这令人恶心的隔夜凝乳食品当成甘露一样吃下去。”巴利
Atthi nāma tātāti ettha atthīti vijjamānatthe; nāmāti pucchanatthe maññanatthe ca nipāto. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘atthi nu kho, tāta sudinna, amhākaṃ dhanaṃ, na mayaṃ niddhanāti vattabbā, yesaṃ no tvaṃ īdise ṭhāne nisīditvā ābhidosikaṃ kummāsaṃ paribhuñjissasi’’; tathā ‘‘atthi nu kho, tāta sudinna, amhākaṃ jīvitaṃ, na mayaṃ matāti vattabbā, yesaṃ no tvaṃ īdise ṭhāne nisīditvā ābhidosikaṃ kummāsaṃ paribhuñjissasi’’; tathā ‘‘atthi maññe, tāta sudinna, tava abbhantare sāsanaṃ nissāya paṭiladdho samaṇaguṇo, yaṃ tvaṃ subhojanarasasaṃvaḍḍhitopi imaṃ jigucchaneyyaṃ ābhidosikaṃ kummāsaṃ amatamiva nibbikāro paribhuñjissasī’’ti.
那位居士被痛苦逼得没法把话完整说清楚,只说了这么一句:“苏丁那啊,你竟然要吃隔夜粥吗?”
文字分析家们指出这里的一个语法特点:由于“没法相信、没法接受”这一含义,在“atthi nāma”一词作为前接词的情况下,“paribhuñjissasi(你将吃)”采用了未来时态。这句话的意思是:“竟然有……你还要吃”,这种事我连亲眼见到都不敢相信,也没法接受。
其中“ābhidosika(隔夜的)”的意思是:这隔夜粥是从你家里拿来的。也有写成“tatoyan”的版本。还有人读作“tadāyan”,那就不对了。
“往自己父亲的住处”就是往自己父亲的住处去;长老因为对父亲怀有亲情,就变得顺从,于是去了。
“接受了”是说:长老虽然是只接受最上等食物的头陀行者,但他心想:“如果我连一顿饭都不接受,他们一定会非常难过”,于是出于对亲属的怜悯就接受了。巴利
So pana gahapati dukkhābhitunnatāya etamatthaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā vattumasakkonto ‘‘atthi nāma, tāta sudinna, ābhidosikaṃ kummāsaṃ paribhuñjissasī’’ti ettakameva avoca. Akkharacintakā panettha imaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ vadanti – anokappanāmarisanatthavasena etaṃ atthināmasadde upapade ‘‘paribhuñjissasī’’ti anāgatavacanaṃ kataṃ. Tassāyamattho – atthi nāma…pe… paribhuñjissasi, idaṃ paccakkhampi ahaṃ na saddahāmi na marisayāmīti. Tatāyaṃ ābhidosikoti tato tava gehato ayaṃ ābhidosiko kummāso laddhoti attho. Tatoyantipi pāṭho. Tadāyantipi paṭhanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Yena sakapitu nivesananti yena sakassa pitu attano pitu nivesananti attho; thero pitari pemeneva subbaco hutvā agamāsi. Adhivāsesīti thero ukkaṭṭhapiṇḍapātikopi samāno ‘‘sace ekabhattampi na gahessāmi, ativiya nesaṃ domanassaṃ bhavissatī’’ti ñātīnaṃ anukampāya adhivāsesi.
33 把“涂抹”(opuñjāpetvā)理解为“让人涂上、让人抹上”。“一金币”(ekaṃ hiraññaṃ)里的“金币”,要理解为迦哈波那钱币。“人”(puriso)要理解为不高不矮、中等身材的人。“覆盖物”(tirokaraṇīyaṃ)是依处格,表示作用,意思是用布幔或围墙围起来;也可以解释为“用它来遮盖”,所以叫覆盖物,也就是把它围起来,意思是四周环绕。“那么”(tena hi)的意思是:因为今天须丁会来,就因为这个缘故。“hi”只是用来补足音节的虚词。“因此”(tena)也是一个表示催促的虚词。巴利
33.Opuñjāpetvāti upalimpāpetvā. Ekaṃ hiraññassāti ettha hiraññanti kahāpaṇo veditabbo. Purisoti nātidīgho nātirasso majjhimappamāṇo veditabbo. Tirokaraṇīyanti karaṇatthe bhummaṃ; sāṇipākārena parikkhipitvāti attho. Atha vā tiro karonti etenāti tirokaraṇīyaṃ, taṃ parikkhipitvā; samantato katvāti attho. Tena hīti yasmā ajja sudinno āgamissati tena kāraṇena. Hi iti padapūraṇamatte nipāto. Tenāti ayampi vā uyyojanatthe nipātoyeva.
34 “午前时分”:这里虽然经文没有提到告知时间,但应该理解为他正是在被告知的那个时间去的。“这是你的,孩子”:他指着两堆财物这样说。“母亲的”:指生母的。“母系财”:指从母亲那边来的;意思是,这是你外祖母——也就是你母亲的母亲——来这个家时给的财物。他用轻蔑的语气说“女人的,女人财”。意思是:所谓女人的财物,不过是为了女人自己用的沐浴粉之类的东西而得到的财物,能有多少呢?你倒看看那数量。或者也可以这样理解:孩子苏丁那,这是你母亲的财物,而且是母系财,不是我给的,只属于你母亲。不过这财物不是靠耕种或经商得来的,而是女人的女人财。所谓女人财,就是女人从娘家嫁到夫家时,为了沐浴粉之类而得到的财物,那数量也就只有这么多。这里的意思应当这样理解。巴利
34.Pubbaṇhasamayanti ettha kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ kālārocanaṃ na vuttaṃ, atha kho ārociteyeva kāle agamāsīti veditabbo. Idaṃ te tātāti dve puñje dassento āha. Mātūti janettiyā. Mattikanti mātito āgataṃ; idaṃ te mātāmahiyā mātu imaṃ gehaṃ āgacchantiyā dinnadhananti attho. Itthikāya itthidhananti hīḷento āha . Itthikāya nāma itthiparibhogānaṃyeva nhānacuṇṇādīnaṃ atthāya laddhaṃ dhanaṃ kittakaṃ bhaveyya. Tassāpi tāva parimāṇaṃ passa. Atha vā idaṃ te tāta sudinna mātu dhanaṃ, tañca kho mattikaṃ, na mayā dinnaṃ, tava mātuyeva santakanti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ panetaṃ na kasiyā na vaṇijjāya sambhūtaṃ, apica kho itthikāya itthidhanaṃ. Yaṃ itthikāya ñātikulato sāmikakulaṃ gacchantiyā laddhabbaṃ nhānacuṇṇādīnaṃ atthāya itthidhanaṃ, taṃ tāva ettakanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
还有一份是父亲那边的,另一份是祖父那边的:凡是属于你父亲和祖父们所有的,那是另外一份。埋藏起来的和放出去生息的非常多;这里“祖父”应当理解为省略了派生词尾。也有“曾祖父”这种读法。孩子苏丁那,还俗之后是可以得到的:孩子苏丁那,舍弃了最上的圣者标志——出家相,回到低劣的在家人身份之后,是可以得到财富来受用的,并不是得不到受用。你出家不是因为害怕国王,也不是因为被债主逼着才出家的。孩子,我不能:这里称“孩子”,是出于对世俗亲情的爱,不是因为沙门的威德。“我不能”就是我做不到。“我没有能力”就是我不堪能,我没有那个本事。巴利
Aññaṃ pettikaṃ aññaṃ pitāmahanti yaṃ pana te pitu ca pitāmahānañca santakaṃ, taṃ aññaṃyeva. Nihitañca payuttañca ativiya bahu; ettha ca pitāmahanti taddhitalopaṃ katvā veditabbaṃ. Petāmahanti vā pāṭho. Labbhā tāta sudinna hīnāyāvattitvāti tāta, sudinna, uttamaṃ ariyaddhajaṃ pabbajitaliṅgaṃ pahāya hīnāya gihibhāvāya āvattitvā labbhā bhogā bhuñjituṃ, nālabbhā bhuñjituṃ, na tvaṃ rājabhīto pabbajito, na iṇāyikehi palibuddho hutvāti. Tāta na ussahāmīti ettha pana tātāti vacanaṃ gehasitapemena āha, na samaṇatejena. Na ussahāmīti na sakkomi. Na visahāmīti nappahomi, na samatthomhi.
“居士,我们想对您说。”这句话是凭着沙门的威德说的。“不要过分拉扯”:你对我所怀的那份亲情,不要因为愤怒而过分拉扯;意思就是说,希望你不要生气。于是长者心想“我儿子像是想给我一些照顾”,满心欢喜地说:“苏丁那,我儿,你说吧。”
“那么”:这是一个表示催促的虚词,形态上像是变格。“以此为缘”:就是以此为因、以此为缘;应当知道这里主格词用了“to”的语尾,而且在复合词中没有省略。“或恐惧”:就是前面所说的“但愿国王们不要夺走我的财富”之类对国王等的恐惧,意思是心里惊恐。“战栗”:指被国王或盗贼逼着“交出财物”而受刑时,身体的僵硬、颤抖、心脏的颤动。“身毛竖立”:恐惧生起时,汗毛竖立、向上直立的状态。“守护”:指对内对外、夜里白天都加以守护。巴利
‘‘Vadeyyāma kho taṃ gahapatī’’ti idaṃ pana vacanaṃ samaṇatejenāha. Nātikaḍḍheyyāsīti yaṃ te mayi pemaṃ patiṭṭhitaṃ, taṃ kodhavasena na atikaḍḍheyyāsi; sace na kujjheyyāsīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tato seṭṭhi ‘‘putto me saṅgahaṃ maññe kattukāmo’’ti udaggacitto āha – ‘‘vadehi tāta sudinnā’’ti. Tenahīti uyyojanatthe vibhattipatirūpako nipāto. Tatonidānanti taṃnidānaṃ taṃhetukanti paccattavacanassa to-ādeso veditabbo; samāse cassa lopābhāvo. Bhayaṃ vāti ‘‘kinti me bhoge neva rājāno hareyyu’’ntiādinā nayena vuttaṃ rājādibhayaṃ; cittutrāsoti attho. Chambhitattanti rājūhi vā corehi vā ‘‘dhanaṃ dehī’’ti kammakāraṇaṃ kāriyamānassa kāyiñjanaṃ kāyakampo hadayamaṃsacalanaṃ. Lomahaṃsoti uppanne bhaye lomānaṃ haṃsanaṃ uddhaggabhāvo. Ārakkhoti anto ca bahi ca rattiñca divā ca ārakkhaṇaṃ.
35 于是长者居士把财富展示给儿子看,想用自己在家人的身份来引诱他还俗,却没能成功,就心想:“如今对男人来说,没有比女人更像束缚的了。”于是叫来他以前的妻子,说:“那么,媳妇啊。”所谓“以前的妻子”,就是过去的伴侣,从前在家时的妻子,曾经一起享受居家之乐与受用的伴侣,即过去的妻子,这是意思。“那么”是因为什么原因呢?因为对男人来说,没有比女人更像束缚的了。“抓住脚”就是抓住脚;这是以处格表示宾格,或者就是在脚上抓住那人。“是怎样的一些天女呢,尊者?”为什么这样说呢?据说那时,看见许多刹帝利少年、婆罗门少年、长者子舍弃大财富而出家,那些不知出家功德的人便发起这样的谈论:“这些人为什么出家呢?”另一些人说:“是为了天女、天乐的缘故。”这话便传扬开来。他抓住这话,就这样说了。长老驳斥那话,说道:“不,姐妹。”所谓“对待”,就是称呼、说。她就在那里昏迷倒地:看见他用“姐妹”的称呼来对待自己,便想:“如今他对我无所需了,他把我这个原本是妻子的人,看作和自己同母胎所生的女孩一样。”于是生起强烈的忧愁,就在那个地方昏迷倒地;倒下的意思。巴利
35.Tena hi vadhūti seṭṭhi gahapati dhanaṃ dassetvā puttaṃ attanā gihibhāvatthāya palobhetuṃ asakkonto ‘‘mātugāmasadisaṃ dāni purisānaṃ bandhanaṃ natthī’’ti maññitvā tassa purāṇadutiyikaṃ āmantesi – ‘‘tena hi vadhū’’ti. Purāṇadutiyikanti purāṇaṃ dutiyikaṃ pubbe gihikāle dutiyikaṃ, gehasitasukhupabhogasahāyikaṃ bhūtapubbabhariyanti attho. Tena hīti yena kāraṇena mātugāmasadisaṃ bandhanaṃ natthi. Pādesu gahetvāti pāde gahetvā; upayogatthe bhummavacanaṃ, pādesu vā taṃ gahetvā. ‘‘Kīdisā nāma tā ayyaputta accharāyo’’ti kasmā evamāha? Tadā kira sambahule khattiyakumārepi brāhmaṇakumārepi seṭṭhiputtepi mahāsampattiyo pahāya pabbajante disvā pabbajjāguṇaṃ ajānantā kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpenti – ‘‘kasmā ete pabbajantī’’ti. Athaññe vadanti – ‘‘devaccharānaṃ devanāṭakānaṃ kāraṇā’’ti. Sā kathā vitthārikā ahosi. Taṃ gahetvā ayaṃ evamāhāti. Thero taṃ paṭikkhipanto na kho ahaṃ bhaginīti āha. Samudācaratīti voharati vadeti. Tattheva mucchitā papatāti naṃ bhaginivādena samudācarantaṃ disvā ‘‘anatthiko dāni mayā ayaṃ yo maṃ pajāpatiṃ samānaṃ attanā saddhiṃ ekamātukucchiyā sayitadārikaṃ viya maññatī’’ti samuppannabalavasokā hutvā tasmiṃyeva padese mucchitā papatā; patitāti attho.
别伤害我们——意思是:不要给我们看财物、把女人打发走之后又来伤害我们;因为这种伤害,是出家的人不该有的。所以,亲爱的苏丁那,你就给个种子吧——这里的“所以”,是带着贪爱在催促他。如果你贪爱梵行、愿意修行,那就修吧,修完坐到空中般涅槃也行,但你要给我们一个延续家族血脉的儿子。别让离车族人在我们没有儿子的情况下把我们的财产没收走——因为我们住在离车族诸王统治的国土里,他们会在你父亲去世后,把我们这么大的家产、这么大的财富,因为没有儿子、没有守护家业的儿子,直接收进他们的王宫。愿他们别这么做,别让他们没收。巴利
Mā no viheṭhayitthāti mā amhe dhanaṃ dassetvā mātugāmañca uyyojetvā viheṭhayittha; vihesā hesā pabbajitānanti. Tena hi tāta sudinna bījakampi dehīti ettha tena hīti abhiratiyaṃ uyyojeti. Sace tvaṃ abhirato brahmacariyaṃ carasi, caritvā ākāse nisīditvā parinibbāyitā hohi, amhākaṃ pana kulavaṃsabījakaṃ ekaṃ puttaṃ dehi. Mā no aputtakaṃ sāpateyyaṃ licchavayo atiharāpesunti mayañhi licchavīnaṃ gaṇarājūnaṃ rajje vasāma, te te pituno accayena imaṃ sāpateyyaṃ evaṃ mahantaṃ amhākaṃ vibhavaṃ aputtakaṃ kuladhanarakkhakena puttena virahitaṃ attano rājantepuraṃ atiharāpeyyunti, taṃ te mā atiharāpesuṃ, mā atiharāpentūti.
“母亲,这件事我能做到。”他为什么这样说呢?据说他心里这样想:“这些财产只有我一个人是主人,没有别人。他们为了守护财产,一定会一直缠着我;这样一来,我就没法安安心心地去修沙门法了。但如果能有个儿子,他们就会放手,到那时我就能随心所欲地修沙门法了。”他看清了这个道理,所以才这样说。巴利
Etaṃ kho me, amma, sakkā kātunti kasmā evamāha? So kira cintesi – ‘‘etesaṃ sāpateyyassa ahameva sāmī, añño natthi. Te maṃ sāpateyyarakkhaṇatthāya niccaṃ anubandhissanti; tenāhaṃ na lacchāmi appossukko samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ, puttakaṃ pana labhitvā oramissanti, tato ahaṃ yathāsukhaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ karissāmī’’ti imaṃ nayaṃ passanto evamāhāti.
36 “花”是月经期间所流出的血的名称。女人到了经期,在胎儿着床的位置会生出红色的小疖子,长满七天后破裂,血就从那里流出来,这个血就叫作“花”。当这血还很旺盛、流得很多的时候,即使交合,结生也不会成立,会随着污垢一起流出来;而当污垢流出、子宫清净之后,交合所成的结生很快就会着床。“她的花已生起”,意思是她的花已经出现,这是省略了“a”音的连音。“抓住前妻的手臂”,意思是抓住前妻的那条手臂。巴利
36.Pupphanti utukāle uppannalohitassa nāmaṃ. Mātugāmassa hi utukāle gabbhapatiṭṭhānaṭṭhāne lohitavaṇṇā piḷakā saṇṭhahitvā satta divasāni vaḍḍhitvā bhijjanti, tato lohitaṃ paggharati, tassetaṃ nāmaṃ ‘‘puppha’’nti. Taṃ pana yāva balavaṃ hoti bahu paggharati, tāva dinnāpi paṭisandhi na tiṭṭhati, doseneva saddhiṃ paggharati; dose pana paggharite suddhe vatthumhi dinnā paṭisandhi khippaṃ patiṭṭhāti. Pupphaṃsā uppajjīti pupphaṃ assā uppajji; akāralopena sandhi purāṇadutiyikāya bāhāyaṃ gahetvāti purāṇadutiyikāya yā bāhā, tatra naṃ gahetvāti attho.
“在学处尚未制定时”,说的是第一条巴拉基格学处还没有制定的时候。据说世尊初成道后的二十年里,比丘们一直让世尊的心感到满意,没有做出这类不净的行为。正是针对这件事,世尊才说了这部经:“诸比丘,确实有过那么一时,比丘们让我的心感到满意。”当时世尊没有看到不净的行为,所以既没有制定巴拉基格,也没有制定桑喀地谢思,只是在每一件具体事情发生时,制定了其余五种轻罪的类别。因此说“在学处尚未制定时”。巴利
Apaññatte sikkhāpadeti paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpade aṭṭhapite. Bhagavato kira paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsati vassāni bhikkhū cittaṃ ārādhayiṃsu, na evarūpaṃ ajjhācāramakaṃsu. Taṃ sandhāyeva idaṃ suttamāha – ‘‘ārādhayiṃsu vata me, bhikkhave, bhikkhū ekaṃ samayaṃ citta’’nti (ma. ni. 1.225). Atha bhagavā ajjhācāraṃ apassanto pārājikaṃ vā saṅghādisesaṃ vā na paññapesi. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pana vatthusmiṃ avasese pañca khuddakāpattikkhandhe eva paññapesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘apaññatte sikkhāpade’’ti.
不见过患:世尊现在要制定学处时将会开示过患,而这个人没有看到那个过患,就生起了“没有过失”的想法。因为如果他当时知道“这件事不该做,或者会导致断头之罪”,那么即使是出于信心而出家的良家子,就算因此丧命也不会去做。但在这里,他没有看到过患,就生起了“没有过失”的想法。因此说“不见过患”。“前妻”:这是处格。“令知”:就是令她生起;因为生起也是通过身表来策动的,所以称为“令知”。应当知道,他三次令知,是为了让胎儿形成并确定下来。巴利
Anādīnavadassoti yaṃ bhagavā idāni sikkhāpadaṃ paññapento ādīnavaṃ dassessati, taṃ apassanto anavajjasaññī hutvā. Sace hi ‘‘ayaṃ idaṃ na karaṇīyanti vā mūlacchejjāya vā saṃvattatī’’ti jāneyya, saddhāpabbajito kulaputto tatonidānaṃ jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇantopi na kareyya. Ettha pana ādīnavaṃ apassanto niddosasaññī ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anādīnavadasso’’ti. Purāṇadutiyikāyāti bhummavacanaṃ. Abhiviññāpesīti pavattesi; pavattanāpi hi kāyaviññatticopanato ‘‘viññāpanā’’ti vuccati. Tikkhattuṃ abhiviññāpanañcesa gabbhasaṇṭhānasanniṭṭhānatthamakāsīti veditabbo.
她正是由那种性行为而怀胎,不是以别的方式。那么,是否还有别的方式也能怀胎呢?有的。怎么怀呢?通过身体接触、通过拿取沾有精液的布、通过喝下不净物、通过触摸肚脐、通过看见色相、通过声音、通过气味。因为有些女人在受孕期被欲贪所染,即使只是被男人抓手、抓发辫、触摸身体各部位,也会怀胎。像这样,通过身体接触也能怀胎。巴利
Sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhīti sā ca teneva ajjhācārena gabbhaṃ gaṇhi, na aññathā. Kiṃ pana aññathāpi gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hotīti ? Hoti. Kathaṃ? Kāyasaṃsaggena , coḷaggahaṇena, asucipānena, nābhiparāmasanena, rūpadassanena, saddena, gandhena. Itthiyo hi ekaccā utusamaye chandarāgarattā purisānaṃ hatthaggāha-veṇiggāha-aṅgapaccaṅgaparāmasanaṃ sādiyantiyopi gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Evaṃ kāyasaṃsaggena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti.
伍达义长老的前妻比丘尼,用嘴接住了一部分精液,另一部分则连同布片一起塞进了女根。她因此怀了孕。这样,通过用布接取精液也能导致怀孕。巴利
Udāyittherassa pana purāṇadutiyikā bhikkhunī taṃ asuciṃ ekadesaṃ mukhena aggahesi, ekadesaṃ coḷakeneva saddhiṃ aṅgajāte pakkhipi. Sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhi. Evaṃ coḷaggahaṇena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti.
鹿角的苦行者的母亲是一只母鹿。到了发情期,她来到苦行者小便的地方,喝下了混着精液的小便。她因此怀了胎,生下了鹿角。像这样,就是因为喝了不净之物而怀胎。巴利
Migasiṅgatāpasassa mātā migī utusamaye tāpasassa passāvaṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā sasambhavaṃ passāvaṃ pivi. Sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhitvā migasiṅgaṃ vijāyi. Evaṃ asucipānena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti.
沙摩菩萨的父母视力衰退了,帝释天神知道后,想给他们一个儿子,就对苦行者杜库罗说:“你们还能行淫欲之事吗?”对方回答:“我们不需要这个,我们已经出家修仙人梵行了。”帝释天神便说:“那就在她受孕期,用拇指去碰她的肚脐吧。”他就照做了。她因此怀了胎,生下了沙摩苦行者童子。像这样,通过碰触肚脐就能怀胎。按照同样的道理,曼达亚和灯光王的故事也应当这样理解。巴利
Sāmassa pana bodhisattassa mātāpitūnaṃ cakkhuparihāniṃ ñatvā sakko puttaṃ dātukāmo dukūlapaṇḍitaṃ āha – ‘‘vaṭṭati tumhākaṃ methunadhammo’’ti? ‘‘Anatthikā mayaṃ etena, isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitāmhā’’ti. ‘‘Tena hi imissā utusamaye aṅguṭṭhena nābhiṃ parāmaseyyāthā’’ti. So tathā akāsi. Sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhitvā sāmaṃ tāpasadārakaṃ vijāyi. Evaṃ nābhiparāmasanena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti. Eteneva nayena maṇḍabyassa ca caṇḍapajjotassa ca vatthu veditabbaṃ.
怎样由看见男子而怀胎呢?这里,某一女人在月经期没能和男子接触,因为贪欲的驱使,待在家里凝视男子,就像后宫里的嫔妃一样,她因此就怀了胎。这样,由看见男子而怀胎。巴利
Kathaṃ rūpadassanena hoti? Idhekaccā itthī utusamaye purisasaṃsaggaṃ alabhamānā chandarāgavasena antogehagatāva purisaṃ upanijjhāyati rājorodhā viya, sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti. Evaṃ rūpadassanena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti.
不过鹳鸟里根本没有雄性,它们在繁殖季节听到雷声就受孕。母鸡有时听到一只公鸡的叫声,许多只母鸡也会受孕。母牛听到公牛的声音也一样。像这样,就是通过声音而受孕。巴利
Balākāsu pana puriso nāma natthi, tā utusamaye meghasaddaṃ sutvā gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Kukkuṭiyopi kadāci ekassa kukkuṭassa saddaṃ sutvā bahukāpi gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Tathā gāvī usabhassa. Evaṃ saddena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti.
母牛有时也会因为闻到公牛的气味而怀胎。像这样,就是靠气味而怀胎。巴利
Gāvī eva ca kadāci usabhagandhena gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Evaṃ gandhena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti.
在这里,她却是通过不正当的性行为而怀胎。针对这一点,经中这样说:父母交合在一起,母亲正值经期,乾闼婆已经现前,这样三者和合,才有胎儿的入胎。巴利
Idha panāyaṃ ajjhācārena gabbhaṃ gaṇhi. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘mātāpitaro ca sannipatitā honti, mātā ca utunī hoti, gandhabbo ca paccupaṭṭhito hoti, evaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sannipātā gabbhassāvakkanti hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.408).
地居天发出声音,是因为在世间,造恶业的人根本没有什么隐秘可言。那恶业首先是他自己知道,然后是守护神知道,再然后其他能知他心的天神也知道。所以,那些依止整片树林、能知他心的地居天看见了他的邪行之后,就发出了声音。他们那样发出声音,是为了让其他天神也能听到。是怎么发出的呢?就是说:诸位贤者啊,尼剌部陀的……中略……过患确实已经出现了。这段话的意思,应当依照《毗兰若品》中所说的方式来理解。巴利
Bhummādevā saddamanussāvesunti yasmā natthi loke raho nāma pāpakammaṃ pakubbato. Sabbapaṭhamaṃ hissa taṃ pāpaṃ attanā jānāti, tato ārakkhadevatā, athaññāpi paracittaviduniyo devatā. Tasmāssa paracittavidū sakalavanasaṇḍanissitā bhummā devā taṃ ajjhācāraṃ disvā saddaṃ anussāvesuṃ. Yathā aññepi devā suṇanti, tathā nicchāresuṃ. Kinti ? Nirabbudo vata, bho…pe… ādīnavo uppāditoti. Tassattho verañjakaṇḍe vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
地居天众的声音被听到之后,接着是四大天王天。这里应当知道这个次第:空居天听到了地居天众的声音,四大天王天听到了空居天的声音。梵身天:除了无想有情天和无色界天以外,所有的梵天神都听到了;听了之后,他们也把声音传告出去,应当这样理解。如是,就在那个刹那——也就是苏丁那行邪行的那个刹那;就在那个须臾——也就是行邪行的那个须臾;声音向上传升,一直到梵天界,也就是直到阿迦尼吒梵天界。向上传升的意思是向上生起、升腾,成为一片巨大的喧哗。巴利
Bhummānaṃ devānaṃ saddaṃ sutvā cātumahārājikāti ettha pana bhummānaṃ devānaṃ saddaṃ ākāsaṭṭhadevatā assosuṃ; ākāsaṭṭhānaṃ cātumahārājikāti ayamanukkamo veditabbo. Brahmakāyikāti asaññasatte ca arūpāvacare ca ṭhapetvā sabbepi brahmāno assosuṃ; sutvā ca saddamanussāvesunti veditabbo. Itiha tena khaṇenāti evaṃ tena sudinnassa ajjhācārakkhaṇena. Tena muhuttenāti ajjhācāramuhutteneva. Yāva brahmalokāti yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmalokā. Abbhuggacchīti abhiuggacchi abbhuṭṭhāsi ekakolāhalamahosīti.
她生了一个儿子,生下的这个孩子像黄金铸成的像一样,是最后一生受生的众生。他们给他取名叫“种子”:他们没有再取别的名字。因为外祖母曾说过“再给一个种子吧”,这件事大家都知道,所以他们说“就让他叫种子吧”,于是给他取名为“种子”。而且,他们也就依着儿子的名字,给他的父母也这样取名。所谓“后来”,指的是种子和他的母亲。据说种子七八岁的时候,他母亲在比丘尼众中出家,他也在比丘众中出家,两人依靠善知识,证得了阿拉汉果。因此说:“两人从在家出家,过无家生活,证得了阿拉汉果。”巴利
Puttaṃ vijāyīti suvaṇṇabimbasadisaṃ pacchimabhavikasattaṃ janesi. Bījakoti nāmamakaṃsūti na aññaṃ nāmaṃ kātumadaṃsu, ‘‘bījakampi dehī’’ti mātāmahiyā vuttabhāvassa pākaṭattā ‘‘bījako tvevassa nāmaṃ hotū’’ti ‘‘bījako’’ti nāmamakaṃsu. Puttassa pana nāmavaseneva ca mātāpitūnampissa nāmamakaṃsu. Te aparena samayenāti bījakañca bījakamātarañca sandhāya vuttaṃ. Bījakassa kira sattaṭṭhavassakāle tassa mātā bhikkhunīsu so ca bhikkhūsu pabbajitvā kalyāṇamitte upanissāya arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ubho agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajitvā arahattaṃ sacchākaṃsū’’ti.
37 37. 这样,母子二人的出家都结出了果实。可是父亲却一直活在追悔之中。因此说:“那时,尊者苏丁那确实生起了追悔”等等。其中,“确实生起了”就是“生起了”,“d”这个字母是连接词与词之间的连音。意思是“确实出现了”。所谓“追悔”,是指由邪行引起的后悔。“追悔”也是它的另一个名称。因为这是智者不该做的事,是可鄙的行为,所以叫“追悔”;又因为已经做下的邪行无法挽回,心对此产生扭曲的忆念,所以叫“后悔”。“我确实失利了”:意思是我确实失去了;凡是禅那等功德的丧失,那都是我的损失,不是别人的。“我确实没有得利”:即使我得到了出家、皈依、受持学处等功德,但由于被邪行染污,这些也算不上是我的得利。“我确实恶得”:我虽然得到了这教法,却是以恶行而得的。“我确实没有善得”:不像其他良家子弟那样,我并没有得到善得。为什么?因为我在如此善说的法与律中……修习梵行。“梵行”:指含摄三学的道梵行。“变得消瘦”:因为吃不下、咽不下,身体变得瘦弱,血肉减少。“肤色苍白”:肤色变得枯黄,像枯叶一样。“血管遍布身体”:因为血肉耗尽,身体上只显出血管的脉络。“内心”:因为不断忧思,心停留在内部。不过,一切心都依止心脏而活动,所以也可以说都是“内心”。“心消沉”:在诵习、问答、修禅、增上戒、增上心、增上慧以及履行义务等方面,放弃责任,不活跃,只是因懈怠而消沉、萎缩,所以叫“心消沉”。“痛苦”:因为心的痛苦而痛苦。“忧愁”:因为瞋恨而心败坏,或者因为被忧恼压倒而心变形。“沉思”:因为追悔,像被割了耳朵的驴一样,反复想着这件事。巴利
37. Evaṃ mātāputtānaṃ pabbajjā saphalā ahosi. Pitā pana vippaṭisārābhibhūto vihāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho āyasmato sudinnassaahudeva kukkucca’’ntiādi. Tattha ahudevāti ahu eva, dakāro padasandhikaro. Ahosiyevāti attho. Kukkuccanti ajjhācārahetuko pacchānutāpo. Vippaṭisārotipi tasseva nāmaṃ. So hi viññūhi akattabbatāya kucchitakiriyabhāvato kukkuccaṃ. Kataṃ ajjhācāraṃ nivattetuṃ asamatthatāya taṃ paṭicca virūpaṃ saraṇabhāvato vippaṭisāroti vuccati. Alābhā vata meti mayhaṃ vata alābhā; ye jhānādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ alābhā nāma, te mayhaṃ, na aññassāti adhippāyo. Na vata me lābhāti yepi me paṭiladdhā pabbajjasaraṇagamanasikkhāsamādānaguṇā, tepi neva mayhaṃ lābhā ajjhācāramalīnattā. Dulladdhaṃ vata meti idaṃ sāsanaṃ laddhampi me dulladdhaṃ. Na vata me suladdhanti yathā aññesaṃ kulaputtānaṃ, evaṃ na vata me suladdhaṃ. Kasmā? Yamahaṃ evaṃ svākkhātedhammavinaye…pe… brahmacariyaṃ caritunti. Brahmacariyanti sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Kiso ahosīti khādituṃ vā bhuñjituṃ vā asakkonto tanuko ahosi appamaṃsalohito . Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātoti sañjātuppaṇḍuppaṇḍukabhāvo paṇḍupalāsappaṭibhāgo. Dhamanisanthatagattoti pariyādinnamaṃsalohitattā sirājāleneva santharitagatto. Antomanoti anusocanavasena abbhantareyeva ṭhitacitto. Hadayavatthuṃ nissāya pavattanavasena pana sabbepi antomanāyeva. Līnamanoti uddese paripucchāya kammaṭṭhāne adhisīle adhicitte adhipaññāya vattapaṭipattipūraṇe ca nikkhittadhuro avipphāriko aññadatthu kosajjavaseneva līno saṅkucito mano assāti līnamano. Dukkhīti cetodukkhena dukkhī. Dummanoti dosena duṭṭhamano, virūpamano vā domanassābhibhūtatāya. Pajjhāyīti vippaṭisāravasena vahacchinno viya gadrabho taṃ taṃ cintayi.
38 同伴比丘们:看到他这样把日子耗在聚众闲谈的戏论上,那些跟他相熟、说话投机的比丘们就对他说了这些话。“诸根明净”:因为净信所依之处圆满,所以眼等诸根都圆满具足。“你现在”:这里的“现在”是个语气词,意思就是“那么你”。“你是否”:就是“你是不是”。“不喜乐”:指厌倦,意思是想要还俗。因此,他否定那种不喜乐,说道:“贤友,我并非不喜乐。”而是乐于修习增上善法。“我作了恶业”:意思是我作了一件恶业,它存在、可得、现前,时常就像在我眼前一样。于是,他把这件事说明出来,说了“与前妻……”等等。巴利
38.Sahāyakā bhikkhūti taṃ evaṃbhūtaṃ gaṇasaṅgaṇikāpapañcena vītināmentaṃ disvā yassa vissāsikā kathāphāsukā bhikkhū te naṃ etadavocuṃ. Pīṇindriyoti pasādapatiṭṭhānokāsassa sampuṇṇattā paripuṇṇacakkhuādiindriyo. So dāni tvanti ettha dānīti nipāto, so pana tvanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kaccino tvanti kacci nu tvaṃ . Anabhiratoti ukkaṇṭhito; gihibhāvaṃ patthayamānoti attho. Tasmā tameva anabhiratiṃ paṭikkhipanto āha – ‘‘na kho ahaṃ, āvuso, anabhirato’’ti. Adhikusalānaṃ pana dhammānaṃ bhāvanāya abhiratova ahanti . Atthi me pāpakammaṃ katanti mayā kataṃ ekaṃ pāpakammaṃ atthi upalabbhati saṃvijjati, niccakālaṃ abhimukhaṃ viya me tiṭṭhati. Atha naṃ pakāsento ‘‘purāṇadutiyikāyā’’tiādimāha.
贤友苏丁那,你的这个恶业足以让你生起追悔,也就是说,它有力量让你产生悔恨。“而那恶业”以下应当这样理解前后文的关联:由于那个恶业,你将无法修习梵行,那个恶业足以让你追悔。于是,他们教导他说:“贤友,世尊难道不是以种种方式……”等等。其中,“nanu”是表示认同的语气词。“以种种方式”就是通过各种原因。“为了离欲”就是为了达到离欲。“不是为了有欲”就是不是为了以贪欲去染着。世尊的意思是:有情听闻我所说的这个法之后,将会对一切生存状态和一切享乐离染,而不会贪染——他是为了这个目的而说法的。这个道理适用于所有词句。这些只是同一含义的不同表达方式。“为了离系”就是为了从烦恼中解脱。“不是为了系缚”就是不是为了被束缚。“为了无取”就是为了不执取。“不是为了有取”就是为了不执持。巴利
Alañhi te, āvuso sudinna, kukkuccāyāti āvuso sudinna, tuyhetaṃ pāpakammaṃ alaṃ samatthaṃ kukkuccāya; paṭibalaṃ kukkuccaṃ uppādetunti vuttaṃ hoti. Yaṃ tvanti ādimhi yena pāpena tvaṃ na sakkhissasi brahmacariyaṃ carituṃ, taṃ te pāpaṃ alaṃ kukkuccāyāti evaṃ sambandho veditabbo. Atha naṃ anusāsantā ‘‘nanu āvuso bhagavatā’’tiādimāhaṃsu. Tattha nanūti anumatiggahaṇatthe nipāto. Anekapariyāyenāti anekakāraṇena. Virāgāyāti virāgatthāya. No sarāgāyāti no rāgena rajjanatthāya. Bhagavatā hi ‘‘imaṃ me dhammaṃ sutvā sattā sabbabhavabhogesu virajjissanti, no rajjissantī’’ etadatthāya dhammo desitoti adhippāyo. Esa nayo sabbapadesu. Idaṃ panettha pariyāyavacanamattaṃ. Visaṃyogāyāti kilesehi visaṃyujjanatthāya. No saṃyogāyāti na saṃyujjanatthāya. Anupādānāyāti aggahaṇatthāya. Nosaupādānāyāti na saṅgahaṇatthāya.
那时所谓的“你”,就是指在那个时候的你。对于有贪染的心作意,意思是:当淫欲法伴随着贪欲现行时,你会去思念、构画、反复筹划,并为此目的而努力,这就是它的含义。这个道理适用于所有地方。再者,“离染”等九句,都是针对所证得的出世间涅槃而说的。所以,即使说“为了离染”或“为了摧伏迷醉”,其含义也应当同样理解为“为了涅槃”。因为依靠涅槃、缘于涅槃、以涅槃为条件,贪欲才得以离染、不再存在,所以称为“离染”。又因为依靠它,慢、迷醉、人我迷醉等种种迷醉被摧伏、止息、消失,所以称为“摧伏迷醉”。又因为依靠它,一切欲渴都被调伏、灭尽,所以称为“调伏渴爱”。又因为依靠它,对五种欲乐的执著被彻底摧毁,所以称为“断除执著”。又因为依靠它,三界的轮回被截断,所以称为“截断轮回”。又因为依靠它,一切渴爱彻底灭尽、离染、止息,所以称为“渴爱灭尽、离染、寂灭”。又因为它出离、脱离、不系属于那被称为“结缚”的渴爱——这渴爱编织、系缚、缝合四种生、五趣、七识住、九有情居,使生死不断相续——所以称为涅槃。巴利
Tatthanāma tvanti tasmiṃ nāma tvaṃ. Sarāgāya cetessasīti saha rāgena vattamānāya methunadhammāya cetessasi kappessasi pakappessasi; etadatthaṃ vāyamissasīti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Puna rāgavirāgādīni nava padāni nibbattitalokuttaranibbānameva sandhāya vuttāni. Tasmā rāgavirāgāyāti vā madanimmadanāyāti vā vuttepi ‘‘nibbānatthāyā’’ti evameva attho daṭṭhabbo. Nibbānañhi yasmā taṃ āgamma ārabbha paṭicca rāgo virajjati na hoti, tasmā rāgavirāgoti vuccati. Yasmā pana taṃ āgamma mānamada-purisamadādayo madā nimmadā amadā honti vinassanti, tasmā madanimmadananti vuccati. Yasmā ca taṃ āgamma sabbāpi kāmapipāsā vinayaṃ abbhatthaṃ yāti, tasmā pipāsavinayoti vuccati. Yasmā pana taṃ āgamma pañca kāmaguṇālayā samugghātaṃ gacchanti, tasmā ālayasamugghātoti vuccati. Yasmā ca taṃ āgamma tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ upacchijjati, tasmā vaṭṭupacchedoti vuccati. Yasmā pana taṃ āgamma sabbaso taṇhā khayaṃ gacchati virajjati nirujjhati ca, tasmā taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodhoti vuccati. Yasmā panetaṃ catasso yoniyo, pañca gatiyo, satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, nava ca sattāvāse, aparāparabhāvāya vinanato ābandhanato saṃsibbanato vānanti laddhavohārāya taṇhāya nikkhantaṃ nissaṭaṃ visaṃyuttaṃ, tasmā nibbānanti vuccatīti.
“宣说断除诸欲”,说的是断除事欲和烦恼欲。“遍知欲想”,是从知遍知、度遍知、断遍知这三种遍知的角度,宣说对一切欲想的遍知。“欲渴”,是指对诸欲的渴求,或者想要饮啜诸欲。“欲寻”,是指与欲相应的寻思。“欲热恼”,是指由贪著五种欲乐所生起的热恼与内烧。在这五处当中,所宣说的是能灭尽烦恼的出世间道。不过应当知道,在前三处中,所说的是世间道与出世间道相杂之道。巴利
Kāmānaṃ pahānaṃ akkhātanti vatthukāmānaṃ, kilesakāmānañca pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Kāmasaññānaṃ pariññāti sabbāsampi kāmasaññānaṃ ñātatīraṇapahānavasena tividhā pariññā akkhātā. Kāmapipāsānanti kāmesu pātabyatānaṃ kāme vā pātumicchānaṃ. Kāmavitakkānanti kāmupasañhitānaṃvitakkānaṃ. Kāmapariḷāhānanti pañcakāmaguṇikarāgavasena uppannapariḷāhānaṃ antodāhānaṃ. Imesu pañcasu ṭhānesu kilesakkhayakaro lokuttaramaggova kathito. Sabbapaṭhamesu pana tīsu ṭhānesu lokiyalokuttaramissako maggo kathitoti veditabbo.
贤友,这不是:贤友,事情不是这样,你的恶行不能使没有信心的人产生信心,也不能让已有这种信心的人增长信心。而是:就是这件事。也有“atha kho tanti”这种读法。为了变异:就是为了信心的变异,为了产生追悔。它让那些还没有通过道证得信心的人生起追悔:“我们竟然对这样的法和律生起了信心,而其中却有这样行为恶劣的比丘。”然而,对于那些已经通过道证得信心的人,他们的信心就像须弥山一样,不会被风吹动,即使遇到比这更粗暴的事缘也是如此。因此说“为了某些人的变异”。巴利
Netaṃ āvusoti na etaṃ āvuso, tava pāpakammaṃ appasannānañca pasādāya evarūpānaṃ pasādatthāya na hoti. Atha khvetanti atha kho etaṃ. Atha kho tantipi pāṭho. Aññathattāyāti pasādaññathābhāvāya vippaṭisārāya hoti. Ye maggena anāgatasaddhā, tesaṃ vippaṭisāraṃ karoti – ‘‘īdisepi nāma dhammavinaye mayaṃ pasannā, yatthevaṃ duppaṭipannā bhikkhū’’ti. Ye pana maggenāgatasaddhā, tesaṃ sineru viya vātehi acalo pasādo īdisehi vatthūhi ito vā dāruṇatarehi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ekaccānaṃ aññathattāyā’’ti.
39 他们向世尊报告了这件事,也就是向世尊说明、禀报、告知了这件事。他们报告时,既不是为了讨好,也不是为了制造分裂,不是为了宣扬那位尊者的过失,不是为了把污蔑加到教法上,也不是想着:“世尊听了这件事,就不会让他在教法里站住脚,会把他赶出去。”而是想着:“世尊知道教法里出现了这个祸患后,会制定学处,确立界限、轨范和命令。”所以才报告。巴利
39.Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesunti bhagavato etaṃ atthaṃ ācikkhiṃsu paṭivedayiṃsu. Ārocayamānā ca neva piyakamyatāya na bhedapurekkhāratāya , na tassāyasmato avaṇṇapakāsanatthāya, na kalisāsanāropanatthāya, nāpi ‘‘idaṃ sutvā bhagavā imassa sāsane patiṭṭhaṃ na dassati, nikkaḍḍhāpessati na’’nti maññamānā ārocesuṃ. Atha kho ‘‘imaṃ sāsane uppannaṃ abbudaṃ ñatvā bhagavā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessati, velaṃ mariyādaṃ āṇaṃ ṭhapessatī’’ti ārocesuṃ.
在这条因缘、这件事由中,应当知道:这里所说的“因缘”和“事由”,是因为苏丁那的违犯恶行是制定学处的缘由,所以称为因缘和事由。因为“因”能引生自己的果,就像指示“拿去吧”一样,使果生起;它也能促使造作,使人开始去做或直接去做那件事,因此称为因缘和事由。佛陀、世尊呵责,意思是佛陀、世尊加以呵责、谴责。正如在对那些应受称赞与应受呵责者说称赞与呵责的人当中的最上之人。世尊看到违犯戒律的人,不会生起这样的心:“这个人是因出身、种姓、族姓、经教传承或头陀行而知名、有名声的,对这样的人应当加以保护。”看到贤善有德的人,也不会生起隐藏他功德的心。他只是应当呵责的就呵责,应当称赞的就称赞。而这个人正是应当呵责的。因此,安住于这样的特质、心不动摇的佛陀、世尊,用“不适当”等话语呵责他。巴利
Etasmiṃ nidāne etasmiṃ pakaraṇeti ettha sudinnassa ajjhācāravītikkamo sikkhāpadapaññattiyā kāraṇattā nidānañceva pakaraṇañcāti vuttoti veditabbo. Kāraṇañhi yasmā nideti attano phalaṃ ‘‘gaṇhātha na’’nti dassentaṃ viya appeti, pakaroti ca naṃ kattuṃ ārabhati, karotiyeva vā; tasmā nidānañceva pakaraṇañcāti vuccati. Vigarahi buddho bhagavāti buddho bhagavā vigarahi nindi; yathā taṃ vaṇṇāvaṇṇārahānaṃ vaṇṇañca avaṇṇañca bhaṇantesu aggapuggalo. Na hi bhagavato sīlavītikkamakaraṃ puggalaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ jātiyā vā gottena vā kolaputtiyena vā ganthena vā dhutaṅgena vā ñāto yasassī īdisaṃ puggalaṃ rakkhituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, nāpi pesalaṃ guṇavantaṃ disvā tassa guṇaṃ paṭicchādetuṃ cittaṃ uppajjati. Atha kho garahitabbaṃ garahati eva, pasaṃsitabbañca pasaṃsati eva, ayañca garahitabbo; tasmā taṃ tādilakkhaṇe ṭhito avikampamānena cittena vigarahi buddho bhagavā ‘‘ananucchavika’’ntiādīhi vacanehi.
在这里,这段义注的意思是:愚人!你所做的这种毫无意义、像空壳一样的行为,对于沙门所应具备的法——道、果、涅槃以及教法——来说,是不合适的。它既不随顺它们的表象、光彩和美好,也不跟随、不伴随它们,反而远离了那些法。正因为不合适,所以它就不随顺;它不随顺那些法,反而与之相逆,处在对立的状态。正因为不随顺,所以它就不相称;它不是相称的、相似的、对应的,而是不相似、完全不对应的。正因为不相称,所以它就不是沙门应有的;它不是沙门所做的事。正因为不是沙门应有的,所以它就不合宜。凡是沙门所不应做的事,对沙门来说就不合宜。正因为不合宜,所以就不该做。因为沙门不会去做不合宜的事。而这件事是你做的,所以,愚人!你所做的是不合适的……乃至是不该做的。“怎么会呢”是在问:到底以什么理由、看到什么原因才这样说。接着,为了显示根本没有理由,下文说“愚人!难道不是我……”。这些内容都和前面所说的一样。巴利
Tatthāyaṃ atthavaṇṇanā – yadidaṃ tayā, moghapurisa, tucchamanussa kammaṃ kataṃ, taṃ samaṇakaraṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ maggaphalanibbānasāsanānaṃ vā na anucchavikaṃ, tesaṃ chaviṃ chāyaṃ sundarabhāvaṃ na anveti nānugacchati, atha kho ārakāva tehi dhammehi. Ananucchavikattā eva ca ananulomikaṃ, tesaṃ na anulometi; atha kho vilomaṃ paccanīkabhāve ṭhitaṃ. Ananulomikattā eva ca appatirūpaṃ, patirūpaṃ sadisaṃ paṭibhāgaṃ na hoti, atha kho asadisaṃ appaṭibhāgameva. Appatirūpattā eva ca assāmaṇakaṃ, samaṇānaṃ kammaṃ na hoti. Assāmaṇakattā akappiyaṃ. Yañhi samaṇakammaṃ na hoti, taṃ tesaṃ na kappati. Akappiyattā akaraṇīyaṃ. Na hi samaṇā yaṃ na kappati, taṃ karonti. Tañcetaṃ tayā kataṃ, tasmā ananucchavikaṃ te, moghapurisa, kataṃ…pe… akaraṇīyanti. Kathañhi nāmāti kena nāma kāraṇena, kiṃ nāma kāraṇaṃ passantoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tato kāraṇābhāvaṃ dassento parato ‘‘nanu mayā moghapurisā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ vuttatthameva.
现在,因为他所造的那恶业在成熟时会带来极其强烈的苦果,所以为了把这种果报显示出来,就像悲悯的父母用慈爱的心责备犯了错的儿子一样,世尊以责备的语气说了“愚人哪,宁可……”等话。其中,“āsīviso”是毒蛇,因为毒在它身上来得很快。“ghoraviso”是说它的毒猛烈凶暴,也就是那条毒蛇有猛烈凶暴的毒。“pakkhittaṃ”和“varaṃ”这两个词是关联的。意思是:宁可把男根放进这样一条毒猛烈凶暴的毒蛇口中;如果放进去的话,那还算是好的;是美好、善妙、极好的意思。“Na tvevā”则是指那并非好,并非美好,并非善妙,并非极好。这个道理在一切处都一样。“Kaṇhasappassā”是指黑蛇。“Aṅgārakāsuyā”是指装满炭火的坑,或者炭火堆。“Ādittāyā”是指燃烧着的、带有取来的火色的。“Sampajjalitāyā”是指全面燃烧着的、火焰四射的。“Sajotibhūtāyā”是指有光焰的。所谓从四面八方升起的火焰成为一团光聚,就是这个意思。巴利
Idāni yasmā yaṃ tena pāpakammaṃ kataṃ, taṃ vipaccamānaṃ ativiya dukkhavipākaṃ hoti, tasmāssa taṃ vipākaṃ dassetuṃ katāparādhaṃ viya puttaṃ anukampakā mātāpitaro dayālukena cittena sudinnaṃ paribhāsanto ‘‘varaṃ te moghapurisā’’tiādimāha. Tattha āsu sīghaṃ etassa visaṃ āgacchatīti āsīviso. Ghoraṃ caṇḍamassa visanti ghoraviso, tassa āsīvisassa ghoravisassa. ‘‘Pakkhitta’’nti etassa ‘‘vara’’nti iminā sambandho . Īdisassa āsīvisassa ghoravisassa mukhe aṅgajātaṃ varaṃ pakkhittaṃ; sace pakkhittaṃ bhaveyya, varaṃ siyā; sundaraṃ sādhu suṭṭhu siyāti attho. Na tvevāti na tu eva varaṃ na sundarameva na sādhumeva na suṭṭhumeva. Esa nayo sabbattha. Kaṇhasappassāti kāḷasappassa. Aṅgārakāsuyāti aṅgārapuṇṇakūpe, aṅgārarāsimhi vā. Ādittāyāti padittāya gahitaaggivaṇṇāya. Sampajjalitāyāti samantato pajjalitāya acciyo muccantiyā. Sajotibhūtāyāti sappabhāya. Samantato uṭṭhitāhi jālāhi ekappabhāsamudayabhūtāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“这是什么原因呢?”意思是:我说“宁可”是基于什么原因?是以什么理由呢?“他或许会遭受死亡”:如果有人把男根放进那里,他或许会死,或者遭受几乎要死的痛苦。“而且,以此为因……他将投生”:把男根放进女人的产道,以此为因,造作这件事的人将投生地狱。世尊正是看到这种业的极大过患才呵责他,并不是希望他遭受痛苦。“你竟然在那……中”:在那样一种如此大过患的恶业中,你竟然还……。“yaṃ tvaṃ”里的“yaṃ”是表示轻蔑的虚词。“tvaṃ”是“taṃ”一词的同义词;这两个词,即“yaṃ”或“taṃ”,都表示被轻蔑、被轻视。“asaddhammaṃ”是恶人之法,即下劣人之法;意思是应被他们所亲近。“gāmadhammaṃ”是村落之法,即村落居民的行法。“vasaladhammaṃ”是卑贱者之法,也就是那些安住于恶法、流漏于恶法的卑贱者、下劣之人所行之法;或者,“vasalaṃ”是烦恼流漏之法。“duṭṭhullaṃ”是被烦恼极度染污,粗重、不微细,即不精妙的。“odakantikaṃ”是以水事为终、为末,即具有水事为终结者,那即是“odakantikaṃ”。“rahassaṃ”是隐密处,即在隐蔽处所生起者。因为此法由于可厌恶,不能公开置于他人所见之处,所以说“rahassaṃ”。“dvayaṃdvayasamāpattiṃ”是应以二二而交会,也有“dvayaṃ dvayaṃ samāpattiṃ”的读法。也有人读作“dayaṃ dayaṃ samāpattiṃ”,那是不妥当的。“samāpajjissasi”应与这里“tattha nāma tvaṃ”中所说的“nāma”一词连接,即“samāpajjissasi nāmā”ti。巴利
Taṃ kissa hetūti yaṃ mayā vuttaṃ ‘‘vara’’nti taṃ kissa hetu, katarena kāraṇenāti ce? Maraṇaṃ vā nigaccheyyāti yo tattha aṅgajātaṃ pakkhipeyya, so maraṇaṃ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ. Itonidānañca kho…pe… upapajjeyyāti yaṃ idaṃ mātugāmassa aṅgajāte aṅgajātapakkhipanaṃ, itonidānaṃ tassa kārako puggalo nirayaṃ upapajjeyya; evaṃ kammassa mahāsāvajjataṃ passanto taṃ garahi, na tassa dukkhāgamaṃ icchamāno. Tattha nāma tvanti tasmiṃ nāma evarūpe kamme evaṃ mahāsāvajje samānepi tvaṃ. Yaṃ tvanti ettha yanti hīḷanatthe nipāto. Tvanti taṃ-saddassa vevacanaṃ; dvīhipi yaṃ vā taṃ vā hīḷitamavaññātanti vuttaṃ hoti. Asaddhammanti asataṃ nīcajanānaṃ dhammaṃ; tehi sevitabbanti attho. Gāmadhammanti gāmānaṃ dhammaṃ; gāmavāsikamanussānaṃ dhammanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vasaladhammanti pāpadhamme vasanti paggharantīti vasalā, tesaṃ vasalānaṃ hīnapurisānaṃ dhammaṃ, vasalaṃ vā kilesapaggharaṇakaṃ dhammaṃ. Duṭṭhullanti duṭṭhu ca kilesadūsitaṃ thūlañca asukhumaṃ, anipuṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Odakantikanti udakakiccaṃ antikaṃ avasānaṃ assāti odakantiko, taṃ odakantikaṃ. Rahassanti rahobhavaṃ, paṭicchanne okāse uppajjanakaṃ. Ayañhi dhammo jigucchanīyattā na sakkā āvi aññesaṃ dassanavisaye kātuṃ, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘rahassa’’nti. Dvayaṃdvayasamāpattinti dvīhi dvīhi samāpajjitabbaṃ, dvayaṃ dvayaṃ samāpattintipi pāṭho. Dayaṃ dayaṃ samāpattintipi paṭhanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Samāpajjissasīti etaṃ ‘‘tattha nāma tva’’nti ettha vuttanāmasaddena yojetabbaṃ ‘‘samāpajjissasi nāmā’’ti.
“对许多人来说……你是最初的造作者、是先行者”,这是针对教法而说的。在这个教法里,对于众多人的不善法,你是最初的造作者,因为你是第一个去做的;你是先行者,因为你是第一个走上这条路的;也就是说,你是开门的人、指出方法的人。这里的意思是:许多人得到这个借口后,会学你的样子,去造作各种不善法,比如像猕猴一样行淫之类的行为。巴利
Bahūnaṃkho…pe… ādikattā pubbaṅgamoti sāsanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Imasmiṃ sāsane tvaṃ bahūnaṃ puggalānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ ādikattā, sabbapaṭhamaṃ karaṇato; pubbaṅgamo sabbapaṭhamaṃ etaṃ maggaṃ paṭipannattā; dvāraṃdado, upāyadassakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Imañhi lesaṃ laddhā tava anusikkhamānā bahū puggalā nānappakārake makkaṭiyā methunapaṭisevanādike akusaladhamme karissantīti ayamettha adhippāyo.
“以多种方式”是指:用这些“不适当”等说法所讲的方式,以许多理由。说“难养……懈怠的过患”,意思是:宣说作为难养等基础的不防护的过患、非难和责备。因为安住于不防护的人,自己会变得难养、难供,所以不防护被称为“难养、难供”。又因为安住于不防护的人,自己在四种资具上会生起多欲,即使得到像须弥山那么大的资具也不满足,所以不防护被称为“多欲、不满足”。又因为安住于不防护的人,自己会走向人群的聚集和烦恼的聚集,随顺懈怠,导致八种懈怠事圆满,所以不防护被称为“聚集和懈怠”。巴利
Anekapariyāyenāti imehi ‘‘ananucchavika’’ntiādinā nayena vuttehi, bahūhi kāraṇehi. Dubbharatāya…pe… kosajjassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsitvāti dubbharatādīnaṃ vatthubhūtassa asaṃvarassa avaṇṇaṃ nindaṃ garahaṃ bhāsitvāti attho. Yasmā hi asaṃvare ṭhitassa puggalassa attā dubbharatañceva dupposatañca āpajjati, tasmā asaṃvaro ‘‘dubbharatā, dupposatā’’ti ca vuccati. Yasmā pana asaṃvare ṭhitassa attā catūsu paccayesu mahicchataṃ sineruppamāṇepi ca paccaye laddhā asantuṭṭhitaṃ āpajjati, tasmā asaṃvaro ‘‘mahicchatā, asantuṭṭhitā’’ti ca vuccati. Yasmā ca asaṃvare ṭhitassa attā gaṇasaṅgaṇikāya ceva kilesasaṅgaṇikāya ca saṃvattati, kosajjānugato ca hoti aṭṭhakusītavatthupāripūriyā saṃvattati, tasmā asaṃvaro ‘‘saṅgaṇikā, ceva kosajjañcā’’ti vuccati.
“说易养……精进策励的功德”,意思是:宣说作为易养等基础的防护的功德。因为,舍弃不防护而安住于防护的人,自身易养、易供,在四种资具上成就少欲、无渴爱的状态,并且对每一种资具,都能依所得、依能力、依适宜而成就三种知足,所以防护被称为“易养、易供、少欲、知足”。巴利
Subharatāya…pe… vīriyārambhassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsitvāti subharatādīnaṃ vatthubhūtassa saṃvarassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsitvāti attho. Yasmā hi asaṃvaraṃ pahāya saṃvare ṭhitassa attā subharo hoti suposo, catūsu ca paccayesu appicchataṃ nittaṇhabhāvaṃ āpajjati, ekamekasmiñca paccaye yathālābha-yathābala-yathāsāruppavasena tippabhedāya santuṭṭhiyā saṃvattati, tasmā saṃvaro ‘‘subharatā ceva suposatā ca appiccho ca santuṭṭho cā’’ti vuccati.
因为,舍弃不守护而安住在守护中的人,自身能导向烦恼的削减与抖落,所以守护被称为“削减与抖落”。巴利
Yasmā pana asaṃvaraṃ pahāya saṃvare ṭhitassa attā kilesasallekhanatāya ceva niddhunanatāya ca saṃvattati, tasmā saṃvaro ‘‘sallekho ca dhuto cā’’ti vuccati.
因为,舍弃了不防护而安住在防护中的人,自身不接近那些不净信、不令人喜悦、不善、不适当的身语恶行,也不接近不净信、不令人喜悦、不善、不适当的三种不善寻;反过来,他能圆满成就与之相反的、净信的、令人喜悦的、善的、适当的身语善行以及三种善寻。所以,防护被称为“净信的”。巴利
Yasmā ca asaṃvaraṃ pahāya saṃvare ṭhitassa attā kāyavācānaṃ appāsādikaṃ appasādanīyaṃ asantaṃ asāruppaṃ kāyavacīduccaritaṃ cittassa appāsādikaṃ appasādanīyaṃ asantaṃ asāruppaṃ akusalavitakkattayañca anupagamma tabbiparītassa kāyavacīsucaritassa ceva kusalavitakkattayassa ca pāsādikassa pasādanīyassa santassa sāruppassa pāripūriyā saṃvattati, tasmā saṃvaro ‘‘pāsādiko’’ti vuccati.
既然舍弃不防护、安住于防护的人,自身能促成一切烦恼的损减、超脱,以及八种精进策励事的圆满,因此防护被称为“损减与精进策励”。巴利
Yasmā pana asaṃvaraṃ pahāya saṃvare ṭhitassa attā sabbakilesāpacayabhūtāya, vivaṭṭāya, aṭṭhavīriyārambhavatthupāripūriyā ca saṃvattati, tasmā saṃvaro ‘‘apacayo ceva vīriyārambho cā’’ti vuccatīti.
比丘们,这(法谈)是适合他们的、随顺他们的:对于当时聚集在那里的比丘们来说,世尊现在将要制定的这条学处,正是适合他们的、随顺他们的。或者也可以这样理解:针对前面用“易护持”等说法所讲的防护,他作了一场与那防护相适合、相随顺,与防护和断除相关联,不拘泥于经、不系属于圣典,而是随缘开演的法谈——这就是这段话的意思。据说,世尊在这样的场合里,就像在编织五色花鬘、在串宝珠项链一样:对那些抗拒学处、喜欢不防护的人,用未来轮回的怖畏来警吓他们,显示种种过患;对那些想要学处、安住在防护中的人,有的让他们安立在阿拉汉果,有的让他们安立在不来果、一来果、入流果;即使对缺乏亲依止缘的人,也让他们安立在天界之道上,所说的法谈篇幅可以长到像长部或中部那样。正是针对这个,才说“为比丘们作了适合、随顺的法谈之后”。巴利
Bhikkhūnaṃ tadanucchavikaṃ tadanulomikanti tattha sannipatitānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ yaṃ idāni sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessati, tassa anucchavikañceva anulomikañca. Yo vā ayaṃ subharatādīhi saṃvaro vutto, tassa anucchavikañceva anulomikañca saṃvarappahānapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ asuttantavinibaddhaṃ pāḷivinimuttaṃ okkantikadhammadesanaṃ katvāti attho. Bhagavā kira īdisesu ṭhānesu pañcavaṇṇakusumamālaṃ karonto viya, ratanadāmaṃ sajjento viya, ca ye paṭikkhipanādhippāyā asaṃvarābhiratā te samparāyikena vaṭṭabhayena tajjento anekappakāraṃ ādīnavaṃ dassento, ye sikkhākāmā saṃvare ṭhitā te appekacce arahatte patiṭṭhapento appekacce anāgāmi-sakadāgāmi-sotāpattiphalesu upanissayavirahitepi saggamagge patiṭṭhapento dīghanikāyappamāṇampi majjhimanikāyappamāṇampi dhammadesanaṃ karoti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ tadanucchavikaṃ tadanulomikaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ katvā’’ti.
“因此”是指以苏丁那的那次错误行为作为原因。“学处”这个词里,“应当学”所以叫“学”,“依此而达到”所以叫“处”,学的处就是“学处”,意思是证得学的途径。或者也可以说,它被称为根本、依靠、立足处。这是对远离淫行、防护淫行的另一种说法。因为防护淫行相对于其他那些被称为“学”的法——戒、观、禅那、道等——按照前面所说的意义来说也是“处”,所以这里所指的是“学处”。这个含义应当依照《学处分别》里所说的方法来理解。另外,能够阐明这个含义的说法本身也应被理解为“学处”。这也是被说过的:“学处,就是这里的名身、句身、词身、文身。”或者,就像说“无贪是法句”时,意思是无贪是法的一个部分,同样地,这里“学处”也应理解为学的一部分、学的一个部分。巴利
Tena hīti tena sudinnassa ajjhācārena kāraṇabhūtena. Sikkhāpadanti ettha sikkhitabbāti sikkhā, pajjate imināti padaṃ, sikkhāya padaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ; sikkhāya adhigamupāyoti attho. Atha vā mūlaṃ nissayo patiṭṭhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Methunaviratiyā methunasaṃvarassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Methunasaṃvaro hi tadaññesaṃ sikkhāsaṅkhātānaṃ sīlavipassanājhānamaggadhammānaṃ vuttatthavasena padattā idha ‘‘sikkhāpada’’nti adhippeto. Ayañca attho sikkhāpadavibhaṅge vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Apica tassatthassa dīpakaṃ vacanampi ‘‘sikkhāpada’’nti veditabbaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘sikkhāpadanti yo tattha nāmakāyo padakāyo niruttikāyo byañjanakāyo’’ti. Atha vā yathā ‘‘anabhijjhā dhammapada’’nti vutte anabhijjhā eko dhammakoṭṭhāsoti attho hoti, evamidhāpi ‘‘sikkhāpada’’nti sikkhākoṭṭhāso sikkhāya eko padesotipi attho veditabbo.
“依于十种利益”是指:以十种理由,为了制定学处所应达成的殊胜利益,依止、基于、着眼于这十种殊胜利益,也就是观察到这十种殊胜利益能够圆满实现——这就是这句话的意思。现在,为了显示这十种利益,世尊说“为僧团优良”等。其中,“僧团优良”是指僧团处于良好状态,就像在“善哉,诸天神”这句话出现的地方一样,是接受“善哉,尊者”这句话的状态。凡是接受如来言教的人,那对他长时都会带来利益和安乐。因此,为了让僧团以“善哉,尊者”来接受我的言教,我将制定学处——说明不接受的过患和接受的功德,而不是用强力压制。为了阐明这个意思,世尊说:“为僧团优良。”“为僧团安乐”是指为了僧团的安适状态;意思是,为了共同生活时能安乐地安住。巴利
Dasaatthavase paṭiccāti dasa kāraṇavase sikkhāpadapaññattihetu adhigamanīye hitavisese paṭicca āgamma ārabbha, dasannaṃ hitavisesānaṃ nipphattiṃ sampassamānoti vuttaṃ hoti. Idāni te dasa atthavase dassento ‘‘saṅghasuṭṭhutāyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha saṅghasuṭṭhutā nāma saṅghassa suṭṭhubhāvo, ‘‘suṭṭhu devā’’ti āgataṭṭhāne viya ‘‘suṭṭhu, bhante’’ti vacanasampaṭicchanabhāvo . Yo ca tathāgatassa vacanaṃ sampaṭicchati , tassa taṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya hoti, tasmā saṅghassa ‘‘suṭṭhu, bhante’’ti mama vacanasampaṭicchanatthaṃ paññapessāmi, asampaṭicchane ādīnavaṃ sampaṭicchane ca ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā, na balakkārena abhibhavitvāti etamatthaṃ āvikaronto āha – ‘‘saṅghasuṭṭhutāyā’’ti. Saṅghaphāsutāyāti saṅghassa phāsubhāvāya; sahajīvitāya sukhavihāratthāyāti attho.
为了折伏那些倔强的人:所谓“倔强”,就是指破戒的人。这种人即使被质问,也很难生起羞愧;正在犯戒或已经犯戒之后,也不觉得羞耻。制定学处就是为了折伏他们。因为如果没有学处,他们就会去烦扰僧团,说:“你们看到了什么?听到了什么?我们做了什么?你们是根据哪件事、以什么罪来指控我们、折伏我们?”但有了学处之后,僧团就可以指出学处,依法、依律、依师教来折伏他们。因此说:“为了折伏那些倔强的人。”巴利
Dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyāti dummaṅkū nāma dussīlapuggalā; ye maṅkutaṃ āpādiyamānāpi dukkhena āpajjanti, vītikkamaṃ karontā vā katvā vā na lajjanti, tesaṃ niggahatthāya; te hi sikkhāpade asati ‘‘kiṃ tumhehi diṭṭhaṃ, kiṃ sutaṃ – kiṃ amhehi kataṃ; katarasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ katamaṃ āpattiṃ āropetvā amhe niggaṇhathā’’ti saṅghaṃ viheṭhessanti, sikkhāpade pana sati te saṅgho sikkhāpadaṃ dassetvā dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena niggahessati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyā’’ti.
“为了让贤善的比丘们安乐而住”:这是为了那些性情可爱、持戒清净的比丘们能够安乐而住。因为性情可爱、持戒清净的比丘们,如果不知道什么是该做的、什么是不该做的,什么是有罪的、什么是无罪的,什么是时限、什么是界限,那么在努力圆满三学的时候就会疲惫不堪,遇到事情就会感到困扰压迫。但如果他们知道了什么是该做的、什么是不该做的,什么是有罪的、什么是无罪的,什么是时限、什么是界限,那么在努力圆满三学的时候就不会疲惫,遇到事情也不会感到困扰压迫。因此,为他们制定学处,就能带来安乐而住。或者说,对那些不知惭愧的人加以折伏,本身就是这些比丘的安乐而住。因为只要还有破戒的人存在,伍波萨他就举行不了,自恣就举行不了,僧团甘马就运作不起来,和合就达不成,比丘们也无法专心投入诵戒、问法、修习业处等事务。而当那些破戒的人被折伏之后,这一切麻烦就都不会有了。由此,贤善的比丘们就能安乐而住。这样,“为了让贤善的比丘们安乐而住”这句话,应当知道有两层含义。巴利
Pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāyāti pesalānaṃ piyasīlānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihāratthāya. Piyasīlā hi bhikkhū kattabbākattabbaṃ sāvajjānavajjaṃ velaṃ mariyādaṃ ajānantā sikkhattayapāripūriyā ghaṭamānā kilamanti, sandiṭṭhamānā ubbāḷhā honti. Kattabbākattabbaṃ pana sāvajjānavajjaṃ velaṃ mariyādaṃ ñatvā sikkhattayapāripūriyā ghaṭamānā na kilamanti, sandiṭṭhamānā na ubbāḷhā honti. Tena nesaṃ sikkhāpadapaññāpanā phāsuvihārāya saṃvattati. Yo vā dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggaho, sveva etesaṃ phāsuvihāro. Dussīlapuggale nissāya hi uposatho na tiṭṭhati , pavāraṇā na tiṭṭhati, saṅghakammāni nappavattanti, sāmaggī na hoti, bhikkhū anekaggā uddesaparipucchākammaṭṭhānādīni anuyuñjituṃ na sakkonti. Dussīlesu pana niggahitesu sabbopi ayaṃ upaddavo na hoti. Tato pesalā bhikkhū phāsu viharanti. Evaṃ ‘‘pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsu vihārāyā’’ti ettha dvidhā attho veditabbo.
“为了防护现世的漏”:所谓“现世的漏”,是指安住于不防护的状态时,就在这一生当中所会遭受的种种苦,比如被人用手打、用杖打、被砍手、被砍脚、恶名、恶声、追悔等。因此,为了防护、遮蔽、阻塞这些现世的漏的到来之路——这就是它的意思。巴利
Diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāyāti diṭṭhadhammikā āsavā nāma asaṃvare ṭhitena tasmiññeva attabhāve pattabbā pāṇippahāra-daṇḍappahāra-hatthaccheda-pādaccheda-akitti-ayasavippaṭisārādayo dukkhavisesā. Iti imesaṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya pidhānāya āgamanamaggathakanāyāti attho.
为了断除来世的诸漏,这里说的是:所谓来世的诸漏,就是指一个人安住在不防护的状态下,以所造的恶业为根源,将来在后世的地狱等处必将遭受的各种苦。为了断除、止息、平息这些来世的诸漏——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāyāti samparāyikā āsavā nāma asaṃvare ṭhitena katapāpakammamūlakā samparāye narakādīsu pattabbā dukkhavisesā, tesaṃ paṭighātatthāya paṭippassambhanatthāya vūpasamatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“为了让还没生起信心的人能生起信心”:因为制定了学处,当人了解了学处的制定,或者看到比丘们按照所制定的学处去实行时,那些还没生起信心的有智慧的人就会想:“世间大众所贪染、所嗔恨、所迷惑的那些事,这些沙门释子却远远地远离、舍离而住,他们确实在做难做的事,确实在做沉重的事。”于是他们就生起了信心,就像那位在律藏中看到书册而放弃邪见、通达三吠陀的婆罗门一样。因此说“为了让还没生起信心的人能生起信心”。巴利
Appasannānaṃ pasādāyāti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hi sati sikkhāpadapaññattiṃ ñatvā vā yathāpaññattaṃ paṭipajjamāne bhikkhū disvā vā yepi appasannā paṇḍitamanussā, te ‘‘yāni vata loke mahājanassa rajjana-dussana-muyhanaṭṭhānāni, tehi ime samaṇā sakyaputtiyā ārakā viratā viharanti, dukkaraṃ vata karonti, bhāriyaṃ vata karontī’’ti pasādaṃ āpajjanti, vinayapiṭake potthakaṃ disvā micchādiṭṭhika-tivedī brāhmaṇo viya. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘appasannānaṃ pasādāyā’’ti.
为了让已生信心的人信心不断增长:那些已经在教法中生起净信的善男子,一旦了解了学处的制定,或者看到比丘们按照所制定的学处去实践时,就会想:“啊,这些尊者真是做到了难做的事!他们一辈子只吃一顿饭、修梵行、守护律仪。”于是信心一次又一次地增长。因此说“为了让已生信心的人信心不断增长”。巴利
Pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāyāti yepi sāsane pasannā kulaputtā tepi sikkhāpadapaññattiṃ ñatvā yathāpaññattaṃ paṭipajjamāne bhikkhū vā disvā ‘‘aho ayyā dukkarakārino, ye yāvajīvaṃ ekabhattaṃ brahmacariyaṃ vinayasaṃvaraṃ anupālentī’’ti bhiyyo bhiyyo pasīdanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāyā’’ti.
为了让正法久住:正法有三种,就是教法正法、行道正法和证得正法。其中,收在三藏里的一切佛语,叫做教法正法。十三种头陀功德、十四种犍度行仪、八十二种大行仪,以及戒、定、慧,叫做行道正法。四圣道、四沙门果和涅槃,叫做证得正法。因为只要学处被制定出来,比丘们就会学习学处、学处的分别,以及为了说明这些学处含义的其他佛语;他们按照所制定的去实践,圆满行道之后,就能证得通过行道应当证得的出世间法。所以,学处的制定能让正法久住。因此说,为了让正法久住。巴利
Saddhammaṭṭhitiyāti tividho saddhammo – pariyattisaddhammo, paṭipattisaddhammo, adhigamasaddhammoti. Tattha piṭakattayasaṅgahitaṃ sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ ‘‘pariyattisaddhammo’’ nāma. Terasa dhutaguṇā, cuddasa khandhakavattāni, dveasīti mahāvattāni, sīlasamādhivipassanāti ayaṃ ‘‘paṭipattisaddhammo’’ nāma. Cattāro ariyamaggā cattāri ca sāmaññaphalāni nibbānañcāti ayaṃ ‘‘adhigamasaddhammo’’ nāma. So sabbopi yasmā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā sati bhikkhū sikkhāpadañca tassa vibhaṅgañca tadatthajotanatthaṃ aññañca buddhavacanaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, yathāpaññattañca paṭipajjamānā paṭipattiṃ pūretvā paṭipattiyā adhigantabbaṃ lokuttaradhammaṃ adhigacchanti, tasmā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā ciraṭṭhitiko hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘saddhammaṭṭhitiyā’’ti.
为了护持律:因为有了学处的制定,防护律、断除律、止息律和制定律这四种律就都得到了护持、得到了支撑、得到了善巧的支撑。因此说“为了护持律”。巴利
Vinayānuggahāyāti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hi sati saṃvaravinayo ca pahānavinayo ca samathavinayo ca paññattivinayo cāti catubbidhopi vinayo anuggahito hoti upatthambhito sūpatthambhito. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vinayānuggahāyā’’ti.
所有这些词句,都应该和“我将制定学处”这句话连在一起理解。这里,第一句和最后一句的连接方式是:“为了僧团优良,我将制定学处……为了护持律,我将制定学处。”巴利
Sabbāneva cetāni padāni ‘‘sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmī’’ti iminā vacanena saddhiṃ yojetabbāni . Tatrāyaṃ paṭhamapacchimapadayojanā – ‘‘saṅghasuṭṭhutāya sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmi, vinayānuggahāya sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmī’’ti.
在这里,如果按照连锁的方式来说:凡是能让僧团变好的,就是能让僧团安乐的;凡是能让僧团安乐的,就是能压制那些难以调伏的人的。如果以每一个词为根,做十次连接,就像《附随》中所说的那样:凡是能让僧团变好的,就是能让僧团安乐的;凡是能让僧团变好的,就是能压制那些难以调伏的人的。巴利
Api cettha yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyāti evaṃ saṅkhalikanayaṃ; yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyāti evañca ekekapadamūlikaṃ dasakkhattuṃ yojanaṃ katvā yaṃ vuttaṃ parivāre (pari. 334) –
“ 一百个义,一百个法,还有二百个词释;
在《义之依据论》中,有四百种智。”巴利
‘‘Atthasataṃ dhammasataṃ, dve ca niruttisatāni; Cattāri ñāṇasatāni, atthavase pakaraṇe’’ti.
这一切都应该知道。不过,因为它会在《附随》里清楚说明,所以这里就不解释了。巴利
Taṃ sabbaṃ veditabbaṃ. Taṃ panetaṃ yasmā parivāreyeva āvi bhavissati, tasmā idha na vaṇṇitanti.
像这样显示了制定学处的功德之后,为了说明比丘们对这个学处应当做的事,世尊说:“诸比丘,你们应当这样诵这个学处。”这话说的是什么意思呢?诸比丘,对于我这样开示了功德的这个学处,你们应当这样在伍波萨他诵戒时诵它、学习它、受持它,也教别人诵。这里“ca”这个词有“进一步引出”的意思,因此就引出了这样的含义。巴利
Evaṃ sikkhāpadapaññattiyā ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā tasmiṃ sikkhāpade bhikkhūhi kattabbakiccaṃ dīpento ‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ uddiseyyāthā’’ti āha. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Bhikkhave, imaṃ pana mayā iti sandassitānisaṃsaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ evaṃ pātimokkhuddese uddiseyyātha ca pariyāpuṇeyyātha ca dhāreyyātha ca aññesañca vāceyyāthāti. Atirekānayanattho hi ettha ca saddo, tenāyamattho ānīto hotīti.
现在,为了说明前面所说的“这条学处”,世尊说道:“若比丘行淫法,是巴拉基格,不共住。”就这样,以断除根本的方式牢牢制定第一条巴拉基格之后,为了补充制定后续规定,又发生了母猴这件事。为了说明这件事的发生,才说了这句:“就这样,世尊为诸比丘制定了这条学处。”这句话的意思是:世尊为诸比丘就这样制定了这条学处,而另外还有一件事发生了。巴利
Idāni yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘imaṃ sikkhāpada’’nti taṃ dassento ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyya, pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso’’ti āha. Evaṃ mūlacchejjavasena daḷhaṃ katvā paṭhamapārājike paññatte aparampi anupaññattatthāya makkaṭīvatthu udapādi. Tassuppattidīpanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ – evañcidaṃ bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ hotīti. Tassattho – bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ evaṃ paññattaṃ hoti ca, idañca aññaṃ vatthu udapādīti.
母猴因缘故事巴利
Makkaṭīvatthukathā
40 40. 现在,为了说明另一件发生的事,说了“那时”等话。这里对难解词语的解释是:以食物诱引母猴——在大林中,由于比丘们忍辱、慈爱等功德的力量,许多鹿、孔雀、鸡、猴等畜生心里没有恐惧,在修行住处一带随意走动。其中,用粥、饭、嚼食等食物引诱、拉拢了一只母猴,这就是所说的意思。“对她”是处格。“行淫”是指反复行淫;这里用现在时,是表示习惯性动作。“那位比丘”是指那个行淫的比丘。“巡视房舍而游走”——那些客比丘为了见佛陀而来,清晨得到客食,吃完饭后就想着“我们去看看比丘们住的地方”,于是四处走动。因此说“巡视房舍而游走”。“往那些比丘那里去”——畜生一旦和某位比丘混熟了,对其他比丘也会生起同样的心。所以那只母猴就朝那些比丘走去;走过去之后,也像对那位跟它熟悉的比丘一样,对他们做出同样的动作。巴利
40. Idāni yaṃ taṃ aññaṃ vatthu uppannaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayenā’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – makkaṭiṃ āmisenāti mahāvane bhikkhūnaṃ khantimettādiguṇānubhāvena nirāsaṅkacittā bahū migamorakukkuṭamakkaṭādayo tiracchānā padhānāgāraṭṭhānesu vicaranti. Tatra ekaṃ makkaṭiṃ āmisena yāgubhattakhajjakādinā upalāpetvā, saṅgaṇhitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassāti bhummavacanaṃ. Paṭisevatīti pacurapaṭisevano hoti; pacuratthe hi vattamānavacanaṃ. So bhikkhūti so methunadhammapaṭisevanako bhikkhu. Senāsanacārikaṃ āhiṇḍantāti te bhikkhū āgantukā buddhadassanāya āgatā pātova āgantukabhattāni labhitvā katabhattakiccā bhikkhūnaṃ nivāsanaṭṭhānāni passissāmāti vicariṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘senāsanacārikaṃ āhiṇḍantā’’ti. Yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamīti tiracchānagatā nāma ekabhikkhunā saddhiṃ vissāsaṃ katvā aññesupi tādisaññeva cittaṃ uppādenti. Tasmā sā makkaṭī yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ca attano vissāsikabhikkhusseva tesampi taṃ vikāraṃ dassesi.
“切断”是指尾巴。“竖立”是指把它朝向面前立起来。“示现根相”的意思是:她以那样的方式、那样的动作,让他们知道她有行淫的意图。“彼比丘”是指这座精舍所属的比丘。“隐于一边”是指他们藏在一个地方。巴利
Cheppanti naṅguṭṭhaṃ. Oḍḍīti abhimukhaṃ ṭhapesi. Nimittampi akāsīti yena niyāmena yāya kiriyāya methunādhippāyaṃ te jānanti taṃ akāsīti attho . So bhikkhūti yassāyaṃ vihāro. Ekamantaṃ nilīyiṃsūti ekasmiṃ okāse paṭicchannā acchiṃsu.
41 “是真的,贤友。”就像盗贼被当场抓住一样,因为被当面看见并受到指责,没法说“我做了什么”之类的话,只好说:“是真的,贤友。”贤友,难道不正是那样吗?意思是:贤友,就像对人类女性那样,对畜生道女性,这条学处也同样适用。因为对人类女性来说,看见、抓住、触摸、碰触、接触,全都是粗恶的;对畜生道女性来说,那一切也同样全是粗恶的。这里有什么差别呢?你是在根本没有借口的地方硬找借口。巴利
41.Saccaṃ, āvusoti sahoḍḍhaggahito coro viya paccakkhaṃ disvā coditattā ‘‘kiṃ vā mayā kata’’ntiādīni vattuṃ asakkonto ‘‘saccaṃ, āvuso’’ti āha. Nanu, āvuso, tatheva taṃ hotīti āvuso yathā manussitthiyā, nanu tiracchānagatitthiyāpi taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ tatheva hoti. Manussitthiyāpi hi dassanampi gahaṇampi āmasanampi phusanampi ghaṭṭanampi duṭṭhullameva. Tiracchānagatitthiyāpi taṃ sabbaṃ duṭṭhullameva. Ko ettha viseso? Alesaṭṭhāne tvaṃ lesaṃ oḍḍesīti.
42 “最低限度,即使对畜生道女众,也犯巴拉基格,不共住。”也就是说,即使对畜生道女众行淫法,也仍然犯巴拉基格。因此,世尊把这条学处制定得更严格。学处有两种:世间所呵责的,和制定所呵责的。其中,在有心识活动这一类情形里,心只是不善,这就叫世间所呵责;其余的则是制定所呵责。对于世间所呵责的,随制一旦生起,就会约束、关闭大门、截断水流,使它变得更严格。除了增上慢的情况、除了梦中的情况,这是因为没有违犯、也不构成犯戒,所以才这样说。对于制定所呵责的,在还没有违犯时,随制一旦生起,就会放松、解开、打开大门,并不断给出种种无犯的情形,就像在众食、次第食等中的随制那样。而像“乃至刹那顷”这样的说法,则是在已经违犯时生起的,所以只是属于随制性的。然而,这第一条学处因为是世间所呵责,不是制定所呵责,所以这个随制是作为约束、关闭大门、截断水流、使它更严格而出现的。巴利
42.Antamaso tiracchānagatāyapi pārājiko hoti asaṃvāsoti tiracchānagatāyapi methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitvā pārājiko yeva hotīti daḷhataraṃ sikkhāpadamakāsi. Duvidhañhi sikkhāpadaṃ – lokavajjaṃ, paṇṇattivajjañca. Tattha yassa sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, taṃ lokavajjaṃ nāma. Sesaṃ paṇṇattivajjaṃ. Tattha lokavajje anupaññatti uppajjamānā rundhantī dvāraṃ pidahantī sotaṃ pacchindamānā gāḷhataraṃ karontī uppajjati, aññatra adhimānā, aññatra supinantāti ayaṃ pana vītikkamābhāvā abbohārikattā ca vuttā. Paṇṇattivajje akate vītikkame uppajjamānā sithilaṃ karontī mocentī dvāraṃ dadamānā aparāparampi anāpattiṃ kurumānā uppajjati, gaṇabhojanaparamparabhojanādīsu anupaññattiyo viya. ‘‘Antamaso taṅkhaṇikāyapī’’ti evarūpā pana kate vītikkame uppannattā paññattigatikāva hoti. Idaṃ pana paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ yasmā lokavajjaṃ, na paṇṇattivajjaṃ; tasmā ayamanupaññatti rundhantī dvāraṃ pidahantī sotaṃ pacchindamānā gāḷhataraṃ karontī uppajji.
把这两件事合并起来,从根本切断的角度说得更坚定:在第一条巴拉基格已经制定之时,又出现了瓦吉之子比丘们的事,为的是再作随制。为了说明这件事的出现,才说“就这样,世尊为诸比丘制定了这条学处”。这句话的意思是:世尊为比丘们如此制定了这条学处,而又出现了另一件事。巴利
Evaṃ dvepi vatthūni sampiṇḍetvā mūlacchejjavasena daḷhataraṃ katvā paṭhamapārājike paññatte aparampi anupaññattatthāya vajjiputtakavatthu udapādi. Tassuppattidassanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘evañcidaṃ bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ hotī’’ti . Tassattho – bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ evaṃ paññattaṃ hoti ca idañca aññampi vatthu udapādīti.
跋耆子事之注释巴利
Vajjiputtakavatthuvaṇṇanā
43-44 43-44. 现在,为了说明那另一件已经发生的事,说出了“那时”等话。这里也是对难解语句的注释:毗舍离人,就是住在毗舍离的人。跋耆子,就是跋耆国毗舍离城中各家之子。据说,在教法中出现的一切灾祸、过患和不幸,全都跟跋耆子们有关。提婆达多也是这样,在得到跋耆子们作为同党之后,分裂了僧团。而且,正是在世尊般涅槃一百年后,跋耆子们宣扬非法、非律、非师教。这些人中的一部分,即使学处已经这样制定,仍然尽情吃……乃至……行了淫欲法。巴利
43-44. Idāni yaṃ taṃ aññampi vatthu uppannaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayenā’’tiādimāha. Tatrāpi ayamanuttānapadavaṇṇanā – vesālikāti vesālivāsino. Vajjiputtakāti vajjiraṭṭhe vesāliyaṃ kulānaṃ puttā. Sāsane kira yo yo upaddavo ādīnavo abbudamuppajji, sabbaṃ taṃ vajjiputtake nissāya. Tathā hi devadattopi vajjiputtake pakkhe labhitvā saṅghaṃ bhindi. Vajjiputtakā eva ca vassasataparinibbute bhagavati uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ satthusāsanaṃ dīpesuṃ. Imepi tesaṃ yeva ekacce evaṃ paññattepi sikkhāpade yāvadatthaṃ bhuñjiṃsu…pe… methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseviṃsūti.
“以亲属灾祸”这里,灾祸、不幸、散乱、破坏、毁灭,这些全都是同一个意思。亲属的灾祸就是亲属灾祸,以那个亲属灾祸,也就是以王罚、疾病、死亡、离别为因的亲属毁灭,这就是它的意思。第二句也同样是这个道理。但在第三句里,破坏健康的疾病本身就是疾病灾祸。因为它破坏、扰乱、毁灭健康,所以是灾祸。疾病本身就是灾祸,就是疾病灾祸,以那个疾病灾祸。“所触”是被侵入、被压倒、被具足的意思。巴利
Ñātibyasanenapīti ettha asanaṃ byasanaṃ vikkhepo viddhaṃsanaṃ vināsoti sabbametaṃ ekatthaṃ. Ñātīnaṃ byasanaṃ ñātibyasanaṃ, tena ñātibyasanena, rājadaṇḍabyādhimaraṇavippavāsanimittena ñātivināsenāti attho. Esa nayo dutiyapadepi. Tatiyapade pana ārogyavināsako rogo eva rogabyasanaṃ. So hi ārogyaṃ byasati vikkhipati vināsetīti byasanaṃ. Rogova byasanaṃ rogabyasanaṃ, tena rogabyasanena. Phuṭṭhāti adhipannā abhibhūtā samannāgatāti attho.
尊者阿难,我们不是呵责佛陀的人。尊者阿难,我们不呵责佛陀,不把过失归给佛陀。我们不是呵责法的人,不是呵责僧的人。我们是呵责自己的人,我们只呵责自己,只把过失归给自己。无祥,就是没有光彩。少福,就是福报微薄。于善法修观者,就是对在三十八种所缘中分别出来的那些善法,作它们的修观者;意思是,从每一种所缘出定之后,再观照那些法。初夜后夜,就是夜的前一段是初夜,夜的后一段是后夜,说的就是初夜分和后夜分。菩提分,就是属于菩提的方面,是阿拉汉道智的助益者。修习随行,就是增长随行。我们应当致力于此而安住,也就是舍弃在家障碍和住所障碍,在远离的住处,专心一事、不办他务而安住。巴利
Na mayaṃ, bhante ānanda, buddhagarahinoti bhante ānanda, mayaṃ na buddhaṃ garahāma, na buddhassa dosaṃ dema. Na dhammagarahino, na saṅghagarahino. Attagarahino mayanti attānameva mayaṃ garahāma, attano dosaṃ dema. Alakkhikāti nissirikā. Appapuññāti parittapuññā. Vipassakā kusalānaṃ dhammānanti ye aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesu vibhattā kusalā dhammā, tesaṃ vipassakā; tato tato ārammaṇato vuṭṭhāya teva dhamme vipassamānāti attho. Pubbarattāpararattanti rattiyā pubbaṃ pubbarattaṃ, rattiyā aparaṃ apararattaṃ, paṭhamayāmañca pacchimayāmañcāti vuttaṃ hoti. Bodhipakkhikānanti bodhissa pakkhe bhavānaṃ, arahattamaggañāṇassa upakārakānanti attho. Bhāvanānuyoganti vaḍḍhanānuyogaṃ. Anuyuttā vihareyyāmāti gihipalibodhaṃ āvāsapalibodhañca pahāya vivittesu senāsanesu yuttapayuttā anaññakiccā vihareyyāma.
“是的,贤友。”长老并不了解他们的心思,听了他们这番大话之后,心想:“如果这些人真能这样,那就好了。”于是便应承下来,说:“是的,贤友。”
“这是无此理、无机会的。”这两句都是否定理由的话。因为果是依理由而成立的,机会也是依理由而成立的,所以二者合起来说“理由与机会”。否定它时就说:“阿难,这是无此理,无机会。”意思是:这个理由或机会并不存在。“如来……”,意思是:藉由如来废除跋耆族等……的理由,并不存在。如果世尊对那些请求“请让我们得达上”的人授予达上,那么这样一来,就会废除已经制定的“是巴拉基格,不共住”。然而,因为世尊并不废除它,所以才说“这是无此理”等话。巴利
Evamāvusoti thero etesaṃ āsayaṃ ajānanto idaṃ nesaṃ mahāgajjitaṃ sutvā ‘‘sace ime īdisā bhavissanti, sādhū’’ti maññamāno ‘‘evamāvuso’’ti sampaṭicchi. Aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāsoti ubhayampetaṃ kāraṇapaṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Kāraṇañhi yasmā tattha tadāyattavuttibhāvena phalaṃ tiṭṭhati. Yasmā cassa taṃ okāso hoti tadāyattavuttibhāvena, tasmā ‘‘ṭhānañca avakāso cā’’ti vuccati, taṃ paṭikkhipanto āha – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, ānanda , anavakāso’’ti. Etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vā okāso vā natthi. Yaṃ tathāgatoti yena tathāgato vajjīnaṃ vā…pe… samūhaneyya, taṃ kāraṇaṃ natthīti attho. Yadi hi bhagavā etesaṃ ‘‘labheyyāma upasampada’’nti yācantānaṃ upasampadaṃ dadeyya, evaṃ sante ‘‘pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso’’ti paññattaṃ samūhaneyya. Yasmā panetaṃ na samūhanati, tasmā ‘‘aṭṭhānameta’’ntiādimāha.
像这样来的人不应被授予达上——世尊以悲悯之心,如实了知:“如果这样的人受了达上,他便会在这教法中没有恭敬心;但如果他仍停留在沙弥的阶段,就会怀有恭敬心,也能成办自己的利益。”所以才说:“像这样来的人不应被授予达上。”像这样来的人应被授予达上——世尊如实了知:“像这样来的人,安住在比丘的身份之后,因为戒行没有缺损,便会在这教法中有恭敬心;一旦具备了近因条件,不久就能证得最上的利益。”所以才说应被授予达上。巴利
So āgato na upasampādetabboti ‘‘yadi hi evaṃ āgato upasampadaṃ labheyya, sāsane agāravo bhaveyya. Sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ pana ṭhito sagāravo ca bhavissati, attatthañca karissatī’’ti ñatvā anukampamāno bhagavā āha – ‘‘so āgato na upasampādetabbo’’ti. So āgato upasampādetabboti evaṃ āgato bhikkhubhāve ṭhatvā avipannasīlatāya sāsane sagāravo bhavissati, so sati upanissaye nacirasseva uttamatthaṃ pāpuṇissatīti ñatvā upasampādetabboti āha.
世尊这样说明了:对曾行淫欲法之后来求戒的人,有的情况不应授予具足戒,有的情况则应授予具足戒。然后,他把三种情况综合起来,使之完整,想要制定学处,便说:“诸比丘,你们应当这样诵此学处。”接着便制定了完整的学处:“若比丘……中略……不共住。”巴利
Evaṃ methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitvā āgatesu anupasampādetabbañca upasampādetabbañca dassetvā tīṇipi vatthūni samodhānetvā paripuṇṇaṃ katvā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetukāmo ‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ uddiseyyāthā’’ti vatvā ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu…pe… asaṃvāso’’ti paripuṇṇaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesi.
四种律的讨论巴利
Catubbidhavinayakathā
45 45. 现在,为了分别说明它的含义,他说了“yo pana,即无论哪一种”等话。然而,想要精通这条学处、学处分别以及整个律的判定的人,应当了解四种律——巴利
45. Idānissa atthaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘yo panāti, yo yādiso’’tiādimāha. Tasmiṃ pana sikkhāpade ca sikkhāpadavibhaṅge ca sakale ca vinayavinicchaye kosallaṃ patthayantena catubbidho vinayo jānitabbo –
往昔,具大神力、结集法藏的大长老们,
将律取出而宣说为四种。巴利
Catubbidhañhi vinayaṃ, mahātherā mahiddhikā; Nīharitvā pakāsesuṃ, dhammasaṅgāhakā purā.
哪四种呢?就是经、随顺经、师说、自己的见解。针对这个而说:“以权威之句、以意味、以师承、以意趣。”这里,“权威之句”指的是经,“意味”指的是随顺经,“师承”指的是师说,“意趣”指的是自己的见解。巴利
Katamaṃ catubbidhaṃ? Suttaṃ, suttānulomaṃ, ācariyavādaṃ, attanomatinti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘āhaccapadena rasena ācariyavaṃsena adhippāyā’’ti, ettha hi āhaccapadanti suttaṃ adhippetaṃ, rasoti suttānulomaṃ, ācariyavaṃsoti ācariyavādo, adhippāyoti attanomati.
在这里,“经”指的就是整个律藏中的巴利原文。巴利
Tattha suttaṃnāma sakale vinayapiṭake pāḷi.
所谓“随顺经”就是四大教法,也就是世尊这样说的:比丘们,如果我没有以“这是不允许的”来否定某件事,而它却随顺不允许的、排斥允许的,那对你们来说就是不允许的。比丘们,如果我没有以“这是不允许的”来否定某件事,而它却随顺允许的、排斥不允许的,那对你们来说就是允许的。比丘们,如果我没有以“这是允许的”来认可某件事,而它却随顺不允许的、排斥允许的,那对你们来说就是不允许的。比丘们,如果我没有以“这是允许的”来认可某件事,而它却随顺允许的、排斥不允许的,那对你们来说就是允许的。巴利
Suttānulomaṃ nāma cattāro mahāpadesā; ye bhagavatā evaṃ vuttā – ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave , mayā ‘idaṃ na kappatī’ti appaṭikkhittaṃ, taṃ ce akappiyaṃ anulometi; kappiyaṃ paṭibāhati, taṃ vo na kappati. Yaṃ, bhikkhave, mayā ‘idaṃ na kappatī’ti appaṭikkhittaṃ, taṃ ce kappiyaṃ anulometi; akappiyaṃ paṭibāhati, taṃ vo kappati. Yaṃ, bhikkhave , mayā ‘idaṃ kappatī’ti ananuññātaṃ, taṃ ce akappiyaṃ anulometi, kappiyaṃ paṭibāhati; taṃ vo na kappati. Yaṃ, bhikkhave, mayā ‘idaṃ kappatī’ti ananuññātaṃ, taṃ ce kappiyaṃ anulometi, akappiyaṃ paṭibāhati; taṃ vo kappatī’’ti (mahāva. 305).
所谓“师说”,就是由结集法的五百位阿拉汉所确立、不依赖巴利原文、以判别决断的方式展开的注释书。巴利
Ācariyavādo nāma dhammasaṅgāhakehi pañcahi arahantasatehi ṭhapitā pāḷivinimuttā okkantavinicchayappavattā aṭṭhakathātanti.
所谓“自意”,就是抛开经、随顺经和师说,靠推理、凭自己的觉慧、以理趣把握而提出的说法。巴利
Attanomati nāma sutta-suttānuloma-ācariyavāde muñcitvā anumānena attano anubuddhiyā nayaggāhena upaṭṭhitākārakathanaṃ.
另外,凡是出现在经、论、律的注释书里的上座部观点,都叫作“自意”。但是,讲说时如果采用这种自意,就不应该死死抓住不放。应当先审察理由,把义理和巴利文互相对照,然后再讲。自意应当放进师说里去衡量。如果它能放进去而且相合,就可以采用;如果既放不进去也不相合,就不能采用。因为这自意其实是最没有力量的。师说比自意更有力量。巴利
Apica suttantābhidhammavinayaṭṭhakathāsu āgato sabbopi theravādo ‘‘attanomati’’ nāma. Taṃ pana attanomatiṃ gahetvā kathentena na daḷhaggāhaṃ gahetvā voharitabbaṃ. Kāraṇaṃ sallakkhetvā atthena pāḷiṃ, pāḷiyā ca atthaṃ saṃsanditvā kathetabbaṃ. Attanomati ācariyavāde otāretabbā. Sace tattha otarati ceva sameti ca, gahetabbā. Sace neva otarati na sameti, na gahetabbā. Ayañhi attanomati nāma sabbadubbalā. Attanomatito ācariyavādo balavataro.
老师说的话,也要与随顺经对照。在这个过程中,只有能顺入而且和随顺经相合的,才可以采用;不相合的,就不该采用。因为比起老师说的话,随顺经才是更有力的。巴利
Ācariyavādopi suttānulome otāretabbo. Tattha otaranto samentoyeva gahetabbo, itaro na gahetabbo. Ācariyavādato hi suttānulomaṃ balavataraṃ.
与经相顺的内容,也应该拿来对照经。对照时,只有真正契合经的才采纳,不契合的就不采纳。因为与经相顺的内容,力量比不上经本身。经是不可违逆的,就像僧团作甘马一样,也像诸佛住世时一样。所以,当两位比丘讨论时,主张自己观点的一方引经来说,主张对方观点的一方则依据与经相顺的内容来说。他们不应该互相贬斥或指责,而应该把与经相顺的内容拿来对照经。如果能契合、相符,就采纳;如果不能,就不采纳,只应该站在经的立场上。再者,如果这个人引经来说,另一个人依据阿阇梨之说,他们也不应该互相贬斥或指责,而应该把阿阇梨之说拿来对照经。如果能契合、相符,就采纳;如果不能契合、不符,这种应受呵责的阿阇梨之说就不该采纳,只应该站在经的立场上。巴利
Suttānulomampi sutte otāretabbaṃ. Tattha otarantaṃ samentameva gahetabbaṃ, itaraṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Suttānulomato hi suttameva balavataraṃ. Suttañhi appaṭivattiyaṃ kārakasaṅghasadisaṃ buddhānaṃ ṭhitakālasadisaṃ. Tasmā yadā dve bhikkhū sākacchanti, sakavādī suttaṃ gahetvā katheti, paravādī suttānulomaṃ. Tehi aññamaññaṃ khepaṃ vā garahaṃ vā akatvā suttānulomaṃ sutte otāretabbaṃ. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbaṃ. No ce, na gahetabbaṃ; suttasmiṃyeva ṭhātabbaṃ. Athāyaṃ suttaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro ācariyavādaṃ. Tehipi aññamaññaṃ khepaṃ vā garahaṃ vā akatvā ācariyavādo sutte otāretabbo. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbo. Anotaranto asamento ca gārayhācariyavādo na gahetabbo; suttasmiṃyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,如果有人拿经出来说法,另一个人却只凭自己的见解。他们彼此也不应该攻击或指责,而应该把自己的见解放进经里去对照。如果能放进去、能吻合,就可以接受;如果不能,就不该接受。应当只立足于经。巴利
Athāyaṃ suttaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro attanomatiṃ. Tehipi aññamaññaṃ khepaṃ vā garahaṃ vā akatvā attanomati sutte otāretabbā. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbā. No ce, na gahetabbā. Suttasmiṃ yeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,此人依据随顺于经来说,另一个人则依据经文。经文应当被纳入随顺于经之中。如果能纳入并且相契合,又能看出它是三次结集所收录、巴利语传承下来的,那就应当采信。如果看不出是这样,既不能纳入也不契合,那它就是外道的经,或者是偈颂,或者是其他应当受到呵责的典籍,比如从《密维先陀罗》《密律》《方广》等某一类中来的,那就不应当采信。应当只安住在随顺于经之中。巴利
Atha panāyaṃ suttānulomaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro suttaṃ. Suttaṃ suttānulome otāretabbaṃ. Sace otarati sameti, tisso saṅgītiyo ārūḷhaṃ pāḷiāgataṃ paññāyati, gahetabbaṃ. No ce tathā paññāyati na otarati na sameti, bāhirakasuttaṃ vā hoti siloko vā aññaṃ vā gārayhasuttaṃ guḷhavessantaraguḷhavinayavedallādīnaṃ aññatarato āgataṃ, na gahetabbaṃ. Suttānulomasmiṃyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,有人抓住与经相顺的内容来说,另一个人则依据诸师之说。诸师之说应当放进与经相顺的标准里衡量。如果能放进去、能吻合,就可以采纳;如果不能,就不该采纳。只应当立足于与经相顺本身。巴利
Athāyaṃ suttānulomaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro ācariyavādaṃ. Ācariyavādo suttānulome otāretabbo. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbo. No ce, na gahetabbo. Suttānulomeyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,他拿随顺经来作依据而说,对方则凭自己的见解。自己的见解应当放到随顺经的标准里去检验。如果能吻合、相符,就可以接受;如果不能,就不该接受。应当只立足于随顺经。巴利
Athāyaṃ suttānulomaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro attanomatiṃ. Attanomati suttānulome otāretabbā. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbā. No ce, na gahetabbā. Suttānulomeyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时候,如果有人执取师说来讲,对方就举出经文。应该把经文拿来跟师说对照。如果能对得上、相契合,就可以接受。其他那些该受呵责的经文,就不该接受。应当只依止师说。巴利
Atha panāyaṃ ācariyavādaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro suttaṃ. Suttaṃ ācariyavāde otāretabbaṃ. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbaṃ. Itaraṃ gārayhasuttaṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Ācariyavādeyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,这个人执取师说而进行讲述,对方则举出随顺经教。应当把随顺经教放进师说中对照。对照时,若相符一致,就应当接受;其他的则不应当接受。应当只依止于师说。巴利
Athāyaṃ ācariyavādaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro suttānulomaṃ. Suttānulomaṃ ācariyavāde otāretabbaṃ. Otarantaṃ samentameva gahetabbaṃ, itaraṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Ācariyavādeyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,他拿师父的说法来讲,对方则提出自己的见解。自己的见解应当放进师父的说法里对照。如果能对得上、相契合,就可以接受;如果对不上,就不该接受。应当只安住在师父的说法上。巴利
Athāyaṃ ācariyavādaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro attanomatiṃ. Attanomati ācariyavāde otāretabbā. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbā. No ce, na gahetabbā. Ācariyavādeyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时候,有人抓住自己的见解来讲说,对方则引经。应该把经放进自己的见解里对照。如果能对得上、相契合,就可以接受;那部该受指责的经就不该接受。只应该站在自己的见解上。巴利
Atha panāyaṃ attanomatiṃ gahetvā katheti, paro suttaṃ. Suttaṃ attanomatiyaṃ otāretabbaṃ. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbaṃ. Itaraṃ gārayhasuttaṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Attanomatiyameva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,他拿自己的见解来说法,对方则引随顺经教的内容。应该把随顺经教的内容放进自己的见解里对照。放进去对照时,如果吻合,就采纳;不吻合,就不采纳。只应依止自己的见解。巴利
Athāyaṃ attanomatiṃ gahetvā katheti, paro suttānulomaṃ. Suttānulomaṃ attanomatiyaṃ otāretabbaṃ. Otarantaṃ samentameva gahetabbaṃ, itaraṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Attanomatiyameva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,此人取自己的主张而宣说,对方则搬出阿阇梨之说。应当把阿阇梨之说纳入自己的主张中来比对。若能契合相应,便可接受;否则,那种应受呵责的阿阇梨之说就不可接受。只应安住于自己的主张,只应重视自己的执取。而且,在任何情况下都不应轻视或呵责。巴利
Athāyaṃ attanomatiṃ gahetvā katheti, paro ācariyavādaṃ. Ācariyavādo attanomatiyaṃ otāretabbo. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbo; itaro gārayhācariyavādo na gahetabbo. Attanomatiyameva ṭhātabbaṃ. Attano gahaṇameva baliyaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sabbaṭṭhānesu ca khepo vā garahā vā na kātabbāti.
这时候,如果这个人拿了“如法”的说法来讲,对方却说“不如法”,那就应该对照经和随顺经教来判断。如果它是如法的,就该站在如法这一边;如果它是不如法的,就该站在不如法这一边。巴利
Atha panāyaṃ ‘‘kappiya’’nti gahetvā katheti, paro ‘‘akappiya’’nti. Sutte ca suttānulome ca otāretabbaṃ. Sace kappiyaṃ hoti, kappiye ṭhātabbaṃ. Sace akappiyaṃ, akappiye ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,如果这个人依据经教给出很多理由和判断来证明那件事是如法的,而对方找不到理由,那就应该依止为如法。如果对方依据经教给出很多理由和判断来证明那件事是不如法的,那就不应该想“这是我的执取”而固执坚持,应该接受说“萨度”,然后依止为不如法。如果双方都看到理由的影子,那就以被否决的那一方为准,应该依止为不如法。因为一旦涉及律,在思择如法与不如法时,应该加以制止,应该严格,应该截断流向,应该安住在重大处。巴利
Athāyaṃ tassa kappiyabhāvasādhakaṃ suttato bahuṃ kāraṇañca vinicchayañca dasseti, paro kāraṇaṃ na vindati. Kappiyeva ṭhātabbaṃ. Atha paro tassa akappiyabhāvasādhakaṃ suttato bahuṃ kāraṇañca vinicchayañca dasseti, anena attano gahaṇanti katvā daḷhaṃ ādāya na ṭhātabbaṃ. ‘‘Sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā akappiyeva ṭhātabbaṃ. Atha dvinnampi kāraṇacchāyā dissati, paṭikkhittabhāvoyeva sādhu, akappiye ṭhātabbaṃ. Vinayañhi patvā kappiyākappiyavicāraṇamāgamma rundhitabbaṃ, gāḷhaṃ kattabbaṃ, sotaṃ pacchinditabbaṃ, garukabhāveyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时候,如果这个人认定“这是不如法的”而这样说,对方却说是“如法的”,那就应该对照经和随顺经教来判断。如果确实是如法的,就应该站在如法这一边;如果确实是不如法的,就应该站在不如法这一边。巴利
Atha panāyaṃ ‘‘akappiya’’nti gahetvā katheti, paro ‘‘kappiya’’nti. Sutte ca suttānulome ca otāretabbaṃ. Sace kappiyaṃ hoti, kappiye ṭhātabbaṃ. Sace akappiyaṃ, akappiye ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,如果这个人用许多经教和抉择的依据,说明那是不许可的,而对方找不到依据,那就应当依止不许可。如果对方用许多经教和抉择的依据,说明那是许可的,而这个人找不到依据,那就应当依止许可。如果双方都只看到一点依据的影子,那就不应放弃自己的立场。正如在许可与不许可、不许可与许可的抉择中所说的那样,在无犯与有犯、有犯与无犯,以及轻犯与重犯、重犯与轻犯的说法中,也应当同样了知这个抉择。这里确实只是名称不同,在联系的方式上并没有差别,所以不再详细展开。巴利
Athāyaṃ bahūhi suttavinicchayakāraṇehi akappiyabhāvaṃ dasseti, paro kāraṇaṃ na vindati, akappiye ṭhātabbaṃ. Atha paro bahūhi suttavinicchayakāraṇehi kappiyabhāvaṃ dasseti, ayaṃ kāraṇaṃ na vindati, kappiye ṭhātabbaṃ. Atha dvinnampi kāraṇacchāyā dissati, attano gahaṇaṃ na vissajjetabbaṃ. Yathā cāyaṃ kappiyākappiye akappiyakappiye ca vinicchayo vutto; evaṃ anāpattiāpattivāde āpattānāpattivāde ca, lahukagarukāpattivāde garukalahukāpattivāde cāpi vinicchayo veditabbo. Nāmamattaṃyeva hi ettha nānaṃ, yojanānaye nānaṃ natthi, tasmā na vitthāritaṃ.
当关于许可与不许可等的判定出现时,如果在经、随经说、师说和自己的见解这几者之中,某一方能得到更多的理由支持,就应该依止那一方的说法。但是,如果完全找不到任何理由来做出判定,就不应该舍弃经,只应该依止经。这样,想要在这些学处、学处分别以及整个律的判定中获得善巧的人,就应该了解这四种律。巴利
Evaṃ kappiyākappiyādivinicchaye uppanne yo sutta-suttānulomaācariyavādaattanomatīsu atirekakāraṇaṃ labhati, tassa vāde ṭhātabbaṃ. Sabbaso pana kāraṇaṃ vinicchayaṃ alabhantena suttaṃ na jahitabbaṃ, suttasmiṃyeva ṭhātabbanti. Evaṃ tasmiṃ sikkhāpade ca sikkhāpadavibhaṅge ca sakale ca vinayavinicchaye kosallaṃ patthayantena ayaṃ catubbidho vinayo jānitabbo.
即使已经了解了这四种律,持律者仍然应当具备三相。因为持律者应当具有三种特征。哪三种呢?第一,他对经是善通达的、善运转的、从经与随文都善加抉择的,这是一种特征。第二,他在律中确实安住而不动摇,这是第二种。第三,他善巧地继承师师相传的传统,善加作意、善加持守,这是第三种。巴利
Imañca pana catubbidhaṃ vinayaṃ ñatvāpi vinayadharena puggalena tilakkhaṇasamannāgatena bhavitabbaṃ. Tīṇi hi vinayadharassa lakkhaṇāni icchitabbāni. Katamāni tīṇi? ‘‘Suttañcassa svāgataṃ hoti suppavatti suvinicchitaṃ suttato anubyañjanato’’ti idamekaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Vinaye kho pana ṭhito hoti asaṃhīro’’ti idaṃ dutiyaṃ. ‘‘Ācariyaparamparā kho panassa suggahitā hoti sumanasikatā sūpadhāritā’’ti idaṃ tatiyaṃ.
在这里,“经”指的是整个律藏。“经是善来”的意思是它被很好地掌握。“善转”的意思是它被善巧地运转、熟练、背诵、善加抉择。“从经与随文”的意思是从巴利圣典、从问难、从注释中善加抉择,断除疑惑而受持。巴利
Tattha suttaṃ nāma sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ. Tañcassa svāgataṃ hotīti suṭṭhu āgataṃ. Suppavattīti suṭṭhu pavattaṃ paguṇaṃ vācuggataṃ suvinicchitaṃ. Suttato anubyañjanatoti pāḷito ca paripucchato ca aṭṭhakathāto ca suvinicchitaṃ hoti, kaṅkhacchedaṃ katvā uggahitaṃ.
在律中立足,是指因为有惭耻心而在律中站稳。无惭的人即使多闻,也会因为看重利养而歪曲法脉,宣扬非法非律、背离师教,给教法带来巨大祸害,甚至造成僧团分裂和僧团毁灭。有惭耻心的人则常怀愧悔,乐于学戒,即使为了活命也不歪曲法脉,只阐明法和律,把师教看得很重而安住其中。过去的大长老们就曾三次说出这样的话:未来,有惭耻心的人会守护,有惭耻心的人会守护,有惭耻心的人会守护。所以,凡是有惭耻心的人,不舍离律、不逾越律,因为有惭耻心而在律中立足,就是善安住。不可动摇:所谓可动摇的人,就是当被问及巴利或注释、上文或下文、词句次第时,他支支吾吾、闪躲摇摆,站不稳;对方说什么他就认可什么,丢掉自己的主张而接受别人的主张。反之,当被问及巴利或注释、上文或下文、词句次第时,他不支吾、不闪躲,就像用镊子一根一根夹毛那样回答:我们这样说,我们的阿阇梨这样说;他的巴利和巴利的决断,就像放在金器里的狮子脂,不损耗、不枯竭而安住,这就叫做不可动摇。巴利
Vinaye kho pana ṭhito hotīti vinaye lajjībhāvena patiṭṭhito hoti. Alajjī hi bahussutopi samāno lābhagarutāya tantiṃ visaṃvādetvā uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ satthusāsanaṃ dīpetvā sāsane mahantaṃ upaddavaṃ karoti. Saṅghabhedampi saṅgharājimpi uppādeti. Lajjī pana kukkuccako sikkhākāmo jīvitahetupi tantiṃ avisaṃvādetvā dhammameva vinayameva ca dīpeti, satthusāsanaṃ garuṃ katvā ṭhapeti. Tathā hi pubbe mahātherā tikkhattuṃ vācaṃ nicchāresuṃ – ‘‘anāgate lajjī rakkhissati, lajjī rakkhissati, lajjī rakkhissatī’’ti. Evaṃ yo lajjī, so vinayaṃ avijahanto avokkamanto lajjībhāvena vinaye ṭhito hoti suppatiṭṭhitoti. Asaṃhīroti saṃhīro nāma yo pāḷiyaṃ vā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vā heṭṭhato vā uparito vā padapaṭipāṭiyā vā pucchiyamāno vitthunati vipphandati santiṭṭhituṃ na sakkoti; yaṃ yaṃ parena vuccati taṃ taṃ anujānāti; sakavādaṃ chaḍḍetvā paravādaṃ gaṇhāti. Yo pana pāḷiyaṃ vā aṭṭhakathāya vā heṭṭhupariyena vā padapaṭipāṭiyā vā pucchiyamāno na vitthunati na vipphandati, ekekalomaṃ saṇḍāsena gaṇhanto viya ‘‘evaṃ mayaṃ vadāma; evaṃ no ācariyā vadantī’’ti vissajjeti; yamhi pāḷi ca pāḷivinicchayo ca suvaṇṇabhājane pakkhittasīhavasā viya parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ agacchanto tiṭṭhati, ayaṃ vuccati ‘‘asaṃhīro’’ti.
“师承传承善持”是说,他善持长老传承和世系传承。“善作意”就是好好作意,刚一作意就像点亮的灯一样明亮。“善受持”就是好好受持,从前后关联、义理和理由三方面都好好受持;他舍弃自己的见解,依阿阇梨的清净而说:“我的阿阇梨在某位阿阇梨跟前学得,那位又在某位跟前学得”,这样把整个师承、上座部教说都引出来,一直追溯到优波离长老从正自觉者跟前学得为止。再从那里引出来:优波离长老从正自觉者跟前学得,达萨咖长老从自己的戒师优波离长老处学得,索那长老从自己的戒师达萨咖长老处学得,私伽婆长老从自己的戒师索那长老处学得,摩嘎离之子·帝萨长老从自己的戒师私伽婆长老和旃陀跋耆族长老处学得。这样把整个师承、上座部教说都引出来,追溯到自己阿阇梨为止。这样学得的师承,就是善持。如果做不到这样,至少也要学得两三轮。按最简略的方式,应当知道阿阇梨和阿阇梨的阿阇梨是怎么说巴利和问难的。巴利
Ācariyaparamparā kho panassa suggahitā hotīti theraparamparā vaṃsaparamparā cassa suu gahitā hoti. Sumanasikatāti suṭṭhu manasikatā; āvajjitamatte ujjalitapadīpo viya hoti. Sūpadhāritāti suṭṭhu upadhāritā pubbāparānusandhito atthato kāraṇato ca upadhāritā; attano matiṃ pahāya ācariyasuddhiyā vattā hoti ‘‘mayhaṃ ācariyo asukācariyassa santike uggaṇhi, so asukassā’’ti evaṃ sabbaṃ ācariyaparamparaṃ theravādaṅgaṃ āharitvā yāva upālitthero sammāsambuddhassa santike uggaṇhīti pāpetvā ṭhapeti. Tatopi āharitvā upālitthero sammāsambuddhassa santike uggaṇhi, dāsakatthero attano upajjhāyassa upālittherassa, soṇakatthero attano upajjhāyassa dāsakattherassa, siggavatthero attano upajjhāyassa soṇakattherassa, moggaliputtatissatthero attano upajjhāyassa siggavattherassa caṇḍavajjittherassa cāti. Evaṃ sabbaṃ ācariyaparamparaṃ theravādaṅgaṃ āharitvā attano ācariyaṃ pāpetvā ṭhapeti. Evaṃ uggahitā hi ācariyaparamparā suggahitā hoti. Evaṃ asakkontena pana avassaṃ dve tayo parivaṭṭā uggahetabbā. Sabbapacchimena hi nayena yathā ācariyo ca ācariyācariyo ca pāḷiñca paripucchañca vadanti, tathā ñātuṃ vaṭṭati.
具备这三种特相的持律者,在僧团为了裁决事案而集合、事案已经提交、举罪者和被举罪者都已经陈述、该说话的时候,不应该仓促地不加裁决,而应当先观察六个方面。哪六个?要观察事案,要观察纲目,要观察句分别,要观察三法分类,要观察中间罪,要观察无犯。巴利
Imehi ca pana tīhi lakkhaṇehi samannāgatena vinayadharena vatthuvinicchayatthaṃ sannipatite saṅghe otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ codakena ca cuditakena ca vutte vattabbe sahasā avinicchinitvāva cha ṭhānāni oloketabbāni. Katamāni cha? Vatthu oloketabbaṃ, mātikā oloketabbā, padabhājanīyaṃ oloketabbaṃ, tikaparicchedo oloketabbo, antarāpatti oloketabbā, anāpatti oloketabbāti.
他在审查事案时,确实会看到某一种罪,就像戒律中说的:“应该用草或树叶遮身而来,绝不可以裸身而来;如果有人裸身而来,就犯恶作罪。”于是他就引用这段经文,来平息那件诤事。巴利
Vatthuṃ olokentopi hi ‘‘tiṇena vā paṇṇena vā paṭicchādetvā āgantabbaṃ, na tveva naggena āgantabbaṃ; yo āgaccheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 517) evaṃ ekaccaṃ āpattiṃ passati. So taṃ suttaṃ ānetvā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati.
即使是在查看论母时,他依照“故意说妄语,巴吉帝亚”这样的方式,看到五种罪中的某一种罪,他就会引出那部经,来平息这个诤事。巴利
Mātikaṃ olokentopi ‘‘sampajānamusāvāde pācittiya’’ntiādinā (pāci. 2) nayena pañcannaṃ āpattīnaṃ aññataraṃ āpattiṃ passati, so taṃ suttaṃ ānetvā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati.
他查看《句分别》时,依照“身体未坏而行淫法,犯巴拉基格;身体大部分已坏而行淫法,犯土喇咤亚”这一类方式(其含义相同),见到七种罪中的某一种罪,就从《句分别》中引出经文,以此来平息那件诤事。巴利
Padabhājanīyaṃ olokentopi ‘‘akkhayite sarīre methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati, āpatti pārājikassa. Yebhuyyena khayite sarīre methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati, āpatti thullaccayassā’’tiādinā (pārā. 59 ādayo, atthato samānaṃ) nayena sattannaṃ āpattīnaṃ aññataraṃ āpattiṃ passati, so padabhājanīyato suttaṃ ānetvā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati.
即使在查看三法分别时,他在三法分别中看到三法桑喀地谢思、三法巴吉帝亚、三法恶作,或者别的某种罪,他就从那里引出经文,来平息这个诤事。巴利
Tikaparicchedaṃ olokentopi tikasaṅghādisesaṃ vā tikapācittiyaṃ vā tikadukkaṭaṃ vā aññataraṃ vā āpattiṃ tikaparicchede passati, so tato suttaṃ ānetvā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati.
即使是在查看中间罪时,他见到像“举起已接受之物,是恶作罪”这样存在于各学处之间的中间罪,也会引出那段经文,来平息这个诤事。巴利
Antarāpattiṃ olokentopi ‘‘paṭilātaṃ ukkhipati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 355) evaṃ yā sikkhāpadantaresu antarāpatti hoti taṃ passati, so taṃ suttaṃ ānetvā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati.
即使他在查看“无犯”时,看到各个学处中分别开示的无犯情形,比如“比丘不悦、没有盗心、没有杀意、没有诱使出家之意、没有释放之意、不是故意、失念、不知情,就无犯”,他便引用这段经文来平息那件诤事。巴利
Anāpattiṃ olokentopi ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu asādiyantassa, atheyyacittassa, na maraṇādhippāyassa, anullapanādhippāyassa, na mocanādhippāyassa, asañcicca, assatiyā, ajānantassā’’ti (pārā. 72 ādayo) evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sikkhāpade niddiṭṭhaṃ anāpattiṃ passati, so taṃ suttaṃ ānetvā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati.
如果有比丘精通四种律法、具备三相,观察这六种情况之后平息诤事,他的判决就不可推翻,等同于佛陀亲自坐着作出的判决。假如有人违犯了某条学处,来到这位善于判决的比丘面前,问起自己心里的不安,这位比丘应当仔细审察:如果是无犯,就说“无犯”;如果是有犯,就说“有犯”;如果这罪可以通过发露来灭除,就说“可依发露灭除”;如果可以通过出罪来灭除,就说“可依出罪灭除”。但如果看到有巴拉基格罪的影子,就不能马上说“巴拉基格罪”。为什么?因为淫欲法的违犯和上人法的违犯是粗重的,而偷盗和杀人的违犯则是微细的、心念上很轻的。他以微细的方式违犯,也以微细的方式守护,所以当有人特别就这件事来问心里的不安时,不应当说“有罪”。如果他的亲教师还在,就应该派这个比丘去,对他说:“去问我们的亲教师。”如果他回来说:“你们的亲教师依经依理观察之后,对我说‘这还可以救治’”,那就应该对他说:“好,很好,亲教师怎么说,你就怎么做。”如果他没有亲教师,但有一起学习的上座,就应该派他到那位上座那里,说:“和我们一起学习的上座是大众之首,去问他吧。”如果那位上座也判定为“可以救治”,就应该对他说:“好,很好,照他说的去做。”如果连一起学习的上座也没有,但有聪明的弟子,就应该派他到那位弟子那里,说:“去某处问他。”如果那位弟子也判定为“可以救治”,就应该对他说:“好,很好,照他说的去做。”如果连那位年轻弟子也觉得有巴拉基格罪的影子,也不应该对他说“你是巴拉基格罪人”。因为佛陀出世难得,出家与受达上比这更难得到。这时应该这样说:“找一个僻静的地方,打扫干净,白天在那里坐禅,把戒清净了,先专注思维三十二身分。”如果他的戒没有破损,业处就能顺利运作,诸行会清晰地显现,心也会像接近安止定那样专一,连白天过去了都不知道。等他过了白天回来时,应该这样问:“你的心念状态怎么样?”等他报告了心念状态之后,应该对他说:“出家就是为了让心清净,不要放逸,好好修行沙门法。”巴利
Yo hi bhikkhu catubbidhavinayakovido tilakkhaṇasampanno imāni cha ṭhānāni oloketvā adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati, tassa vinicchayo appaṭivattiyo, buddhena sayaṃ nisīditvā vinicchitasadiso hoti. Taṃ cevaṃ vinicchayakusalaṃ bhikkhuṃ koci katasikkhāpadavītikkamo bhikkhu upasaṅkamitvā attano kukkuccaṃ puccheyya; tena sādhukaṃ sallakkhetvā sace anāpatti hoti, ‘‘anāpattī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace pana āpatti hoti, ‘‘āpattī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sā desanāgāminī ce, ‘‘desanāgāminī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Vuṭṭhānagāminī ce, ‘‘vuṭṭhānagāminī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Athassa pārājikacchāyā dissati, ‘‘pārājikāpattī’’ti na tāva vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? Methunadhammavītikkamo hi uttarimanussadhammavītikkamo ca oḷāriko. Adinnādānamanussaviggahavītikkamā pana sukhumā cittalahukā. Te sukhumeneva āpajjati , sukhumena rakkhati, tasmā visesena taṃvatthukaṃ kukkuccaṃ pucchiyamāno ‘‘āpattī’’ti avatvā sacassa ācariyo dharati, tato tena so bhikkhu ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyaṃ pucchā’’ti pesetabbo. Sace so puna āgantvā ‘‘tumhākaṃ ācariyo suttato nayato oloketvā ‘satekiccho’ti maṃ āhā’’ti vadati, tato anena so ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhu yaṃ ācariyo bhaṇati taṃ karohī’’ti vattabbo. Atha panassa ācariyo natthi, saddhiṃ uggahitatthero pana atthi, tassa santikaṃ pesetabbo – ‘‘amhehi saha uggahitatthero gaṇapāmokkho, taṃ gantvā pucchā’’ti. Tenāpi ‘‘satekiccho’’ti vinicchite ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhu tassa vacanaṃ karohī’’ti vattabbo. Atha saddhiṃ uggahitattheropi natthi, antevāsiko paṇḍito atthi, tassa santikaṃ pesetabbo – ‘‘asukadaharaṃ gantvā pucchā’’ti. Tenāpi ‘‘satekiccho’’ti vinicchite ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhu tassa vacanaṃ karohī’’ti vattabbo. Atha daharassāpi pārājikacchāyāva upaṭṭhāti, tenāpi ‘‘pārājikosī’’ti na vattabbo. Dullabho hi buddhuppādo, tato dullabhatarā pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca. Evaṃ pana vattabbo – ‘‘vivittaṃ okāsaṃ sammajjitvā divāvihāraṃ nisīditvā sīlāni sodhetvā dvattiṃsākāraṃ tāva manasi karohī’’ti. Sace tassa arogaṃ sīlaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ ghaṭayati, saṅkhārā pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, upacārappanāppattaṃ viya cittampi ekaggaṃ hoti, divasaṃ atikkantampi na jānāti. So divasātikkame upaṭṭhānaṃ āgato evaṃ vattabbo – ‘‘kīdisā te cittappavattī’’ti. Ārocitāya cittappavattiyā vattabbo – ‘‘pabbajjā nāma cittavisuddhatthāya, appamatto samaṇadhammaṃ karohī’’ti.
如果一个人的戒已经破了,他的业处就修不起来,心就像被刺棒戳了一样摇来晃去,被悔恨之火烧灼,好比坐在烧烫的石头上,当下就想起身离开。他回来之后,应该问他:“你的心念是怎么活动的?”等他说了心念活动的情况,就应该对他说:“在这个世间,造恶业的人没有什么藏得住的。因为一个人最初造恶的时候,自己就知道;然后守护神、能看透他人心念的沙门婆罗门,以及其他天神也都知道。现在,你该自己去寻求你的安稳了。”巴利
Yassa pana sīlaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti, tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ na ghaṭayati, patodābhitunnaṃ viya cittaṃ vikampati, vippaṭisāragginā ḍayhati, tattapāsāṇe nisinno viya taṅkhaṇaññeva vuṭṭhāti. So āgato ‘‘kā te cittappavattī’’ti pucchitabbo. Ārocitāya cittappavattiyā ‘‘natthi loke raho nāma pāpakammaṃ pakubbato. Sabbapaṭhamañhi pāpaṃ karonto attanā jānāti, athassa ārakkhadevatā paracittavidū samaṇabrāhmaṇā aññā ca devatā jānanti, tvaṃyeva dāni tava sotthiṃ pariyesāhī’’ti vattabbo.
比丘词分别的注释巴利
Bhikkhupadabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
现在我们要解释学处分别的含义。所谓“若有”等等,就是“若何等人”这一类的话。在这里,“若有”是要分别的词语;“若何等人”等则是分别它的词语。而在这里,“然”只是语气助词,“若”才是实义词;它不限定地指人,所以为了显示它的含义,就直接用“若”这个词来表示不限定的人。因此,这里的含义应当这样理解:“若有”就是“无论何人”。既然无论何人,必然依性别、结合、出身、名字、族姓、戒行、住处、行境、年龄这些方面,以某种方式被认知,那么为了让人这样了解,就展示这些类别,说出了“若何等人”等话。其中,“若何等人”是依性别来说,不论他是这样的或那样的;或高或矮,或黑或白,或黄褐肤色,或瘦或胖,这就是它的含义。“随其结合”是依事务来说,不论与什么结合;或与新作事务结合,或与诵习结合,或与住持职责结合,这就是它的含义。“随其出身”是依出身来说,不论何种出身;或刹帝利,或婆罗门,或吠舍,或首陀罗,这就是它的含义。“随其名字”是依名字来说,不论叫什么名字;或名佛护,或名丹玛·拉奇达,或名桑卡拉奇达,这就是它的含义。“随其族姓”是依族姓来说,不论什么族姓,或以任何族姓;或迦旃延,或婆私吒,或果斯亚,这就是它的含义。“随其戒行”是在戒行方面,不论戒行如何;或新作戒行,或诵习戒行,或住持戒行,这就是它的含义。“随其住处”是在住处方面,不论住处如何;或新作住处,或诵习住处,或住持住处,这就是它的含义。“随其行境”是在行境方面,不论行境如何;或新作行境,或诵习行境,或住持行境,这就是它的含义。“长老”等话中,不论他是哪种年龄等;因满十岁为长老,或因不足五岁为新学,或因超过五岁为中间,这就是它的含义。这样一来,在这个含义中,这一切都叫做“若有”。巴利
Idāni sikkhāpadavibhaṅgassa atthaṃ vaṇṇayissāma. Yaṃ vuttaṃ yo panāti yo yādisotiādi. Ettha yo panāti vibhajitabbapadaṃ; yo yādisotiādīni tassa vibhajanapadāni. Ettha ca yasmā panāti nipātamattaṃ; yoti atthapadaṃ; tañca aniyamena puggalaṃ dīpeti, tasmā tassa atthaṃ dassento aniyamena puggaladīpakaṃ yo saddameva āha. Tasmā ettha evamattho veditabbo – yo panāti yo yokocīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmā pana yo yokoci nāma, so avassaṃ liṅga-yutta-jāti-nāma-gotta-sīla-vihāra-gocaravayesu ekenākārena paññāyati, tasmā taṃ tathā ñāpetuṃ taṃ pabhedaṃ pakāsento ‘‘yādiso’’tiādimāha. Tattha yādisoti liṅgavasena yādiso vā tādiso vā hotu; dīgho vā rasso vā kāḷo vā odāto vā maṅguracchavi vā kiso vā thūlo vāti attho. Yathāyuttoti yogavasena yena vā tena vā yutto hotu; navakammayutto vā uddesayutto vā vāsadhurayutto vāti attho. Yathājaccoti jātivasena yaṃjacco vā taṃjacco vā hotu; khattiyo vā brāhmaṇo vā vesso vā suddo vāti attho. Yathānāmoti nāmavasena yathānāmo vā tathānāmo vā hotu; buddharakkhito vā dhammarakkhito vā saṅgharakkhito vāti attho. Yathāgottoti gottavasena yathāgotto vā tathāgotto vā yena vā tena vā gottena hotu; kaccāyano vā vāsiṭṭho vā kosiyo vāti attho. Yathāsīloti sīlesu yathāsīlo vā tathāsīlo vā hotu; navakammasīlo vā uddesasīlo vā vāsadhurasīlo vāti attho. Yathāvihārīti vihāresupi yathāvihārī vā tathāvihārī vā hotu; navakammavihārī vā uddesavihārī vā vāsadhuravihārī vāti attho. Yathāgocaroti gocaresupi yathāgocaro vā tathāgocaro vā hotu; navakammagocaro vā uddesagocaro vā vāsadhuragocaro vāti attho. Thero vāti ādīsu vayovuḍḍhādīsu yo vā so vā hotu; paripuṇṇadasavassatāya thero vā ūnapañcavassatāya navo vā atirekapañcavassatāya majjhimo vāti attho. Atha kho sabbova imasmiṃ atthe eso vuccati ‘‘yo panā’’ti.
在对比丘的解释中,“比丘”就是乞求的人;意思是说,无论得到还是得不到,都以圣洁的乞求方式来乞求。因为已经接受了佛等圣者所行的乞食生活,所以叫“已接受乞食生活的人”。任何人,不管舍弃的是小财富还是大财富,从在家出家成为无家者,他放下农耕、牧牛等谋生方式,仅仅因为接受了出家人的身份标志,就已经接受了乞食生活,所以叫比丘。或者,因为生活依靠他人,即使在寺院中吃集体供养的饭,也是已经接受了乞食生活,所以叫比丘;又或者,因为依止团食而出家,生起了精进心,也是已经接受了乞食生活,所以叫比丘。由于价值、触感、颜色而被破坏的布,他穿着这样的布,所以叫“穿破布的人”。其中,因为刀剪裁割而造成的价值破坏应当知道。即使价值千金的布,被刀剪成一块一块,它的价值就被破坏了,连原来价值的一半都不值。因为线缝合而造成的触感破坏应当知道。即使触感舒适的布,被线缝合后,触感就被破坏了,变得粗糙。因为针、污垢等造成的颜色破坏应当知道。即使非常洁净的布,从做针线活开始,因针垢、手上的汗渍尘垢,到最后染色等工序,颜色就被破坏了,失去了原本的色泽。像这样,因为三种方式穿着被破坏的布,所以叫“穿破布的人”。或者,仅仅因为穿着与在家人的衣服不同的袈裟,就叫“穿破布的人”。巴利
Bhikkhuniddese bhikkhatīti bhikkhako; labhanto vā alabhanto vā ariyāya yācanāya yācatīti attho. Buddhādīhi ajjhupagataṃ bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatattā bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagato nāma. Yo hi koci appaṃ vā mahantaṃ vā bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajito, so kasigorakkhādīhi jīvikakappanaṃ hitvā liṅgasampaṭicchaneneva bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhu. Parapaṭibaddhajīvikattā vā vihāramajjhe kājabhattaṃ bhuñjamānopi bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhu; piṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ nissāya pabbajjāya ussāhajātattā vā bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhu. Agghaphassavaṇṇabhedena bhinnaṃ paṭaṃ dhāretīti bhinnapaṭadharo. Tattha satthakacchedanena agghabhedo veditabbo. Sahassagghanakopi hi paṭo satthakena khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ chinno bhinnaggho hoti. Purimagghato upaḍḍhampi na agghati. Suttasaṃsibbanena phassabhedo veditabbo. Sukhasamphassopi hi paṭo suttehi saṃsibbito bhinnaphasso hoti. Kharasamphassataṃ pāpuṇāti. Sūcimalādīhi vaṇṇabhedo veditabbo. Suparisuddhopi hi paṭo sūcikammato paṭṭhāya sūcimalena, hatthasedamalajallikāhi, avasāne rajanakappakaraṇehi ca bhinnavaṇṇo hoti; pakativaṇṇaṃ vijahati. Evaṃ tīhākārehi bhinnapaṭadhāraṇato bhinnapaṭadharoti bhikkhu. Gihivatthavisabhāgānaṃ vā kāsāvānaṃ dhāraṇamatteneva bhinnapaṭadharoti bhikkhu.
“依通称”是指依施设、依惯用语的意思。确实,有些人仅仅因为通称就被认作“比丘”。比如在邀请等场合清点比丘人数时,连沙弥也算进去,说“一百个比丘、一千个比丘”。
“依自称”是指依自己声称。确实,有些人也凭自称而被认作“比丘”。这种情况可以在“谁在这里?”
“贤友,我是比丘”这类说法中看到,这是阿难长老所说的如法自称。但在夜间,破戒的人迎面走来,被问“谁在这里?”时,他们也会以不如法、虚假的自称说“我们是比丘”。巴利
Samaññāyāti paññattiyā vohārenāti attho. Samaññāya eva hi ekacco ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti paññāyati. Tathā hi nimantanādimhi bhikkhūsu gaṇiyamānesu sāmaṇerepi gahetvā ‘‘sataṃ bhikkhū sahassaṃ bhikkhū’’ti vadanti. Paṭiññāyāti attano paṭijānanena paṭiññāyapi hi ekacco ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti paññāyati. Tassa ‘‘ko etthāti? Ahaṃ, āvuso, bhikkhū’’ti (a. ni. 10.96) evamādīsu sambhavo daṭṭhabbo . Ayaṃ pana ānandattherena vuttā dhammikā paṭiññā. Rattibhāge pana dussīlāpi paṭipathaṃ āgacchantā ‘‘ko etthā’’ti vutte adhammikāya paṭiññāya abhūtāya ‘‘mayaṃ bhikkhū’’ti vadanti.
“来吧,比丘!”所谓“善来比丘”,就是只凭世尊说一句“来吧,比丘”这句话,就获得了比丘的身份,成就了善来比丘达上。因为世尊看到一个人已经具备了成为善来比丘的因缘条件,就从粪扫衣中伸出像黄金一样颜色的右手,发出梵音说:“来吧,比丘!修梵行,为了彻底终结苦。”就在世尊说这话的同时,那个人的在家形象消失了,出家与达上同时成立。他成了剃除须发、身穿袈裟的人。一件衣穿在下身,一件衣披在上身,一件衣搭在肩上,左肩角上挂着颜色像青莲花的陶钵——巴利
Ehi bhikkhūti ehi bhikkhu nāma bhagavato ‘‘ehi bhikkhū’’ti vacanamattena bhikkhubhāvaṃ ehibhikkhūpasampadaṃ patto. Bhagavā hi ehibhikkhubhāvāya upanissayasampannaṃ puggalaṃ disvā rattapaṃsukūlantarato suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ dakkhiṇahatthaṃ nīharitvā brahmaghosaṃ nicchārento ‘‘ehi, bhikkhu, cara brahmacariyaṃ sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāyā’’ti vadati. Tassa saheva bhagavato vacanena gihiliṅgaṃ antaradhāyati, pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca ruhati. Bhaṇḍu kāsāyavasano hoti. Ekaṃ nivāsetvā ekaṃ pārupitvā ekaṃ aṃse ṭhapetvā vāmaṃsakūṭe āsattanīluppalavaṇṇamattikāpatto –
“ 三衣和钵,还有刀、针和腰带,
包括滤水囊在内的这八样,是精勤修行的比丘的资具。”巴利
‘‘Ticīvarañca patto ca, vāsi sūci ca bandhanaṃ; Parissāvanena aṭṭhete, yuttayogassa bhikkhuno’’ti.
当这样说时,那位长老身上就佩戴着这八种资具,威仪具足,像一位六十戒腊的长老一样。他既以佛陀为阿阇梨,又以佛陀为戒师,就那样一边礼敬正自觉者一边站着。世尊在初成道时,有一个时期只用“善来比丘”的方式授予具足戒。这样受具足戒的比丘共有一千一百四十一人,分别是:五位五群长老、良家子亚萨和他的五十四位同伴、三十位贤善群比丘、一千位旧结发外道,连同两位上首弟子在内的二百二十五位游方僧,以及指鬘长老。注释书中确实这样记载:巴利
Evaṃ vuttehi aṭṭhahi parikkhārehi sarīre paṭimukkehiyeva saṭṭhivassikatthero viya iriyāpathasampanno buddhācariyako buddhupajjhāyako sammāsambuddhaṃ vandamānoyeva tiṭṭhati. Bhagavā hi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ ekasmiṃ kāle ehibhikkhūpasampadāya eva upasampādeti. Evaṃ upasampannāni ca sahassupari ekacattālīsuttarāni tīṇi bhikkhusatāni ahesuṃ; seyyathidaṃ – pañca pañcavaggiyattherā, yaso kulaputto, tassa parivārā catupaṇṇāsa sahāyakā, tiṃsa bhaddavaggiyā, sahassapurāṇajaṭilā, saddhiṃ dvīhi aggasāvakehi aḍḍhateyyasatā paribbājakā, eko aṅgulimālattheroti. Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
“ 一千三百,更增四十;
复有一慧长老,悉皆善来比丘。”巴利
‘‘Tīṇi sataṃ sahassañca, cattālīsaṃ punāpare; Eko ca thero sappañño, sabbe te ehibhikkhukā’’ti.
不只是这些,还有很多其他的。比如:带着三百随从的塞拉婆罗门、带着一千随从的玛哈咖毕那、一万名住在迦毗罗卫城的善家子弟、一万六千名彼岸道婆罗门等等。不过,这些人因为在律藏的巴利正文里没有被明确提到,所以这里没有说;前面那些人因为在那里被明确提到了,所以这里说了。巴利
Na kevalañca ete eva, aññepi bahū santi. Seyyathidaṃ – tisataparivāro selo brāhmaṇo, sahassaparivāro mahākappino, dasasahassā kapilavatthuvāsino kulaputtā, soḷasasahassā pārāyanikabrāhmaṇāti evamādayo. Te pana vinayapiṭake pāḷiyaṃ na niddiṭṭhattā na vuttā. Ime tattha niddiṭṭhattā vuttāti.
“ 两万七千三百人,
这些人也都算在内,他们全都是善来比丘。”巴利
‘‘Sattavīsa sahassāni, tīṇiyeva satāni ca; Etepi sabbe saṅkhātā, sabbe te ehibhikkhukā’’ti.
以三皈依受达上,就是按照“我皈依佛”这样的方式,三次开口说出三皈依,由此受达上。这达上一共有八种:善来比丘达上、皈依达上、受教诫达上、答问达上、受八敬法达上、遣使达上、八言达上、白四甘马达上。其中,善来比丘达上和皈依达上,前面已经说过了。巴利
Tīhi saraṇagamanehi upasampannoti ‘‘buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’tiādinā nayena tikkhattuṃ vācaṃ bhinditvā vuttehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi upasampanno. Ayañhi upasampadā nāma aṭṭhavidhā – ehibhikkhūpasampadā, saraṇagamanūpasampadā, ovādapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā, pañhabyākaraṇūpasampadā, garudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā, dūtenūpasampadā, aṭṭhavācikūpasampadā, ñatticatutthakammūpasampadāti. Tattha ehibhikkhūpasampadā, saraṇagamanūpasampadā ca vuttā eva.
“受教诫达上”是指:通过接受这样的教诫而得到达上——
“因此,迦叶,你应当这样学:‘我要对上座、新学、中座比丘,保持强烈的惭与愧。’迦叶,你确实应当这样学。
因此,迦叶,你应当这样学:‘凡是我听到的、与善相应的法,我都要把它当作核心,放在心上,用全部的心去关注,倾耳谛听法。’迦叶,你确实应当这样学。
因此,迦叶,你应当这样学:‘与喜乐相伴的身至念,我绝不放弃。’迦叶,你确实应当这样学。”
(《相应部》2.154)
这就是依这条受教诫,对大迦叶长老开许的达上。巴利
Ovādapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā nāma ‘‘tasmātiha te, kassapa, evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ – ‘tibbaṃ me hirottappaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavissati theresu navesu majjhimesu cā’ti. Evañhi te, kassapa, sikkhitabbaṃ. Tasmātiha te, kassapa, evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ – ‘yaṃ kiñci dhammaṃ sossāmi kusalūpasaṃhitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ aṭṭhiṃ katvā manasi katvā sabbacetasā samannāharitvā ohitasoto dhammaṃ sossāmī’ti. Evaṃ hi te, kassapa, sikkhitabbaṃ. Tasmātiha te, kassapa, evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ – ‘sātasahagatā ca me kāyagatāsati na vijahissatī’ti. Evañhi te, kassapa, sikkhitabba’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) iminā ovādapaṭiggahaṇena mahākassapattherassa anuññātaupasampadā.
答问达上是指对索巴咖开许的达上。据说,世尊在东园经行时,问正在经行的沙弥索巴咖十个与不净观相关的问题:“索巴咖,所谓‘膨胀想’,或者‘色想’,这些法是义不同、文不同,还是义相同、只是文不同?”索巴咖回答了这些问题。世尊认可他说得好,接着问:“索巴咖,你几岁了?”他说:“世尊,我七岁。”世尊说:“索巴咖,你是与我的一切知智相契合而回答问题的。”世尊心生欢喜,就允许他受达上。这就是答问达上。巴利
Pañhabyākaraṇūpasampadā nāma sopākassa anuññātaupasampadā. Bhagavā kira pubbārāme anucaṅkamantaṃ sopākasāmaṇeraṃ ‘‘‘uddhumātakasaññā’ti vā, sopāka, ‘rūpasaññā’ti vā ime dhammā nānatthā nānābyañjanā , udāhu ekatthā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti dasa asubhanissite pañhe pucchi. So te byākāsi. Bhagavā tassa sādhukāraṃ datvā ‘‘kativassosi tvaṃ, sopākā’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Sattavassohaṃ, bhagavā’’ti. ‘‘Sopāka, tvaṃ mama sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā pañhe byākāsī’’ti āraddhacitto upasampadaṃ anujāni. Ayaṃ pañhabyākaraṇūpasampadā.
受持重法而受达上,是指大爱道因为接受了八条重法而被允许受达上。巴利
Garudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā nāma mahāpajāpatiyā aṭṭhagarudhammassa paṭiggahaṇena anuññātaupasampadā.
名为遣使达上的,是由妓女半迦尸开许的达上。巴利
Dūtenūpasampadā nāma aḍḍhakāsiyā gaṇikāya anuññātaupasampadā.
所谓“八语达上”,就是比丘尼先从比丘尼僧团以白四甘马受达上,再从比丘僧团以白四甘马受达上——通过这两种甘马完成受达上。巴利
Aṭṭhavācikūpasampadā nāma bhikkhuniyā bhikkhunisaṅghato ñatticatutthena bhikkhusaṅghato ñatticatutthenāti imehi dvīhi kammehi upasampadā.
所谓“白四甘马达上”,就是如今比丘受达上的方式。在这八种达上当中,世尊这样开许过:“诸比丘,我先前允许用三皈依受达上,从今天起废止这一做法。诸比丘,我允许用白四甘马来受达上。”(《大品》69)这里说的就是:依照这一开许,以这种达上而受达上的人,便称为得受达上。巴利
Ñatticatutthakammūpasampadā nāma bhikkhūnaṃ etarahi upasampadā. Imāsu aṭṭhasu upasampadāsu ‘‘yā sā, bhikkhave, mayā tīhi saraṇagamanehi upasampadā anuññātā, taṃ ajjatagge paṭikkhipāmi. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ñatticatutthena kammena upasampādetu’’nti (mahāva. 69) evaṃ anuññātāya imāya upasampadāya upasampannoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“贤善”,就是没有恶行。从善凡夫一直到阿拉汉,因为具足贤善的戒、定、慧、解脱和解脱知见,所以被称为“贤善比丘”。“坚实”,是因为具足戒等坚实之法,就像用靛蓝染成的蓝布一样,应当知道是“坚实比丘”;或者因为已经远离烦恼的浮渣状态,只有漏尽者才应当知道是“坚实”。“有学”,就是善凡夫加上七位圣者,因为还在修学三种修学,所以叫有学。他们当中任何一位,都应当知道是“有学比丘”。“不学”,就是无学。超越了有学法,安住于最高果位,因为再也没有需要进一步修学的东西,所以漏尽者被称为“无学”。“以和合僧团”,最简略地说,在五众作法的甘马中,凡是参与作法的比丘,因为已经到来,因为已把欲比丘的欲带来,因为现前的比丘不反对,所以在同一个甘马中达到和合。“以白四甘马”,就是由三次宣告和一次白文来完成的。“以业”,就是以如法的律业。“以不动”,因为具足了事、白、宣告、界和众的成就,所以达到不可动摇、不可反对。“以应处”,就是合乎理由、合乎大师的教法。“具足戒”,就是达到了上位、已获得的意思。比丘的身份就是上位,因为通过前面所说的业而达到,所以称为“具足戒”。在这里,白四甘马业只出现一种。不过,在这个地方,举出四种僧伽业来详细解说。这四种业就是“告白甘马、白甘马、白二甘马、白四甘马”,按顺序列出后,从犍度到《附随》结尾的业分别中引经文详细解说。我们将在《附随》结尾的业分别中解释它们。这样,初篇巴拉基格的注释就不会繁重;依照经文本身的注释也容易理解。那些地方也不会空着;因此我们只作逐词注释。巴利
Bhadroti apāpako. Kalyāṇaputhujjanādayo hi yāva arahā, tāva bhadrena sīlena samādhinā paññāya vimuttiyā vimuttiñāṇadassanena ca samannāgatattā ‘‘bhadro bhikkhū’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti. Sāroti tehiyeva sīlasārādīhi samannāgatattā nīlasamannāgamena nīlo paṭo viya ‘‘sāro bhikkhū’’ti veditabbo. Vigatakilesapheggubhāvato vā khīṇāsavova ‘‘sāro’’ti veditabbo. Sekhoti puthujjanakalyāṇakena saddhiṃ satta ariyā tisso sikkhā sikkhantīti sekhā. Tesu yo koci ‘‘sekho bhikkhū’’ti veditabbo. Na sikkhatīti asekho. Sekkhadhamme atikkamma aggaphale ṭhito, tato uttari sikkhitabbābhāvato khīṇāsavo ‘‘asekho’’ti vuccati. Samaggena saṅghenāti sabbantimena pariyāyena pañcavaggakaraṇīye kamme yāvatikā bhikkhū kammappattā, tesaṃ āgatattā chandārahānaṃ chandassa āhaṭattā, sammukhībhūtānañca appaṭikkosanato ekasmiṃ kamme samaggabhāvaṃ upagatena. Ñatticatutthenāti tīhi anussāvanāhi ekāya ca ñattiyā kātabbena. Kammenāti dhammikena vinayakammena. Akuppenāti vatthu-ñatti-anussāvana-sīmā-parisasampattisampannattā akopetabbataṃ appaṭikkositabbatañca upagatena. Ṭhānārahenāti kāraṇārahena satthusāsanārahena. Upasampanno nāma uparibhāvaṃ samāpanno, pattoti attho. Bhikkhubhāvo hi uparibhāvo, tañcesa yathāvuttena kammena samāpannattā ‘‘upasampanno’’ti vuccati. Ettha ca ñatticatutthakammaṃ ekameva āgataṃ. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvā cattāri saṅghakammāni nīharitvā vitthārato kathetabbānīti sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Tāni ca ‘‘apalokanakammaṃ ñattikammaṃ ñattidutiyakammaṃ ñatticatutthakamma’’nti paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapetvā vitthārena khandhakato parivārāvasāne kammavibhaṅgato ca pāḷiṃ āharitvā kathitāni. Tāni mayaṃ parivārāvasāne kammavibhaṅgeyeva vaṇṇayissāma. Evañhi sati paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā ca na bhāriyā bhavissati; yathāṭhitāya ca pāḷiyā vaṇṇanā suviññeyyā bhavissati. Tāni ca ṭhānāni asuññāni bhavissanti; tasmā anupadavaṇṇanameva karoma.
这里,“其中”是指在那些按照“乞食者”等方式所说的比丘当中。“凡这位比丘”是指这位比丘。“以和合僧团……达上”是指在八种达上中,只通过白四甘马这一种业而受达上。“此”是指在这个“行淫法就成为巴拉基格”的含义里所说的“比丘”。至于其他“乞食者”等说法,则是按照提取词义的方式来说的。其中,“乞食者”等是按照词源来说的;“以称呼而称比丘”“以自称而称比丘”这两种是按照言说方式来说的;“来,比丘”是按照以佛陀为和尚而获得达上来说的;皈依比丘是按照甘马语尚未制定时的达上来说的;“贤善”等则是按照功德来说的,应当这样理解。巴利
Tatrāti tesu ‘‘bhikkhako’’tiādinā nayena vuttesu bhikkhūsu. Yvāyaṃ bhikkhūti yo ayaṃ bhikkhu. Samaggena saṅghena…pe… upasampannoti aṭṭhasu upasampadāsu ñatticatuttheneva kammena upasampanno. Ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippeto bhikkhūti ayaṃ imasmiṃ ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitvā pārājiko hotī’’ti atthe ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti adhippeto. Itare pana ‘‘bhikkhako’’ti ādayo atthuddhāravasena vuttā. Tesu ca ‘‘bhikkhako’’ti ādayo niruttivasena vuttā, ‘‘samaññāya bhikkhu, paṭiññāya bhikkhū’’ti ime dve abhilāpavasena vuttā, ‘‘ehi bhikkhū’’ti buddhena upajjhāyena paṭiladdhaupasampadāvasena vutto. Saraṇagamanabhikkhu anuppannāya kammavācāya upasampadāvasena vutto, ‘‘bhadro’’tiādayo guṇavasena vuttāti veditabbā.
学与生活方式的词分别释义的注释巴利
Sikkhāsājīvapadabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
现在,“比丘们”这个词因为没有特别的含义,所以不加以分别,直接说明:由于具备修学与共住的身份,就成为比丘的修学与共住具足者,为了显示这一点,所以说“修学”等语。其中,“应当修学的”就是修学。“三”是数量的限定。“增上戒学”:增上就是最上的戒,即增上戒;那增上戒又是应当修学的,所以叫增上戒学。增上心学、增上慧学也是同样的道理。巴利
Idāni ‘‘bhikkhūna’’nti idaṃ padaṃ visesatthābhāvato avibhajitvāva yaṃ sikkhañca sājīvañca samāpannattā bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno hoti, taṃ dassento sikkhātiādimāha. Tattha sikkhitabbāti sikkhā. Tissoti gaṇanaparicchedo . Adhisīlasikkhāti adhikaṃ uttamaṃ sīlanti adhisīlaṃ; adhisīlañca taṃ sikkhitabbato sikkhā cāti adhisīlasikkhā. Esa nayo adhicitta-adhipaññāsikkhāsu.
那么,这里什么是戒?什么是增上戒?什么是心?什么是增上心?什么是慧?什么是增上慧?回答是:首先,五戒和十戒只是戒而已。因为无论佛陀出世还是不出世,这种戒都存在于世间。佛陀出世时,佛陀和弟子们都劝导大众受持这种戒;佛陀没有出世时,独觉佛、相信业论的人、如法的沙门婆罗门、转轮王、大国王以及大菩萨们也劝导大众受持。有智慧的沙门婆罗门自己也会受持。他们圆满这种善法之后,就在天界和人间享受福报。而巴帝摩卡防护戒则被称为增上戒,因为它就像太阳之于众光、须弥山之于群山一样,是一切世间戒中最殊胜、最上的,而且只在佛陀出世时才出现,没有佛陀出世就不会有。因为除了佛陀之外,没有其他众生能够制定这些学处;只有佛陀才能彻底断除身门、语门和意门的一切恶行之流,并为每一种违犯制定相应的律仪。比巴帝摩卡防护戒更殊胜的,是与道果相应的戒,但这里指的不是那个。因为证得那种戒的比丘,绝不会去做淫欲之事。巴利
Katamaṃ panettha sīlaṃ, katamaṃ adhisīlaṃ, katamaṃ cittaṃ, katamaṃ adhicittaṃ, katamā paññā, katamā adhipaññāti? Vuccate – pañcaṅgadasaṅgasīlaṃ tāva sīlameva. Tañhi buddhe uppannepi anuppannepi loke pavattati. Uppanne buddhe tasmiṃ sīle buddhāpi sāvakāpi mahājanaṃ samādapenti. Anuppanne buddhe paccekabuddhā ca kammavādino ca dhammikā samaṇabrāhmaṇā cakkavattī ca mahārājāno mahābodhisattā ca samādapenti. Sāmampi paṇḍitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā samādiyanti. Te taṃ kusalaṃ dhammaṃ paripūretvā devesu ca manussesu ca sampattiṃ anubhonti. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ pana ‘‘adhisīla’’nti vuccati, tañhi sūriyo viya pajjotānaṃ sineru viya pabbatānaṃ sabbalokiyasīlānaṃ adhikañceva uttamañca, buddhuppādeyeva ca pavattati, na vinā buddhuppādā. Na hi taṃ paññattiṃ uddharitvā añño satto ṭhapetuṃ sakkoti, buddhāyeva pana sabbaso kāyavacīdvāraajjhācārasotaṃ chinditvā tassa tassa vītikkamassa anucchavikaṃ taṃ sīlasaṃvaraṃ paññapenti. Pātimokkhasaṃvaratopi ca maggaphalasampayuttameva sīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ, taṃ pana idha anadhippetaṃ. Na hi taṃ samāpanno bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati.
不过,应当知道:八种欲界善心,以及世间八等至心,把它们合在一起,就只是“心”而已。它的生起,不论佛陀出世还是不出世,都应依照戒的部分所说的方式来理解劝导和受持。然而,以观智为前导的八等至心,被称为“增上心”。因为它就像增上戒相对于一切世间戒那样,相对于一切世间心也是更殊胜、更上等的,而且只在佛陀出世时才有,离不开佛陀出世。比这更殊胜的,是与道果相应的心,那才是增上心,但这里指的不是它。因为已经证得那种心的比丘,绝不会去行淫欲之事。巴利
Kāmāvacarāni pana aṭṭha kusalacittāni, lokiyaaṭṭhasamāpatticittāni ca ekajjhaṃ katvā cittamevāti veditabbāni. Buddhuppādānuppāde cassa pavatti, samādapanaṃ samādānañca sīle vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Vipassanāpādakaṃ aṭṭhasamāpatticittaṃ pana ‘‘adhicitta’’nti vuccati. Tañhi adhisīlaṃ viya sīlānaṃ sabbalokiyacittānaṃ adhikañceva uttamañca, buddhuppādeyeva ca hoti, na vinā buddhuppādā. Tatopi ca maggaphalacittameva adhicittaṃ, taṃ pana idha anadhippetaṃ. Na hi taṃ samāpanno bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati.
“有布施,有供养”等说法所引出的业自受智,就是慧。因为无论佛陀有没有出现在世间,这种慧都在世间运作。佛陀出现时,佛陀和佛弟子们都劝导大众修这种慧;佛陀没有出现时,独觉佛、主张业论的人、如法的沙门婆罗门、转轮王、大国王和大菩萨们也劝导大众修。有智慧的众生自己也会受持。比如安古罗曾连续一万年做大布施,维拉摩、韦桑德拉以及其他许多有智慧的人也做了大布施。他们圆满这种善法后,享受了天界和人间的福报。而能决断三相行相的观智,则称为增上慧。它就像增上戒、增上心相对于戒和心那样,是一切世间慧中最殊胜、最上等的,而且不离佛陀出世而存在于世间。比这更殊胜的是与道果相应的慧,那才是真正的增上慧,但这里指的不是它。因为证得那种慧的比丘,不会去行淫欲之法。巴利
‘‘Atthi dinnaṃ, atthi yiṭṭha’’nti (dha. sa. 1371; vibha. 793; ma. ni. 3.92) -ādinayappavattaṃ pana kammassakatañāṇaṃ paññā, sā hi buddhe uppannepi anuppannepi loke pavattati. Uppanne buddhe tassā paññāya buddhāpi buddhasāvakāpi mahājanaṃ samādapenti. Anuppanne buddhe paccekabuddhā ca kammavādino ca dhammikā samaṇabrāhmaṇā cakkavattī ca mahārājāno mahābodhisattā ca samādapenti. Sāmampi paṇḍitā sattā samādiyanti. Tathā hi aṅkuro dasavassasahassāni mahādānaṃ adāsi. Velāmo, vessantaro, aññe ca bahū paṇḍitamanussā mahādānāni adaṃsu. Te taṃ kusalaṃ dhammaṃ paripūretvā devesu ca manussesu ca sampattiṃ anubhaviṃsu. Tilakkhaṇākāraparicchedakaṃ pana vipassanāñāṇaṃ ‘‘adhipaññā’’ti vuccati. Sā hi adhisīla-adhicittāni viya sīlacittānaṃ sabbalokiyapaññānaṃ adhikā ceva uttamā ca, na ca vinā buddhuppādā loke pavattati. Tatopi ca maggaphalapaññāva adhipaññā, sā pana idha anadhippetā. Na hi taṃ samāpanno bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevatīti.
这里说的“于此”,是指那三种学处。“什么是增上戒学”:就是这被称为巴帝摩卡戒的增上戒学。“这叫做共住”:因为来自不同地区、种姓、家族等的比丘们一起生活,有共同的生活方式、同分的生活方式、同分的行为,所以世尊在律中制定的这整个学处,就称为“共住”。“于此学”:把那个学处作为心的所缘,用心的观察“我是否按照学处而学、是否没有学”来修学。而且,他不只是在称为共住的这个学处上修学,也在学处上修学;不过,这里是依据紧接着的“这叫做共住”这句话,才说“于此学”。虽然这样说,但这里的含义应当这样理解:他圆满那个学处的修学而学,并且不违犯那个学处而学。因此说“共住成就者”,这也是依据紧接着的“共住”一词而说的。然而,因为他也是学处成就者,所以从义理上应当知道他也是“学处成就者”。这样,“学处共住成就者”这个词的释义就圆满了。巴利
Tatrāti tāsu tīsu sikkhāsu. Yāyaṃ adhisīlasikkhāti yā ayaṃ pātimokkhasīlasaṅkhātā adhisīlasikkhā. Etaṃ sājīvaṃ nāmāti etaṃ sabbampi bhagavatā vinaye ṭhapitaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ, yasmā ettha nānādesajātigottādibhedabhinnā bhikkhū saha jīvanti ekajīvikā sabhāgajīvikā sabhāgavuttino honti, tasmā ‘‘sājīva’’nti vuccati. Tasmiṃ sikkhatīti taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ cittassa adhikaraṇaṃ katvā ‘‘yathāsikkhāpadaṃ nu kho sikkhāmi na sikkhāmī’’ti cittena olokento sikkhati. Na kevalañcāyametasmiṃ sājīvasaṅkhāte sikkhāpadeyeva sikkhati, sikkhāyapi sikkhati, ‘‘etaṃ sājīvaṃ nāmā’’ti imassa pana anantarassa padassa vasena ‘‘tasmiṃ sikkhatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi taṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ, atha kho ayamettha attho daṭṭhabbo – tassā ca sikkhāya sikkhaṃ paripūrento sikkhati, tasmiñca sikkhāpade avītikkamanto sikkhatīti. Tena vuccati sājīvasamāpannoti idampi anantarassa sājīvapadasseva vasena vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana so sikkhampi samāpanno, tasmā sikkhāsamāpannotipi atthato veditabbo. Evañhi sati ‘‘sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’ti etassa padassa padabhājanampi paripuṇṇaṃ hoti.
舍弃学处的分别注释巴利
Sikkhāpaccakkhānavibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
“不舍弃修学,也不表明自己软弱”:意思是既不放弃修学,也不公开表示自己软弱。因为即使把软弱说出来了,修学也仍然没有被舍弃;但一旦舍弃了修学,软弱就必定已经暴露出来了。所以“不表明自己软弱”这个说法,并没有什么特别的含义。就像说“可以两夜三夜同住一处”时,“两夜”这个词并没有什么特别含义,只是按照世间习惯说法,为了让语句顺畅、说起来顺口才这么说的。同样,这里也应该理解为:只是按照习惯说法,为了让语句顺畅、说起来顺口才这么说的。巴利
Sikkhaṃappaccakkhāya dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvāti sikkhañca appaṭikkhipitvā dubbalabhāvañca appakāsetvā. Yasmā ca dubbalye āvikatepi sikkhā appaccakkhātāva hoti, sikkhāya pana paccakkhātāya dubbalyaṃ āvikatameva hoti. Tasmā ‘‘dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā’’ti iminā padena na koci visesattho labbhati. Yathā pana ‘‘dirattatirattaṃ sahaseyyaṃ kappeyyā’’ti vutte dirattavacanena na koci visesattho labbhati, kevalaṃ lokavohāravasena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāya mukhārūḷhatāya etaṃ vuttaṃ. Evamidampi vohāravasena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāya mukhārūḷhatāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
世尊说法时,义理和文句都是圆满的,所以用“不舍学处”来成立义理,用“不显露羸弱”来成立文句。因为单独一个表达义理的词,如果没有辅助的词,就像没有侍从的国王,或者没有衣服装饰的人一样,不好看;但如果配上与义理相顺、起辅助作用的词,它就显得好看了。巴利
Yasmā vā bhagavā sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ dhammaṃ deseti, tasmā ‘‘sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāyā’’ti iminā atthaṃ sampādetvā ‘‘dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā’’ti iminā byañjanaṃ sampādeti. Parivārakapadavirahitañhi ekameva atthapadaṃ vuccamānaṃ parivāravirahito rājā viya, vatthālaṅkāravirahito viya ca puriso na sobhati; parivārakena pana atthānulomena sahāyapadena saddhiṃ taṃ sobhatīti.
或者,因为显露羸弱在某些情况下就是舍学处的意思,所以针对这一点,在解释“不舍学处”这个词的含义时,就说了“不显露羸弱”。巴利
Yasmā vā sikkhāpaccakkhānassa ekaccaṃ dubbalyāvikammaṃ attho hoti, tasmā taṃ sandhāya ‘‘sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāyā’’tipadassa atthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā’’ti āha.
这里可能会有人想:既然并不是所有表现出软弱的行为都算是舍弃学处,那就应该先说“没有表现出软弱”,然后为了限定它的含义,再说“没有舍弃学处”。但这种想法不对。为什么?因为这样不符合义理的次第。既然已经说了“具足学处与共住”,那么说“没有舍弃那学处”时,意思正是顺着这个次第表达出来的,而不是别的样子。所以,正是这一句被先说。巴利
Tattha siyā yasmā na sabbaṃ dubbalyāvikammaṃ sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ, tasmā ‘‘dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā’’ti paṭhamaṃ vatvā tassa atthaniyamanatthaṃ ‘‘sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāyā’’ti vattabbanti, tañca na; kasmā? Atthānukkamābhāvato. ‘‘Sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’ti hi vuttattā yaṃ sikkhaṃ samāpanno, taṃ appaccakkhāyāti vuccamāno anukkameneva attho vutto hoti, na aññathā. Tasmā idameva paṭhamaṃ vuttanti.
另外,这里也应该按照次第来理解它的含义。怎么理解呢?在“具足学处与共住”这句话里,对于所具足的学处,不舍弃;对于所具足的共住,不表现出软弱。巴利
Apica anupaṭipāṭiyāpi ettha attho veditabbo. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’ti ettha yaṃ sikkhaṃ samāpanno taṃ appaccakkhāya yañca sājīvaṃ samāpanno tattha dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvāti.
现在,为了说明舍戒和示弱行为这两者的区别与共同点,以及舍戒的特征,世尊说“诸比丘,有……”等话。其中,“诸比丘,有……”等是两句论母;分别解释它们时,又说“诸比丘,如何……”。这里对不明显词句的注释如下:“如何”是指以什么方式。“及示弱行为”是指表露软弱。“此处”是指在佛陀的教法中。“厌离者”是指因为对教法不欢喜而陷入困苦生活的人。或者也可以说,他心里一直想着“今天要走,明天要走,从这里走,到这里去”,伸长脖子而住,心散乱、不能专注,这被称为散乱不一心。“不喜乐者”是指对教法缺乏喜乐。巴利
Idāni sikkhāpaccakkhānadubbalyāvikammānaṃ visesāvisesaṃ sikkhāpaccakkhānalakkhaṇañca dassento ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha atthi bhikkhavetiādīni dve mātikāpadāni; tāni vibhajanto ‘‘kathañca bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – kathanti kena ākārena. Dubbalyāvikammañcāti dubbalyassa āvikammañca. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Ukkaṇṭhitoti anabhiratiyā imasmiṃ sāsane kicchajīvikappatto. Atha vā ajja yāmi, sve yāmi, ito yāmi, ettha yāmīti uddhaṃ kaṇṭhaṃ katvā viharamāno, vikkhitto anekaggoti vuttaṃ hoti. Anabhiratoti sāsane abhirativirahito.
想从沙门状态退下来,就是想要离开沙门的身份。以比丘的身份,这里用的是业格,表示工具格的意义。而在“因缠在脖子上而苦恼”等说法里,则是按照这个词本身的特征,用工具格来表达。“苦恼”是指像被折磨、被压迫、受苦那样对待自己;或者也可以理解为,被比丘身份所折磨、所逼迫。“羞惭”就是感到羞愧。“厌嫌”就是像厌恶不净物那样厌嫌它。“希求在家身份”等说法,意思都很浅显明白。“我何不弃舍佛呢”这里的“何不”是表示思虑的虚词。这句话的意思是:“如果我弃舍佛,那对我来说就好了。”他用这些或其他语句发出言语来说,并且让听他说的人知道、明白。“如是亦”的“亦”字是用来总结上面所说的意思。这样一来,既是示弱的表现,而戒也还没有舍弃;以其他方式也是如此。巴利
Sāmaññā cavitukāmoti samaṇabhāvato apagantukāmo. Bhikkhubhāvanti bhikkhubhāvena. Karaṇatthe upayogavacanaṃ. ‘‘Kaṇṭhe āsattena aṭṭīyeyyā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 162) pana yathālakkhaṇaṃ karaṇavacaneneva vuttaṃ. Aṭṭīyamānoti aṭṭaṃ pīḷitaṃ dukkhitaṃ viya attānaṃ ācaramāno; tena vā bhikkhubhāvena aṭṭo kariyamāno pīḷiyamānoti attho. Harāyamānoti lajjamāno. Jigucchamānoti asuciṃ viya taṃ jigucchanto. Gihibhāvaṃ patthayamānotiādīni uttānatthāniyeva. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ buddhaṃ paccakkheyyanti ettha yaṃnūnāti parivitakkadassane nipāto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘sacāhaṃ buddhaṃ paccakkheyyaṃ, sādhu vata me siyā’’ti. Vadati viññāpetīti imamatthaṃ etehi vā aññehi vā byañjanehi vacībhedaṃ katvā vadati ceva, yassa ca vadati, taṃ viññāpeti jānāpeti. Evampīti uparimatthasampiṇḍanatto pikāro. Evampi dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca appaccakkhātā, aññathāpi.
现在,为了说明那也是另一种形式的示弱行为,并且没有舍弃学处,而说了“或者又……”等话。这些内容从意义上来说都很浅显易懂。不过从字句上来看,这里从一开始,“弃舍佛、弃舍法、弃舍僧、弃舍学、弃舍律、弃舍巴帝摩卡、弃舍诵、弃舍和尚、弃舍阿阇梨、弃舍弟子、弃舍门徒、弃舍同和尚者、弃舍同阿阇梨者、弃舍同梵行者”,这十四句是以弃舍的方式说出来的。巴利
Idāni taṃ aññathāpi dubbalyāvikammaṃ sikkhāya ca appaccakkhānaṃ dassento ‘‘atha vā panā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ atthato uttānameva. Padato panettha ādito paṭṭhāya ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkheyyaṃ, dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ, sikkhaṃ, vinayaṃ, pātimokkhaṃ, uddesaṃ, upajjhāyaṃ, ācariyaṃ, saddhivihārikaṃ, antevāsikaṃ, samānupajjhāyakaṃ, samānācariyakaṃ, sabrahmacāriṃ paccakkheyya’’nti imāni cuddasa padāni paccakkhānākārena vuttāni.
“愿我是居士”等——“愿我是居士、近事男、园民、沙弥、外道、外道弟子、非沙门、非释迦子”,这八句是用“愿我是”这种状态变化的方式来说的。同样,与“我何不”相关联的有二十二句。巴利
Gihī assantiādīni ‘‘gihī, upāsako, ārāmiko, sāmaṇero, titthiyo, titthiyasāvako, assamaṇo, asakyaputtiyo assa’’nti imāni aṭṭha padāni ‘‘assa’’nti iminā bhāvavikappākārena vuttāni. Evaṃ ‘‘yaṃnūnāha’’nti iminā paṭisaṃyuttāni dvāvīsati padāni.
46 就像这些一样,与“如果我……”
“如果我不……”
“不如我……”
“对我来说有……”中的每一个相关联的,各有二十二句,总共就是一百一十句。巴利
46. Yathā ca etāni, evaṃ ‘‘yadi panāhaṃ, apāhaṃ, handāhaṃ, hoti me’’ti imesu ekamekena paṭisaṃyuttāni dvāvīsatīti sabbāneva satañca dasa ca padāni honti.
47 接着,按照应当忆念之事的显示方式而展开的,是“我忆念母亲”等十七句。其中,田指稻田等;地指草、叶、蔬菜、瓜果等生长之处;手艺指陶匠、织工等手艺。巴利
47. Tato paraṃ saritabbavatthudassananayena pavattāni ‘‘mātaraṃ sarāmī’’tiādīni sattarasa padāni. Tattha khettanti sālikhettādiṃ. Vatthunti tiṇapaṇṇasākaphalāphalasamuṭṭhānaṭṭhānaṃ. Sippanti kumbhakārapesakārasippādikaṃ.
48 接下来,为了显示有牵挂、有障碍的状态而展开的,是“我有母亲,她应该由我来养活”等九句。巴利
48. Tato paraṃ sakiñcanasapalibodhabhāvadassanavasena pavattāni ‘‘mātā me atthi, sā mayā posetabbā’’tiādīni nava padāni.
49 接下来,为了显示有依靠、有立足处的状态而出现的,是“我有母亲,她会养活我”等十六句。巴利
49. Tato paraṃ sanissayasappatiṭṭhabhāvadassanavasena pavattāni ‘‘mātā me atthi, sā maṃ posessatī’’tiādīni soḷasa padāni.
50 此后,为了显示一食、一卧、梵行的难行性,而说出的“难行”等八句。巴利
50. Tato paraṃ ekabhattaekaseyyabrahmacariyānaṃ dukkarabhāvadassanavasena pavattāni ‘‘dukkara’’ntiādīni aṭṭha padāni.
在这里,“难行”显示了一食等做法上的难行。“非易行”否定了易行性。同样,这里的“难行”和“非易行”也是如此。“我不能努力”显示了对那件事缺乏努力、做不到。“我不能堪忍”显示了不堪忍受。“我不喜乐”显示了没有喜乐。“我不欣乐”显示了没有欣乐。应当知道,这五十句加上前面的一百一十句,一共一百六十句,是在示弱行部分中所说的。巴利
Tattha dukkaranti ekabhattādīnaṃ karaṇe dukkarataṃ dasseti. Na sukaranti sukarabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Evaṃ duccaraṃ na sucaranti ettha. Na ussahāmīti tattha ussāhābhāvaṃ asakkuṇeyyataṃ dasseti. Na visahāmīti asayhataṃ dasseti. Na ramāmīti ratiyā abhāvaṃ dasseti. Nābhiramāmīti abhiratiyā abhāvaṃ dasseti. Evaṃ imāni ca paññāsa, purimāni ca dasuttarasatanti saṭṭhisataṃ padāni dubbalyāvikammavāre vuttānīti veditabbāni.
51 51. 在“舍弃学处”这一节里,“诸比丘,如何……”等开头的内容,从意义上来说都是很浅显易懂的。不过从词句上来看,这里也有“我舍弃佛、我舍弃法、我舍弃僧、我舍弃学、我舍弃律、我舍弃巴帝摩卡、我舍弃诵戒、我舍弃和尚、我舍弃阿阇梨、我舍弃共住弟子、我舍弃门徒、我舍弃同和尚者、我舍弃同阿阇梨者、我舍弃同梵行者”这十四个词,它们是和舍弃学处的话语联系在一起的。在所有这些词里,“说、令知”这个说法的意思是:发出言语而说,并且对所说的对象,通过这言语让他知道、让他听到、让他明白:“这个人想舍弃教法、想从教法中脱离、想放弃比丘身份,所以作出这样的语句表达。”巴利
51. Sikkhāpaccakkhānavārepi ‘‘kathañca bhikkhave’’ti ādi sabbaṃ atthato uttānameva. Padato panetthāpi ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmi, dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ, sikkhaṃ, vinayaṃ, pātimokkhaṃ, uddesaṃ, upajjhāyaṃ, ācariyaṃ, saddhivihārikaṃ, antevāsikaṃ, samānupajjhāyakaṃ, samānācariyakaṃ, sabrahmacāriṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti imāni cuddasa padāni sikkhāpaccakkhānavacanasambandhena pavattāni. Sabbapadesu ca ‘‘vadati viññāpetī’’ti vacanassa ayamattho – vacībhedaṃ katvā vadati, yassa ca vadati taṃ teneva vacībhedena ‘‘ayaṃ sāsanaṃ jahitukāmo sāsanato muccitukāmo bhikkhubhāvaṃ cajitukāmo imaṃ vākyabhedaṃ karotī’’ti viññāpeti sāveti jānāpeti.
如果他想说“我舍弃佛陀”,却把词序颠倒,说成“我舍弃佛”之类;或者用某种蛮族语言、或其他某种语言表达这个意思;或者本来想说“我舍弃佛陀”,却顺序错乱,说成“我舍弃法”或“我舍弃同梵行者”——就像在《上人法分别》中,本来想说“我进入初禅”,却说成“第二禅”——只要他对之说话的那个人,哪怕只知道这么一点:“这个比丘想舍弃比丘身份,正在表达这个意思”,那就不算失败;已经落入这个范畴,学处就已经被舍弃了。就像从帝释天神或梵天死后投生的众生一样,从教法中死去。巴利
Sace panāyaṃ ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vattukāmo padapaccābhaṭṭhaṃ katvā ‘‘paccakkhāmi buddha’’nti vā vadeyya. Milakkhabhāsāsu vā aññatarabhāsāya tamatthaṃ vadeyya. ‘‘Buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vattukāmo uppaṭipāṭiyā ‘‘dhammaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vā ‘‘sabrahmacāriṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vā vadeyya, seyyathāpi uttarimanussadhammavibhaṅge ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjāmī’’ti vattukāmo ‘‘dutiyaṃ jhāna’’nti vadati, sace yassa vadati so ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhubhāvaṃ cajitukāmo etamatthaṃ vadatī’’ti ettakamattampi jānāti, viraddhaṃ nāma natthi; khettameva otiṇṇaṃ, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Sakkattā vā brahmattā vā cutasatto viya cutova hoti sāsanā.
如果他用过去式、未来式或假设式的说法,说“我舍了佛”“我将舍佛”或“我应当舍佛”,或者派使者去,或者传递消息,或者刻写文字,或者用手势表达这个意思,那么修学还没有被舍弃。但如果是宣说上人法,即使只是用手势,也能成立。舍弃修学,只有在面对人类众生、内心相应而发出言语的时候,才能成立。即使发出言语让对方知道了,如果他指定一个人说“只让他知道”,而只有那个人知道,修学就被舍弃了。如果那个人不知道,旁边站着的另一个人知道,修学就没有被舍弃。如果两个人在场,他指定两个人说“我告诉他们”,那么无论其中一个人知道,还是两个人都知道,修学都被舍弃了。人更多的情况,也应当这样理解。巴利
Sace pana ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhi’’nti vā, ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhissāmī’’ti vā, ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkheyya’’nti vāti atītānāgataparikappavacanehi vadati, dūtaṃ vā pahiṇāti, sāsanaṃ vā peseti, akkharaṃ vā chindati, hatthamuddāya vā tamatthaṃ āroceti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Uttarimanussadhammārocanaṃ pana hatthamuddāyapi sīsaṃ eti. Sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ manussajātikasattassa santike cittasampayuttaṃ vacībhedaṃ karontasseva sīsaṃ eti. Vacībhedaṃ katvā viññāpentopi ca yadi ‘‘ayameva jānātū’’ti ekaṃ niyametvā āroceti, tañca soyeva jānāti, paccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Atha so na jānāti, añño samīpe ṭhito jānāti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Atha dvinnaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhāne dvinnampi niyametvā ‘‘etesaṃ ārocemī’’ti vadati, tesu ekasmiṃ jānantepi dvīsu jānantesupi paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Evaṃ sambahulesupi veditabbaṃ.
如果比丘被不满的情绪折磨,走到同辈比丘们中间,大声说“我舍佛”,想让“随便谁知道了就行”,而不远处站着的新近受戒的比丘或其他懂得这个意思的人听到后,知道“这个沙门已经厌烦了,想要过在家的生活,已经从教法里退失了”,那么学处就被舍了。不过就在那一刹那,不早不晚,很难判断。如果他在动念的那一刻就知道,就像世间人平常听到一句话就能明白意思那样,学处就被舍了。如果事后才怀疑“他这话是什么意思”,过了很久才知道,学处就没有被舍。因为舍学处这件事,和后面的妄说上人法、粗恶语、为了自己的欲望而说恶秽罪过等学处,是同一类判定。只有在动念的那一刻就知道,才算成立;如果怀疑“他在说什么”,过了很久才知道,就不算成立。就像在“我舍佛”这个词的判定里说的那样,一切词句都应这样理解。巴利
Sace pana anabhiratiyā pīḷito sabhāge bhikkhū parisaṅkamāno ‘‘yo koci jānātū’’ti uccasaddaṃ karonto ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vadati, tañca avidūre ṭhito navakammiko vā añño vā samayaññū puriso sutvā ‘‘ukkaṇṭhito ayaṃ samaṇo gihibhāvaṃ pattheti, sāsanato cuto’’ti jānāti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Taṅkhaṇaññeva pana apubbaṃ acarimaṃ dujjānaṃ, sace āvajjanasamaye jānāti; yathā pakatiyā loke manussā vacanaṃ sutvā jānanti, paccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Atha aparabhāge ‘‘kiṃ iminā vutta’’nti kaṅkhanto cirena jānāti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Idañhi sikkhāpaccakkhānañca upari abhūtārocanaduṭṭhullavācā-attakāmaduṭṭhadosabhūtā-rocanasikkhāpadāni ca ekaparicchedāni. Āvajjanasamaye ñāte eva sīsaṃ enti, ‘‘kiṃ ayaṃ bhaṇatī’’ti kaṅkhatā cirena ñāte sīsaṃ na enti. Yathā cāyaṃ ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti pade vinicchaye vutto; evaṃ sabbapadesu veditabbo.
因为,当修学被舍弃的时候,即使没有说出“我干脆舍弃佛陀”这类话,软弱就已经显露出来了;所以,在所有这些词句的末尾说:比丘们,这样确实既是软弱的显露,修学也已经被舍弃了。巴利
Yasmā ca yadā sikkhā paccakkhātā hoti, tadā ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ buddhaṃ paccakkheyya’’ntiādīni avadatāpi dubbalyaṃ āvikatameva hoti; tasmā sabbesaṃ padānaṃ avasāne vuttaṃ – ‘‘evampi, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca paccakkhātā’’ti.
从此之后,在“请持我为居士”这句话里,即使他说“我将成为居士”,或者说“我是居士”,或者说“我已生为居士”,或者说“我即是居士”,戒学也还没有被舍弃。但如果他说“从今天起,请持我为居士”,或者说“请知道”,或者说“请认清”,或者说“请留意”,不论是用雅语说还是用蛮语说,当这个意思表达出来,而听他说的人又听懂了,戒学就被舍弃了。这个规则也适用于其余“近事男”等七个词。这样一来,这八个词加上前面的十四个词,一共就是二十二个词。巴利
Tato paraṃ gihīti maṃ dhārehīti ettha sacepi ‘‘gihī bhavissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘gihī homī’’ti vā ‘‘gihī jātomhī’’ti vā ‘‘gihimhī’’ti vā vadati, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Sace pana ‘‘ajja paṭṭhāya gihīti maṃ dhārehī’’ti vā ‘‘jānāhī’’ti vā ‘‘sañjānāhī’’ti vā ‘‘manasi karohī’’ti vā vadati, ariyakena vā vadati milakkhakena vā; evametasmiṃ atthe vutte yassa vadati, sace so jānāti, paccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Esa nayo sesesupi ‘‘upāsako’’tiādīsu sattasu padesu. Evaṃ imāni ca aṭṭha, purimāni ca cuddasāti dvāvīsati padāni honti.
52 从这之后,把前面那十四个词分别和“我已足够”“我为何”“于我无益”“我善解脱”这四句组合起来说,就成了五十六句。其中,“我已足够”意思是:够了,已经足够了。“我为何”意思是:我还有什么该做的、该办的、该成就的?“于我无益”意思是:对我没有利益。“我善解脱”意思是:我很好地解脱了。其余的按前面说的方式理解。这样,这五十六句加上前面的二十二句,一共七十八句,都是按它们本来的样子说出来的。巴利
52. Ito paraṃ purimāneva cuddasa padāni ‘‘alaṃ me, kinnu me, na mamattho, sumuttāha’’nti imehi catūhi yojetvā vuttāni chappaññāsa honti. Tattha alanti hotu, pariyattanti attho. Kiṃnu meti kiṃ mayhaṃ kiccaṃ, kiṃ karaṇīyaṃ, kiṃ sādhetabbanti attho. Na mamatthoti natthi mama attho. Sumuttāhanti sumutto ahaṃ. Sesamettha vuttanayameva. Evaṃ imāni ca chappaññāsa purimāni ca dvāvīsatīti aṭṭhasattati padāni sarūpeneva vuttāni.
53 53. 不过,因为用那些同义词也能达成舍学,所以说了“或者其他任何”等话。其中,“或者其他任何”是指在巴利经典中除了“佛陀”等已经出现的词之外,还有其他哪些词。或者佛陀的同义词,也就是佛陀的别名……乃至非释迦子者的别名。其中,《功德庄严》里出现的千名、《优波离偈》里的百名,以及其他依功德而得的名称,应当知道是“佛陀的同义词”。一切法的名称,应当知道是“法的同义词”。这个道理适用于一切处。巴利
53. Yasmā pana tesaṃ vevacanehipi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘yāni vā panaññānipī’’tiādimāha. Tattha yāni vā panaññānipīti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘buddha’’ntiādīni āgatapadāni ṭhapetvā yāni aññāni atthi. Buddhavevacanāni vāti buddhassa vā pariyāyanāmāni…pe… asakyaputtiyassa vā. Tattha vaṇṇapaṭṭhāne āgataṃ nāmasahassaṃ upāligāthāsu (ma. ni. 2.76) nāmasataṃ aññāni ca guṇato labbhamānāni nāmāni ‘‘buddhavevacanānī’’ti veditabbāni. Sabbānipi dhammassa nāmāni dhammavevacanānīti veditabbāni. Esa nayo sabbattha.
这里应当这样理解:“我舍弃佛”并不是用同义词来舍弃,而是按照字面本身的意思来舍弃。“我舍弃正自觉者,舍弃具有无量智慧者,舍弃具有无上智慧者,舍弃菩提智者,舍弃坚毅者,舍弃已离痴者,舍弃已摧破障碍者,舍弃已获胜者”——像这样等等,通过佛陀的同义词来舍弃学处。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – buddhaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevavacanena paccakkhānaṃ yathārutameva. ‘‘Sammāsambuddhaṃ paccakkhāmi, anantabuddhiṃ, anomabuddhiṃ, bodhipaññāṇaṃ, dhīraṃ, vigatamohaṃ, pabhinnakhīlaṃ, vijitavijayaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evamādibuddhavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ.
“我舍弃法”并不是用同义词来舍弃,而是按照文句本身的意思来舍弃。“我舍弃善说之法,舍弃可现见之法,舍弃无时之法,舍弃来见之法,舍弃导向之法,舍弃智者各自应证知之法。我舍弃无为法;我舍弃离欲之法、灭之法、不死之法。我舍弃长部、梵网经、中部、根本法门经、相应部、渡瀑流经、增支部、心遍取经、小部、本生、阿毗达摩、善法、不善法、无记法、念处、正勤、神足、根、力、觉支、道、果、涅槃。”在八万四千法蕴中,哪怕只是一个法蕴的名称,也是法的同义词。这样,以法的同义词来舍弃学处。巴利
Dhammaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ, yathārutameva. ‘‘Svākkhātaṃ dhammaṃ paccakkhāmi, sandiṭṭhikaṃ, akālikaṃ, ehipassikaṃ, opaneyyikaṃ, paccattaṃ veditabbaṃ viññūhi dhammaṃ paccakkhāmi. Asaṅkhataṃ dhammaṃ paccakkhāmi; virāgaṃ, nirodhaṃ, amataṃ dhammaṃ paccakkhāmi, dīghanikāyaṃ paccakkhāmi, brahmajālaṃ majjhimanikāyaṃ, mūlapariyāyaṃ, saṃyuttanikāyaṃ, oghataraṇaṃ, aṅguttaranikāyaṃ, cittapariyādānaṃ, khuddakanikāyaṃ, jātakaṃ, abhidhammaṃ, kusalaṃ dhammaṃ, akusalaṃ dhammaṃ, abyākataṃ dhammaṃ, satipaṭṭhānaṃ, sammappadhānaṃ, iddhipādaṃ, indriyaṃ, balaṃ, bojjhaṅgaṃ, maggaṃ, phalaṃ, nibbānaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassesu ekadhammakkhandhassapi nāmaṃ dhammavevacanameva. Evaṃ dhammavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
只说“我舍僧”,并不算是以同义词的方式舍僧。要这样说:“我舍善行道的僧团、正直行道的僧团、如理行道的僧团、正当行道的僧团、四双的僧团、八辈补特伽罗的僧团、应受供养的僧团、应受款待的僧团、应受布施的僧团、应受合掌礼敬的僧团、无上福田的僧团。”像这样,通过僧团的同义词来表述,才构成舍学。巴利
Saṅghaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Suppaṭipannaṃ saṅghaṃ paccakkhāmi, ujuppaṭipannaṃ, ñāyappaṭipannaṃ, sāmīcippaṭipannaṃ saṅghaṃ, catupurisayugaṃ saṅghaṃ, aṭṭhapurisapuggalaṃ saṅghaṃ, āhuneyyaṃ saṅghaṃ, pāhuneyyaṃ, dakkhiṇeyyaṃ, añjalikaraṇīyaṃ, anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ saṅghaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ saṅghavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃学处”,并不是用同义词来表达舍弃。像这样说:“我舍弃比丘学处,舍弃比丘尼学处,舍弃增上戒学,舍弃增上心学,舍弃增上慧学”——这样通过学处的同义词来表达,就构成舍弃学处。巴利
Sikkhaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhusikkhaṃ paccakkhāmi, bhikkhunīsikkhaṃ, adhisīlasikkhaṃ, adhicittasikkhaṃ, adhipaññāsikkhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ sikkhāvevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃律”并不是用近义词来表达舍弃。要这样说:“我舍弃比丘律、舍弃比丘尼律、舍弃第一巴拉基格、第二巴拉基格、第三巴拉基格、第四巴拉基格、舍弃桑喀地谢思、土喇咤亚、巴吉帝亚、应悔过、恶作、恶说”——像这样用律的近义词来表达,才构成舍弃学处。巴利
Vinayaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhuvinayaṃ paccakkhāmi, bhikkhunīvinayaṃ, paṭhamaṃ pārājikaṃ, dutiyaṃ tatiyaṃ catutthaṃ pārājikaṃ, saṅghādisesaṃ, thullaccayaṃ, pācittiyaṃ, pāṭidesanīyaṃ, dukkaṭaṃ, dubbhāsitaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evamādivinayavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃巴帝摩卡”,并不是用同义词来表达舍弃。只有像“我舍弃比丘巴帝摩卡、我舍弃比丘尼巴帝摩卡”这样,用巴帝摩卡的同义词来说,才构成舍弃学处。巴利
Pātimokkhaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhupātimokkhaṃ bhikkhunīpātimokkhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ pātimokkhavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃诵”,并不是用同义词来表达舍弃。像这样说:“我舍弃比丘巴帝摩卡诵、比丘尼巴帝摩卡诵、第一巴帝摩卡诵、第二、第三、第四、第五巴帝摩卡诵、正自觉者诵、无量智者诵、无上智者诵、菩提智慧诵、坚毅者诵、离痴者诵、断除障碍者诵、战胜与胜利者诵”——以这样用“诵”的同义词来说,就构成舍弃学处。巴利
Uddesaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhupātimokkhuddesaṃ, bhikkhunīpātimokkhuddesaṃ , paṭhamaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ, dutiyaṃ tatiyaṃ catutthaṃ pañcamaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ, sammāsambuddhuddesaṃ, anantabuddhiuddesaṃ, anomabuddhiuddesaṃ, bodhipaññāṇuddesaṃ, dhīruddesaṃ, vigatamohuddesaṃ, pabhinnakhīluddesaṃ, vijitavijayuddesaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evamādiuddesavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃和尚”,并不是用别的说法就算舍弃。要这样说:“那位让我出家的人,那位让我受达上的人,我依靠他而出家,我依靠他而受达上,我的出家以他为根本,我的达上以他为根本——我舍弃他。”像这样,用和尚的另一种称呼来说,才算舍弃学处。巴利
Upajjhāyaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Yo maṃ pabbājesi, yo maṃ upasampādesi, yassa mūlenāhaṃ pabbajito, yassa mūlenāhaṃ upasampanno, yassamūlikā mayhaṃ pabbajjā, yassamūlikā mayhaṃ upasampadā tāhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ upajjhāyavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃老师”这句话,并不是只靠这个说法就算舍弃了(学处)。而要这样说:“那位让我出家的人,那位教导我的人,我依靠他而住的人,我请他教诫的人,我向他请教的人,那位教导我的人,那位让我去请教的人——我舍弃他。”像这样,用老师的同义说法来表达,才算舍弃学处。巴利
Ācariyaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Yo maṃ pabbājesi, yo maṃ anussāvesi, yāhaṃ nissāya vasāmi, yāhaṃ uddisāpemi, yāhaṃ paripucchāmi, yo maṃ uddisati, yo maṃ paripucchāpeti tāhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ ācariyavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃共住弟子”,并不是只靠这句话就算舍弃戒学。而要这样说:“我让他出家、我让他受达上的那位;以我为根本而出家的那位、以我为根本而受达上的那位;他的出家以我为根本、他的受达上以我为根本——我舍弃他。”这样用共住弟子的同义说法来表达,才算舍弃戒学。巴利
Saddhivihārikaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Yāhaṃ pabbājesiṃ, yāhaṃ upasampādesiṃ, mayhaṃ mūlena yo pabbajito, mayhaṃ mūlena yo upasampanno, mayhaṃmūlikā yassa pabbajjā, mayhaṃ mūlikā yassa upasampadā tāhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ saddhivihārikavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃近住弟子”,并不是只靠这个说法就算舍弃。要这样说:“我让他出家的那位、我教他诵习的那位、依止我而住的那位、请我教示的那位、向我提问的那位、我为他教示的那位、我让他提问的那位——我舍弃他。”像这样,用近住弟子的同义说法来表达,才算舍弃学处。巴利
Antevāsikaṃpaccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Yāhaṃ pabbājesiṃ, yāhaṃ anussāvesiṃ, yo maṃ nissāya vasati, yo maṃ uddisāpeti, yo maṃ paripucchati, yassāhaṃ uddisāmi, yāhaṃ paripucchāpemi taṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ antevāsikavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃同和尚的人”,并不是用这种代称就算舍弃。要这样说:“我的和尚让他出家、让他受达上,依我的和尚为根本而出家、依我的和尚为根本而受达上,他的出家以我的和尚为根本、他的受达上以我的和尚为根本——我舍弃这个人。”像这样用同和尚者的代称来陈述,才算是舍弃学处。巴利
Samānupajjhāyakaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Mayhaṃ upajjhāyo yaṃ pabbājesi, yaṃ upasampādesi, yo tassa mūlena pabbajito, yo tassa mūlena upasampanno, yassa tammūlikā pabbajjā, yassa tammūlikā upasampadā taṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ samānupajjhāyakavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃同师者”,并不是用这个说法本身就算舍弃。而是像这样说:“我的老师剃度了谁、宣告了谁,谁依靠他而住,谁请他教诫、向他请问,我的老师为谁教诫、让谁请问——我舍弃那个人”,这样用同师者的说法来表达,才算舍弃学处。巴利
Samānācariyakaṃpaccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Mayhaṃ ācariyo yaṃ pabbājesi, yaṃ anussāvesi, yo taṃ nissāya vasati, yo taṃ uddisāpeti paripucchati, yassa me ācariyo uddisati, yaṃ paripucchāpeti taṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ samānācariyakavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃同梵行者”,并不是用近义词来表达舍弃。如果说“那个和我一起修学增上戒、增上心、增上慧的人,我舍弃他”,像这样用同梵行者的近义词来说,就是舍弃学处。巴利
Sabrahmacāriṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Yenāhaṃ saddhiṃ adhisīlaṃ sikkhāmi, adhicittaṃ adhipaññaṃ sikkhāmi taṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ sabrahmacārivevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“你把我当作在家人吧”,这样并不算用同义词来舍弃。如果说“你把我当作住家者、农夫、商人、牧牛者、工匠、束髻者、享受欲乐者吧”,像这样用在家人的同义词来说,就是对学处的舍弃。巴利
Gihīti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Āgārikoti maṃ dhārehi, kassako, vāṇijo, gorakkho, okallako, moḷibaddho, kāmaguṇikoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ gihivevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
你把我当作近事男吧——这样说并不是用近义词来舍弃。如果说“你把我当作二语近事男、三语近事男,皈依佛者、皈依法者、皈依僧者,持五学处者、持十学处者吧”,这样用近事男的近义词来说,就成了对学处的舍弃。巴利
Upāsakoti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Dvevāciko upāsakoti maṃ dhārehi, tevāciko upāsako, buddhaṃ saraṇagamaniko, dhammaṃ saṅghaṃ saraṇagamaniko, pañcasikkhāpadiko dasasikkhāpadiko upāsakoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ upāsakavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“你把我当作净人吧”,这并不算用同义词来舍弃学处。如果说“你把我当作如法行事者、服务者、处理非青草事务者、分粥者、分果者、分硬食者吧”,这样用净人的同义词来说,就构成对学处的舍弃。巴利
Ārāmikoti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Kappiyakārakoti maṃ dhārehi, veyyāvaccakaro, appaharitakārako, yāgubhājako, phalabhājako, khajjakabhājakoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ ārāmikavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“你把我当作沙弥吧”,这并不算用同义词来舍弃学处。如果说“你把我当作童子吧、你把我当作穿布衣者吧、你把我当作侍童吧、你把我当作髻童吧、你把我当作沙门弟子吧”,这样用沙弥的同义词来说,就构成舍弃学处。巴利
Sāmaṇeroti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Kumārakoti maṃ dhārehi, cellako, ceṭako, moḷigallo, samaṇuddeso’ti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ sāmaṇeravecanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“你把我当作外道吧”,这并不是用同义词来舍弃学处。如果说“你把我当作尼乾陀吧”“邪命外道”“苦行者”“游行者”“白衣者吧”,这样用外道的同义词来说,就构成舍弃学处。巴利
Titthiyoti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Nigaṇṭhoti maṃ dhārehi, ājīvako, tāpaso, paribbājako, paṇḍaraṅgoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ titthiyavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“你把我当作外道弟子吧”,这并不是用同义说法来舍弃学处。如果说“你把我当作尼乾陀弟子吧”“邪命外道弟子”“苦行者弟子”“游方者弟子”“白衣者弟子吧”,这样用外道弟子的同义说法来说,就构成舍弃学处。巴利
Titthiyasāvakotimaṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Nigaṇṭhasāvakoti maṃ dhārehi’’ ājīvaka tāpasa paribbājaka paṇḍaraṅgasāvakoti maṃ dhārehīti evaṃ titthiyasāvakavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“你把我当作非沙门吧”——这并不是用同义词来舍弃学处。如果说:“你把我当作破戒者吧,恶法者,行为不清净、令人怀疑者,暗中造作恶业者,不是沙门却自称沙门者,不是梵行者却自称梵行者,内里腐烂者,漏泄烦恼者,秽物所生者,被阉割者吧”——像这样,用“非沙门”的同义词来说,就构成对学处的舍弃。巴利
Assamaṇoti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Dussīloti maṃ dhārehi, pāpadhammo, asucisaṅkassarasamācāro, paṭicchannakammanto, assamaṇo samaṇapaṭiñño, abrahmacārī brahmacāripaṭiñño, antopūti, avassuto, kasambujāto, koṇṭho’ti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ assamaṇavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“把我当作非释迦子”——这并不是用同义词来舍弃。如果说:“把我当作不是正自觉者之子,不是无量智者之子,不是无上智者之子,不是菩提智者之子,不是坚忍者之子,不是离痴者之子,不是已破除心桩者之子,不是已战胜、已征服者之子”——用这类“非释迦子”的同义词来说,就构成对学处的舍弃。巴利
Asakyaputtiyoti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Na sammāsambuddhaputtoti maṃ dhārehi, na anantabuddhiputto, na anomabuddhiputto, na bodhipaññāṇaputto, na dhīraputto, na vigatamohaputto, na pabhinnakhīlaputto , na vijitavijayaputtoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evamādiasakyaputtiyavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
所谓“以那些行相、那些表相、那些征相”,指的就是前面按“佛陀的异名”等这一格式说到的、佛陀等的异名。这些异名,因为是舍弃学处的因,所以叫行相;因为能表明佛陀等的形态,或者本身就是舍弃学处的形态,所以叫表相;又因为它们是让人认出舍弃学处的因缘,就像人身上的痣等一样,所以叫征相。诸比丘,如是——从这以后,因为再没有别的舍弃学处的因,所以这样说,是为了确定。这里的意思就是:正是这样,既是表现软弱的行为,也正是舍弃学处,除此之外再没有别的因了。巴利
Tehi ākārehi tehi liṅgehi tehi nimittehīti tehi ‘‘buddhavevacanāni vā’’tiādinā nayena vuttehi buddhādīnaṃ vevacanehi. Vevacanāni hi sikkhāpaccakkhānassa kāraṇattā ākārāni, buddhādīnaṃ saṇṭhānadīpanattā sikkhāpaccakkhānasaṇṭhānattā eva vā liṅgāni, sikkhāpaccakkhānassa sañjānanahetuto manussānaṃ tilakādīni viya nimittānīti vuccanti. Evaṃ kho bhikkhaveti ito paraṃ aññassa sikkhāpaccakkhānakāraṇassa abhāvato niyamento āha. Ayañhettha attho, evameva dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhāpaccakkhānañca, na ito paraṃ kāraṇamatthīti.
54 54. 这样说明了舍弃学处的特征之后,为了在未舍弃的情况下不致迷惑,也为了显示这个舍弃学处的特征依人等的不同而失败的情形,说了“诸比丘,怎样是未舍弃”等话。其中,“以那些行相”等,和前面所说的一样。疯狂者:就是被鬼弄疯的,或者因胆汁失调而发疯的,凡是认知颠倒的人,如果他舍弃学处,学处就是未舍弃。在疯狂者面前:就是在这样的疯狂者面前;如果在这样的疯狂者面前,一个正常人舍弃学处,而那个疯狂者不知道,学处也还是未舍弃。心散乱者:说的就是被鬼弄疯的人。前面那句里则是按疯狂者的通称,说“被鬼弄疯的,或者因胆汁失调而发疯的”。这两者的差别,在无犯那一节里会清楚说明。像这样,心散乱者舍弃学处,学处就是未舍弃。在他面前舍弃,而他不知道,也还是未舍弃。巴利
54. Evaṃ sikkhāpaccakkhānalakkhaṇaṃ dassetvā appaccakkhāne asammohatthaṃ tasseva ca sikkhāpaccakkhānalakkhaṇassa puggalādivasena vipattidassanatthaṃ ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave, appaccakkhātā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yehi ākārehītiādi vuttanayameva. Ummattakoti yakkhummattako vā pittummattako vā yo koci viparītasañño, so sace paccakkhāti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Ummattakassāti tādisasseva ummattakassa; tādisassa hi santike sace pakatatto sikkhaṃ paccakkhāti, ummattako na jānāti, appaccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Khittacittoti yakkhummattako vuccati. Purimapade pana ummattakasāmaññena vuttaṃ ‘‘yakkhummattako vā pittummattako vā’’ti. Ubhinnampi viseso anāpattivāre āvi bhavissati . Evaṃ khittacitto sikkhaṃ paccakkhāti, appaccakkhātāva hoti. Tassa santike paccakkhātāpi tamhi ajānante appaccakkhātāva hoti.
被强烈苦受触碰而陷入昏迷、失去理智的人,叫做“受剧苦者”。这种人在哀嚎哭喊的时候,即使做了舍弃,也等于没有舍弃。在他面前做了舍弃,但他并不知道,那也等于没有舍弃。巴利
Vedanāṭṭoti balavatiyā dukkhavedanāya phuṭṭho mucchāpareto; tena vilapantena paccakkhātāpi appaccakkhātāva hoti. Tassa santike paccakkhātāpi tamhi ajānante appaccakkhātā hoti.
在天神面前舍弃,从地居天开始直到色究竟天,即使在那些天神面前舍弃了,也等于没有舍弃。在畜生面前舍弃,比如在龙童子、金翅鸟童子,或者紧那罗、象、猴等任何畜生面前舍弃,也等于没有舍弃。其中,在疯子等人面前舍弃,因为他们无法理解,所以说不算舍弃。在天神面前舍弃不算,是因为他们理解得极快。天神有大智慧,是三因结生的,理解得非常快,而心又是快速转变的。所以,对于心念轻快的人,正因为心念轻快,才禁止在天神面前舍弃学处,以免“因为太快而毁掉了”。巴利
Devatāya santiketi bhummadevataṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva akaniṭṭhadevatāya santike paccakkhātāpi appaccakkhātāva hoti. Tiracchānagatassāti nāgamāṇavakassa vā supaṇṇamāṇavakassa vā kinnara-hatthi-makkaṭādīnaṃ vā yassa kassaci santike paccakkhātāpi appaccakkhātāva hoti . Tatra ummattakādīnaṃ santike ajānanabhāvena appaccakkhātāti āha. Devatāya santike atikhippaṃ jānanabhāvena. Devatā nāma mahāpaññā tihetukapaṭisandhikā atikhippaṃ jānanti, cittañca nāmetaṃ lahuparivattaṃ. Tasmā cittalahukassa puggalassa cittavaseneva ‘‘mā atikhippaṃ vināso ahosī’’ti devatāya santike sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ paṭikkhipi.
但在人类当中并没有定规。不论是在同类还是异类、在家众还是出家众、有智慧的人面前舍弃,都是真的舍弃了。但如果对方听不懂,那就还是没有舍弃。为了说明这个道理,就说了“以圣者语”等话。其中,“圣者语”就是圣者的用语,也就是摩揭陀语。“蛮族语”就是指任何非圣者的语言,比如安达罗人、达弥罗人等的语言。而“他听不懂”是说,因为不懂别的语言,或者因为在佛陀时代对法义不通达,所以不明白“他说的就是这个意思”。“出于戏弄”,就是忽然想说别的话,却脱口说出“我舍佛”;“出于喧嚷”,就是在喧乱之中,本来想说这个,却说成了那个。若问:前者有什么差别呢?前者是即使智者也会由于突然而说成别的话。而后者则是由于愚钝、迷惑、忘恩负义而失言,本来想说“我要说别的”,却说成了别的话。巴利
Manussesu pana niyamo natthi. Yassa kassaci sabhāgassa vā visabhāgassa vā gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā viññussa santike paccakkhātā paccakkhātāva hoti. Sace pana so na jānāti, appaccakkhātāva hotīti etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘ariyakenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ariyakaṃ nāma ariyavohāro, māgadhabhāsā. Milakkhakaṃ nāma yo koci anariyako andhadamiḷādi. So ca na paṭivijānātīti bhāsantare vā anabhiññatāya, buddhasamaye vā akovidatāya ‘‘idaṃ nāma atthaṃ esa bhaṇatī’’ti nappaṭivijānāti. Davāyāti sahasā aññaṃ bhaṇitukāmo sahasā ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti bhaṇati. Ravāyāti ravābhaññena, ‘‘aññaṃ bhaṇissāmī’’ti aññaṃ bhaṇanto. Purimena ko visesoti ce? Purimaṃ paṇḍitassāpi sahasāvasena aññabhaṇanaṃ. Idaṃ pana mandattā momūhattā apakataññuttā pakkhalantassa ‘‘aññaṃ bhaṇissāmī’’ti aññabhaṇanaṃ.
不想告知却告知:他教人读诵这条学处的巴利文,提问、学习、读诵、称赞,这称为“不想告知却告知”。想告知而不告知:在表明自己软弱后,舍弃学处,却不发之于言语,这称为“想告知而不告知”。向无知者告知:对年老的人,或对如书模一般的人,或对教法不通、愚钝的人,或对已达到无知程度的村童告知。向有智者不告知:对有能力了知的智者不告知。或者以任何方式完全不告知:在“我舍佛”等说法中,无论以哪种方式舍了学处,他连一句言语的表白都不作。如此,便确定了未舍学处的特征。这里的意思是:像这样,学处就是未舍,不是由于其他原因。巴利
Asāvetukāmo sāvetīti imassa sikkhāpadassa pāḷiṃ vāceti paripucchati uggaṇhāti sajjhāyaṃ karoti vaṇṇeti, ayaṃ vuccati ‘‘asāvetukāmo sāvetī’’ti. Sāvetukāmo na sāvetīti dubbalabhāvaṃ āvikatvā sikkhaṃ paccakkhanto vacībhedaṃ na karoti, ayaṃ vuccati ‘‘sāvetukāmo na sāvetī’’ti. Aviññussa sāvetīti mahallakassa vā potthakarūpasadisassa, garumedhassa vā samaye akovidassa, gāmadārakānaṃ vā aviññutaṃ pattānaṃ sāveti. Viññussa na sāvetīti paṇḍitassa ñātuṃ samatthassa na sāveti. Sabbaso vā panāti ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādīsu yena yena pariyāyena sikkhā paccakkhātā hoti, tato ekampi vacībhedaṃ katvā na sāveti. Evaṃ khoti appaccakkhānalakkhaṇaṃ niyameti. Ayaṃ hettha attho – ‘‘evameva sikkhā appaccakkhātā hoti, na aññena kāraṇenā’’ti.
根本制戒的注释巴利
Mūlapaññattivaṇṇanā
55 现在,为了说明“应当行淫欲之法”等语句的含义,所以说了“所谓淫欲法”等话。其中,“所谓淫欲法”是所要说明的淫欲法的标目词。“非法”是指不善者、卑劣之人的法。“村法”是指住在村里的人所行之法。“贱民法”是指贱民的法;或者因为烦恼流注,其本身就是贱法,所以叫“贱民法”。“粗恶”是指,因为被烦恼严重染污,又粗重而不精细,所以叫“粗恶”。从这里开始,在三个地方要把“yo so”改成“yaṃ taṃ”来连接——“那种粗恶,那种水边,那种秘密”。在这里,由于那种行为的伴随部分——看、拿、摸、触、碰都是粗恶的,所以那种行为也是粗恶的。那种粗恶,就是淫欲法。水在它尽头处,为了清净之义而被取,所以叫“水边”,水边本身就是“水边法”;那种水边法,就是淫欲法。因为必须在隐秘、遮蔽的地方做,所以叫“秘密”。那种秘密,就是淫欲法。应当这样理解它们的连接。巴利
55. Idāni ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyyā’’tiādīnaṃ atthadassanatthaṃ ‘‘methunadhammo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha methunadhammo nāmāti idaṃ niddisitabbassa methunadhammassa uddesapadaṃ. Asaddhammoti asataṃ nīcajanānaṃ dhammo. Gāmadhammoti gāmavāsīnaṃ sevanadhammo. Vasaladhammoti vasalānaṃ dhammo; kilesavassanato vā sayameva vasalo dhammoti vasaladhammo. Duṭṭhullanti duṭṭhuñca kilesehi duṭṭhattā, thūlañca anipuṇabhāvatoti duṭṭhullaṃ. Ito paṭṭhāya ca tīsu padesu ‘‘yo so’’ti idaṃ parivattetvā ‘‘yaṃ ta’’nti katvā yojetabbaṃ – ‘‘yaṃ taṃ duṭṭhullaṃ, yaṃ taṃ odakantikaṃ, yaṃ taṃ rahassa’’nti. Ettha ca yasmā tassa kammassa parivārabhūtaṃ dassanampi gahaṇampi āmasanampi phusanampi ghaṭṭanampi duṭṭhullaṃ, tasmāpi taṃ kammaṃ duṭṭhullaṃ. Yaṃ taṃ duṭṭhullaṃ so methunadhammo. Udakaṃ assa ante suddhatthaṃ ādīyatīti udakantaṃ, udakantameva odakantikaṃ; yaṃ taṃ odakantikaṃ , so methunadhammo. Raho paṭicchanne okāse kattabbatāya rahassaṃ. Yaṃ taṃ rahassaṃ, so methunadhammoti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā.
因为要透过两者、两者(的方式)来成就,所以叫“双双成就”。其中的连接是:“那种双双成就,就是所谓的淫法。”这里则把这一切总合起来说:“这就是所谓的淫法。”为什么称为淫法呢?因为这是双方都染着、贪恋、漏泄、被缠缚、双方相同之法,因此称为淫法。巴利
Dvayena dvayena samāpajjitabbato dvayaṃdvayasamāpatti. Tattha yojanā – ‘‘yā sā dvayaṃdvayasamāpatti so methunadhammo nāmā’’ti. Idha pana taṃ sabbaṃ ekajjhaṃ nigamento āha ‘‘eso methunadhammo nāmā’’ti. Kiṃ kāraṇā vuccati methunadhammoti? Ubhinnaṃ rattānaṃ sārattānaṃ avassutānaṃ pariyuṭṭhitānaṃ ubhinnaṃ sadisānaṃ dhammoti, taṃ kāraṇā vuccati methunadhammoti.
“行”这个说法,是一个论母句,为的是说明:在“应行”这个词里,是以何种方式而说“应行”。在“以自根入他根”等句中,如果有比丘以自己的根进入女人的根,以自己的生殖器进入女人的生殖器,乃至以最微小的程度,哪怕只有一粒芝麻那么大,在不为风所触的湿润处进入,这就叫作“行”;仅凭这一点就达到破戒,成为巴拉基格。巴利
Paṭisevati nāmāti idaṃ ‘‘paṭiseveyyā’’ti ettha yenākārena paṭiseveyyāti vuccati, tassākārassa dassanatthaṃ mātikāpadaṃ. Yo nittena nimittantiādīsu yo bhikkhu itthiyā nimittena attano nimittaṃ, itthiyā aṅgajātena attano aṅgajātaṃ sabbantimena pamāṇena ekatilabījamattampi vātena asamphuṭṭhe allokāse paveseti, eso paṭisevati nāma; ettakena sīlabhedaṃ pāpuṇāti, pārājiko hoti.
在这里,女性根有四个侧面和中间,一共五个位置。男性根有四个侧面、中间和上方,一共六个。因此,从女性根的下方进入,就是巴拉基格;从上方进入,从两侧进入,或者避开那四个位置只从中间进入,也是巴拉基格。至于男性根,碰触下方而进入的,是巴拉基格;碰触上方而进入的,碰触两侧而进入的,只碰触中间而进入的,以及像把手指收拢起来那样,收拢后以中节背面碰触上方而进入的,也是巴拉基格。其中,像天平横梁那样进入的,也有四个侧面和中间,共五个位置;收拢后进入的,也有四个侧面和上方中间,共五个位置。这样一来,男性根总共就有十个位置。巴利
Ettha ca itthinimitte cattāri passāni, vemajjhañcāti pañca ṭhānāni labbhanti. Purisanimitte cattāri passāni, majjhaṃ, uparicāti cha. Tasmā itthinimitte heṭṭhā pavesentopi pārājiko hoti. Uparito pavesentopi, ubhohi passehi pavesentopi cattāri ṭhānāni muñcitvā majjhena pavesentopi pārājiko hoti. Purisanimittaṃ pana heṭṭhābhāgena chupantaṃ pavesentopi pārājiko hoti. Uparibhāgena chupantaṃ pavesentopi, ubhohi passehi chupantaṃ pavesentopi, majjheneva chupantaṃ pavesentopi samañchitaṅguliṃ viya majjhimapabbapiṭṭhiyā saṅkocetvā uparibhāgena chupantaṃ pavesentopi pārājiko hoti. Tattha tulādaṇḍasadisaṃ pavesentassāpi cattāri passāni, majjhañcāti pañca ṭhānāni; saṅkocetvā pavesentassāpi cattāri passāni, uparibhāgamajjhañcāti pañca ṭhānāni – evaṃ sabbānipi purisanimitte dasa ṭhānāni honti.
把生支插入女根处生出的、未丧失身净色的皮瘤或疮肿,犯巴拉基格罪。把生支插入女根处生出的、已丧失身净色的死皮或干疮肿,犯恶作罪。带着淫欲的乐受,把阴毛、手指、拇指、种子等插入的,也同样是恶作罪。而这类淫欲话题,因为是粗恶的话题、不是圣者的话题,所以在讲说这一段或律中其他类似内容时,应当先现起不净想、沙门想和惭愧心,生起对正自觉者的恭敬,忆念那位对众生无与伦比地悲悯的世间怙主的悲德,然后才讲。那位世尊虽然已经完全远离诸欲,但为了怜愍众生、悲悯世间,出于对众生的悲心,为了制定学处,才讲了这样的话。应当这样忆念世间怙主的悲德:“啊,大师的悲德!”然后才讲。巴利
Nimitte jātaṃ anaṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ cammakhīlaṃ vā piḷakaṃ vā paveseti, āpatti pārājikassa. Naṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ matacammaṃ vā sukkhapiḷakaṃ vā paveseti, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Methunassādena lomaṃ vā aṅguli-aṅguṭṭhabījādīni vā pavesentassāpi dukkaṭameva. Ayañca methunakathā nāma yasmā duṭṭhullā kathā asabbhikathā, tasmā etaṃ vā aññaṃ vā vinaye īdisaṃ ṭhānaṃ kathentena paṭikkūlamanasikārañca samaṇasaññañca hirottappañca paccupaṭṭhapetvā sammāsambuddhe gāravaṃ uppādetvā asamakāruṇikassa lokanāthassa karuṇāguṇaṃ āvajjetvā kathetabbaṃ. So hi nāma bhagavā sabbaso kāmehi vinivattamānasopi sattānuddayāya lokānukampāya sattesu kāruññataṃ paṭicca sikkhāpadapaññāpanatthāya īdisaṃ kathaṃ kathesi. ‘‘Aho satthu karuṇāguṇo’’ti evaṃ lokanāthassa karuṇāguṇaṃ āvajjetvā kathetabbaṃ.
再说,如果世尊不以一切方式讲述这样的话,谁会知道:“在这么多……巴利
Apica yadi bhagavā sabbākārena īdisaṃ kathaṃ na katheyya, ko jāneyya ‘‘ettakesu
在哪些情形犯巴拉基格,在哪些情形犯土喇咤亚,在哪些情形犯恶作。因此,无论是听的人还是说的人,都不该捂着嘴、露着牙齿笑着坐。应当这样思量:“即使是正自觉的佛陀也讲过这样的法。”于是心怀庄重,具足惭与愧,以与导师相称的态度来说。巴利
Ṭhānesu pārājikaṃ, ettakesu thullaccayaṃ, ettakesu dukkaṭa’’nti. Tasmā suṇantenapi kathentenapi bījakena mukhaṃ apidhāya dantavidaṃsakaṃ hasamānena na nisīditabbaṃ. ‘‘Sammāsambuddhenāpi īdisaṃ kathita’’nti paccavekkhitvā gabbhitena hirottappasampannena satthupaṭibhāgena hutvā kathetabbanti.
在随制分中——“乃至”是指最低限度的界限。“对畜生女也一样”是指依结生而投生为畜生道的雌性。“更何况人类女人”是指首先是人类种族的女人。而在这里,作为巴拉基格事由的畜生女,应当取为畜生女,不是指所有的畜生女。这里的界定是——巴利
Anupaññattivāre – antamasoti sabbantimena paricchedena. Tiracchānagatāyapīti paṭisandhivasena tiracchānesu gatāyapi. Pageva manussitthiyāti paṭhamataraṃ manussajātikāya itthiyā. Pārājikavatthubhūtā eva cettha tiracchānagatitthī tiracchānagatāti gahetabbā, na sabbā. Tatrāyaṃ paricchedo –
无足的类:蛇和鱼;二足的类:母鸡;
四足类之中,猫,这是巴拉基格的事由。巴利
Apadānaṃ ahi macchā, dvipadānañca kukkuṭī; Catuppadānaṃ majjārī, vatthu pārājikassimāti.
这里,“蛇”这个词把蟒蛇、黑蛇等所有长条形的种类全都包括了。所以,在长条形类里,只要在三个道口(入口)中的任何一个,能塞进哪怕一粒芝麻那么大的东西,这就是巴拉基格事由;其余的情况应当知道是恶作事由。“鱼”这个词把鱼、龟、蛙等所有水生的种类全都包括了。在这里也一样,应当依照长条形类所说的方式,了知巴拉基格事由和恶作事由。不过这里有一个差别:有一种叫“飞蝗口蛙”的,它们的嘴形很大,孔却很小,塞不进去;但嘴形可以归入疮口一类,所以应当知道这是土喇咤亚事由。“鸡”这个词把鸦、鸽等所有鸟类的种类全都包括了。在这里也一样,应当依照所说的方式,了知巴拉基格事由和恶作事由。“猫”这个词把树狗、獴、蜥蜴等所有四足的种类全都包括了。在这里也一样,应当依照所说的方式,了知巴拉基格事由和恶作事由。巴利
Tattha ahiggahaṇena sabbāpi ajagaragonasādibhedā dīghajāti saṅgahitā. Tasmā dīghajātīsu yattha tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ sakkā tilaphalamattampi pavesetuṃ, sā pārājikavatthu. Avasesā dukkaṭavatthūti veditabbā. Macchaggahaṇena sabbāpi macchakacchapamaṇḍūkādibhedā odakajāti saṅgahitā. Tatrāpi dīghajātiyaṃ vuttanayeneva pārājikavatthu ca dukkaṭavatthu ca veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – pataṅgamukhamaṇḍūkā nāma honti tesaṃ mukhasaṇṭhānaṃ mahantaṃ, chiddaṃ appakaṃ, tattha pavesanaṃ nappahoti; mukhasaṇṭhānaṃ pana vaṇasaṅkhepaṃ gacchati, tasmā taṃ thullaccayavatthūti veditabbaṃ. Kukkuṭiggahaṇena sabbāpi kākakapotādibhedā pakkhijāti saṅgahitā. Tatrāpi vuttanayeneva pārājikavatthu ca dukkaṭavatthu ca veditabbaṃ. Majjāriggahaṇena sabbāpi rukkhasunakha-muṅgusa-godhādibhedā catuppadajāti saṅgahitā. Tatrāpi vuttanayeneva pārājikavatthu ca dukkaṭavatthu ca veditabbaṃ.
“巴拉基格”就是已经被打败、已经落入失败的意思。这个“巴拉基格”一词,用在学处、犯戒和个人这三种情况上。其中,用在学处上,就像这样说:“阿难,如来不可能因为跋耆人或跋耆子的缘故,就废除已经为弟子们制定的巴拉基格学处,这是没有道理的,绝无可能。”(巴拉基格43)应当这样理解。用在犯戒上,就像这样说:“比丘,你犯了巴拉基格罪。”(巴拉基格67)用在个人上,就像这样说:“我们不是巴拉基格,那个偷盗的人才是巴拉基格。”(巴拉基格155)应当这样理解。而在“应以巴拉基格法举罪”等说法中(巴拉基格384),则是用在法上。不过,那里所说的“法”,有时指犯戒,有时只指学处本身,所以不应把它单独另列出来。其中,学处会击败违越它的人,所以称为“巴拉基格”;犯戒会击败犯它的人,所以称为“巴拉基格”;个人因为已经被打败、已经落入失败,所以称为“巴拉基格”。正是为了说明这个意思,《附随》中也说:巴利
Pārājikoti parājito, parājayaṃ āpanno. Ayañhi pārājikasaddo sikkhāpadāpattipuggalesu vattati. Tattha ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, ānanda, anavakāso yaṃ tathāgato vajjīnaṃ vā vajjiputtakānaṃ vā kāraṇā sāvakānaṃ pārājikaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ samūhaneyyā’’ti (pārā. 43) evaṃ sikkhāpade vattamāno veditabbo. ‘‘Āpattiṃ tvaṃ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājika’’nti (pārā. 67) evaṃ āpattiyaṃ. ‘‘Na mayaṃ pārājikā, yo avahaṭo so pārājiko’’ti (pārā. 155) evaṃ puggale vattamāno veditabbo. ‘‘Pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃseyyā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 384) pana dhamme vattatīti vadanti. Yasmā pana tattha dhammoti katthaci āpatti , katthaci sikkhāpadameva adhippetaṃ, tasmā so visuṃ na vattabbo. Tattha sikkhāpadaṃ yo taṃ atikkamati, taṃ parājeti, tasmā ‘‘pārājika’’nti vuccati. Āpatti pana yo naṃ ajjhāpajjati, taṃ parājeti, tasmā ‘‘pārājikā’’ti vuccati. Puggalo yasmā parājito parājayamāpanno, tasmā ‘‘pārājiko’’ti vuccati. Etameva hi atthaṃ sandhāya parivārepi –
关于“巴拉基格”这个说法,你要如实听清楚:
他已死亡、败亡、被摧毁,确实从正法中被排除掉了。
在那里也没有共住,因此才这样说。如是说。巴利
‘‘Pārājikanti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ suṇohi yathātathaṃ; Cuto paraddho bhaṭṭho ca, saddhammā hi niraṅkato; Saṃvāsopi tahiṃ natthi, tenetaṃ iti vuccatī’’ti vuttaṃ. (pari. 339);
这里的意思是:“违犯那条学处、犯了罪的人,就是已经堕落的人”,应当这样整体理解。所谓“因此称为”,是说:由于什么原因他成了非沙门、非释迦子、被排除、被切断、从教法中败亡,就因此称为。怎么称呢?称为“是巴拉基格”。巴利
Ayañhettha attho – ‘‘taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ vītikkamanto āpattiñca āpanno puggalo cuto hotīti sabbaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tena vuccatīti yena kāraṇena assamaṇo hoti asakyaputtiyo paribhaṭṭho chinno parājito sāsanato, tena vuccati. Kinti? ‘‘Pārājiko hotī’’ti.
“共住”的意思是:他们一起住在这里。为了说明这一点,先说了“所谓共住”,然后又说“同一甘马”等。
这里结合起来的解释是这样的:四种僧甘马,因为都要由同一界内、未被剥夺资格的比丘们一起来做,所以叫“同一甘马”。同样,五种巴帝摩卡诵,因为都要一起诵出,所以叫“同一诵”。而制定的学处,因为所有有惭耻心的人都应当平等地修学,所以叫“平等学”。
在这里,因为所有有惭耻心的人都共同参与这些甘马等事,没有一个人被排除在外,所以把这一切合起来说“这就叫共住”。而这样的共住,与那个人并不存在,因此,那个巴拉基格之人就被称为“不共住”。巴利
Saha vasanti etthāti saṃvāso, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṃvāso nāmā’’ti vatvā ‘‘ekakamma’’ntiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ saddhiṃ yojanāya vaṇṇanā – catubbidhampi saṅghakammaṃ sīmāparicchinnehi pakatattehi bhikkhūhi ekato kattabbattā ekakammaṃ nāma. Tathā pañcavidhopi pātimokkhuddeso ekato uddisitabbattā ekuddeso nāma. Paññattaṃ pana sikkhāpadaṃ sabbehipi lajjīpuggalehi samaṃ sikkhitabbabhāvato samasikkhatā nāma. Ettha yasmā sabbepi lajjino etesu kammādīsu saha vasanti, na ekopi tato bahiddhā sandissati, tasmā tāni sabbānipi gahetvā ‘‘eso saṃvāso nāmā’’ti āha. So ca vuttappakāro saṃvāso tena puggalena saddhiṃ natthi, tena kāraṇena so pārājiko puggalo asaṃvāsoti vuccatīti.
56 56. 像这样,按条目顺序分别解释了已经宣说的学处之后,现在为了说明“若行淫”这句话里,是以什么样的方式被称为“行淫”,先安立“名为行淫”这个论母句,然后说“以相入相,以生殖器入生殖器”。在这里,因为并不是只有女性的相才是巴拉基格事,也不是只有人类女性才是,而且金、银等所造的女性相也并不是事;所以,为了显示哪些是事、哪些不是,先以“三种女性”等方式指出那些有相、有事的有情,然后以“于人类女性的三道”等方式宣说了那些事。巴利
56. Evaṃ uddiṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ padānukkamena vibhajitvā idāni yaṃ taṃ ‘‘paṭiseveyyā’’ti ettha yenākārena paṭiseveyyāti vuccati, tassākārassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭisevati nāmā’’ti idaṃ mātikāpadaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘nimittena nimittaṃ aṅgajātena aṅgajāta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmā na kevalaṃ itthiyā eva nimittaṃ pārājikavatthu, na ca manussitthiyā eva, suvaṇṇarajatādimayānañca itthīnampi nimittaṃ vatthumeva na hoti; tasmā yaṃ yaṃ vatthu hoti, taṃ taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tisso itthiyo’’tiādinā nayena yesaṃ nimittāni vatthūni honti, te satte vatvā ‘‘manussitthiyā tayo magge’’tiādinā nayena tāni vatthūni āha.
在这里,女性有三类、双性人有三类、黄门有三类、男性有三类,作为巴拉基格事的诸相所依,共有十二种众生。其中,女性和男性是显而易见的。黄门和双性人的分类,将在《出家犍度》的注释中说明。巴利
Tattha tisso itthiyo, tayo ubhatobyañjanakā, tayo paṇḍakā, tayo purisāti pārājikavatthūnaṃ nimittānaṃ nissayā dvādasa sattā honti. Tesu itthipurisā pākaṭā eva . Paṇḍakaubhatobyañjanakabhedo pabbajjākhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ pākaṭo bhavissati.
对女人,在三道中行淫法这一句里,应当理解为“在女人的三道中”。一切地方都这样理解。所有这些,就是:女人的三道、非人女人的三道、畜生女人的三道,共九种;人类双性人的三道等,也是九种;人类黄门等的,各算两道,共六种;人类男性等的也一样,总共就有三十种道。在这些叫作“相”的道当中,无论在哪一处,把自己的男根哪怕只像芝麻粒那么大地插入而行淫法,就犯巴拉基格。巴利
Manussitthiyā tayo magge methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassāti ettha ca manussitthiyā tīsu maggesūti attho veditabbo. Evaṃ sabbattha. Sabbe eva cete manussitthiyā tayo maggā, amanussitthiyā tayo, tiracchānagatitthiyā tayoti nava; manussaubhatobyañjanakādīnaṃ nava; manussapaṇḍakādīnaṃ dve dve katvā cha; tathā manussapurisādīnanti samatiṃsa maggā honti. Etesu nimittasaṅkhātesu yattha katthaci attano aṅgajātaṃ tilaphalamattampi pavesetvā methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanto pārājikaṃ āpajjati.
第一四法论的注释巴利
Paṭhamacatukkakathāvaṇṇanā
57 57. 不过,正在犯戒的人,是因为以淫心才犯戒,并不是没有淫心也能犯。所以,世尊为了指出这个特征,才说“比丘生起淫心时……”等等。其中,“比丘”指行淫的比丘。“生起淫心时”是主格用于位格意义,意思是“当淫心现前时”。“将生支导入粪道者”,是指把自己的生支——也就是男性器官——哪怕只有芝麻粒那么大,导入排泄粪便的那条通道。“犯巴拉基格罪”的意思是,他犯下巴拉基格罪;或者,“犯”指违犯的行为,“巴拉基格”指巴拉基格法。这个原则适用于一切情况。巴利
57. Āpajjanto pana yasmā sevanacitteneva āpajjati, na vinā tena; tasmā taṃ lakkhaṇaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘bhikkhussa sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhite’’tiādimāha. Tattha bhikkhussāti methunasevanakassa bhikkhussa. Sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhiteti bhummatthe paccattavacanaṃ, sevanacitte paccupaṭṭhiteti attho. Vaccamaggaṃ aṅgajātaṃ pavesentassāti yena maggena vaccaṃ nikkhamati taṃ maggaṃ attano aṅgajātaṃ purisanimittaṃ tilaphalamattampi pavesentassa. Āpatti pārājikassāti āpatti pārājikā assa hotīti attho. Atha vā āpattīti āpajjanaṃ hoti. Pārājikassāti pārājikadhammassa. Esa nayo sabbattha.
58 58. 这样,先指出了仅以淫心导入者所犯的罪,现在,因为那种导入并不只是靠自己主动努力而发生,也会因他人主动努力而发生。而在那种情况下,也只有对此欢喜、具备淫心的人才有罪,不是其他人。因此,为了保护那些以信心出家、行于正道的善男子——即使是在他人主动导入时也不欢喜——世尊才说了“比丘的怨敌、人类女性……”等话。巴利
58. Evaṃ sevanacitteneva pavesentassa āpattiṃ dassetvā idāni yasmā taṃ pavesanaṃ nāma na kevalaṃ attūpakkameneva, parūpakkamenāpi hoti . Tatrāpi ca sādiyantasseva āpatti paṭisevanacittasamaṅgissa, na itarassa. Tasmā ye saddhāpabbajitā kulaputtā sammāpaṭipannakā parūpakkamena pavesanepi sati na sādiyanti, tesaṃ rakkhaṇatthaṃ ‘‘bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthi’’ntiādimāha.
这里,“怨敌”是指希望对方受害的人。比丘本身就是怨敌,所以叫“比丘怨敌”;这是对那些不友善、有仇怨的比丘的称呼。“把人类女性带到比丘面前”是说:那些出于嫉妒、想毁掉那位比丘的怨敌,或者用财物引诱,或者借着朋友交情说“请帮我们做这件事”,然后在夜里把某个女性带到那位比丘住的地方。“以粪道将生支坐入”是说:他们紧紧抓住那位比丘的手、脚、头等部位,让他动弹不得,然后把那位比丘的生支坐入女性的粪道;意思是进行交合。巴利
Tattha paṭipakkhaṃ atthayanti icchantīti paccatthikā, bhikkhū eva paccatthikā bhikkhupaccatthikā; visabhāgānaṃ veribhikkhūnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Manussitthiṃ bhikkhussa santike ānetvāti issāpakatā taṃ bhikkhuṃ nāsetukāmā āmisena vā upalāpetvā mittasanthavavasena vā ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ kiccaṃ karohī’’ti vatvā kañci manussitthiṃ rattibhāge tassa bhikkhussa vasanokāsaṃ ānetvā. Vaccamaggena aṅgajātaṃ abhinisīdentīti taṃ bhikkhuṃ hatthapādasīsādīsu suggahitaṃ nipparipphandaṃ gahetvā itthiyā vaccamaggena tassa bhikkhuno aṅgajātaṃ abhinisīdenti; sampayojentīti attho.
在“如果那位……”这些句子里,如果那位比丘对自己男根进入粪道内部感到欢喜、接受,就在那一刻生起淫欲心;对已经进入感到欢喜、接受,就在进入的时候生起淫欲心;对已经停住感到欢喜、接受,就在停住、泄精的时候生起淫欲心;对抽出感到欢喜、接受,就在抽出的时候生起淫欲心。这样在四种情况下都欢喜的人,不能说是“仇敌沙门对我做了这个”,他犯的就是巴拉基格罪。就像对这四种情况都欢喜就犯戒一样,前一种不欢喜而后三种欢喜,或前两种不欢喜而后两种欢喜,或前三种不欢喜而后一种欢喜,也一样犯戒。但如果完全不欢喜,把进入的男根看成毒蛇口、看成火坑,就不犯戒。因此说:“对进入不欢喜……对抽出不欢喜,无犯。”世尊为了护持这样的修行人——已经开始修观、对身体和性命都不贪恋、把一切感官对象看成被十一种火燃烧着、把五种欲乐看成拿刀要杀人的凶手——同时也为了挫败怨敌的企图,才提出这“对进入不欢喜”等四项分类。巴利
So cetiādīsu so ce bhikkhu vaccamaggabbhantaraṃ attano aṅgajātassa pavesanaṃ sādiyati adhivāseti tasmiṃ khaṇe sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti. Paviṭṭhaṃ sādiyati adhivāseti, paviṭṭhakāle sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti. Ṭhitaṃ sādiyati adhivāseti, ṭhānappattakāle sukkavissaṭṭhisamaye sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti. Uddharaṇaṃ sādiyati adhivāseti, nīharaṇakāle paṭisevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti. Evaṃ catūsu ṭhānesu sādiyanto ‘‘mama verisamaṇehi idaṃ kata’’nti vattuṃ na labhati, pārājikāpattimeva āpajjati. Yathā ca imāni cattāri sādiyanto āpajjati; evaṃ purimaṃ ekaṃ asādiyitvā tīṇi sādiyantopi, dve asādiyitvā dve sādiyantopi, tīṇi asādiyitvā ekaṃ sādiyantopi āpajjatiyeva. Sabbaso pana asādiyanto āsīvisamukhaṃ viya aṅgārakāsuṃ viya ca paviṭṭhaṃ aṅgajātaṃ maññamāno nāpajjati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pavesanaṃ na sādiyati…pe… uddharaṇaṃ na sādiyati, anāpattī’’ti. Imañhi evarūpaṃ āraddhavipassakaṃ kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhaṃ ekādasahi aggīhi sampajjalitāni ca sabbāyatanāni ukkhittāsike viya ca vadhake pañca kāmaguṇe passantaṃ puggalaṃ rakkhanto bhagavā paccatthikānañcassa manorathavighātaṃ karonto imaṃ ‘‘pavesanaṃ na sādiyatī’’tiādikaṃ catukkaṃ nīharitvā ṭhapesīti.
二百六十九个四法组论说巴利
Ekūnasattatidvisatacatukkakathā
59-60 59-60. 像这样开示了第一组四法之后,现在,因为与比丘为敌的人把女人带来后,不只是从大便道插入,也会从小便道和口插入。而且,把女人带来时,有些人带来的是清醒的,有些是睡着的,有些是醉酒的,有些是疯癫的,有些是放逸的、心在别处、心散乱的——这是意思。有些是死了但还没被啃食的,意思是没有被狗、豺等啃食过特征部位的。有些是死了但大部分还没被啃食的;所谓大部分还没被啃食,就是她的大便道、小便道或口等特征部位大部分还没被啃食。有些是死了但大部分已被啃食的;所谓大部分已被啃食,就是她的大便道等特征部位大部分已被啃食,只有少量还没被啃食。而且,他们不只是带来人类女人,也会带来非人女人和畜生女人。也不只是带来上面所说的那种女人,还会带来双性人、黄门和男人。因此,针对这些人,为了开示其余的四法组,经文说“与比丘为敌的人带来清醒的人类女人”等等。巴利
59-60. Evaṃ paṭhamacatukkaṃ dassetvā idāni yasmā bhikkhupaccatthikā itthiṃ ānetvā na kevalaṃ vaccamaggeneva abhinisīdenti, atha kho passāvamaggenapi mukhenapi. Itthiṃ ānetvāpi ca keci jāgarantiṃ ānenti, keci suttaṃ, keci mattaṃ, keci ummattaṃ, keci pamattaṃ aññavihitaṃ vikkhittacittanti attho. Keci mataṃ akkhāyitaṃ, soṇasiṅgālādīhi akkhāyitanimittanti attho. Keci mataṃ yebhuyyena akkhāyitaṃ, yebhuyyena akkhāyitā nāma yassā nimitte vaccamagge passāvamagge mukhe vā bahutaro okāso akkhāyito hoti. Keci mataṃ yebhuyyena khāyitaṃ, yebhuyyena khāyitā nāma yassā vaccamaggādike nimitte bahuṃ khāyitaṃ hoti, appaṃ akkhāyitaṃ. Na kevalañca manussitthimeva ānenti, atha kho amanussitthimpi tiracchānagatitthimpi. Na kevalañca vuttappakāraṃ itthimeva, ubhatobyañjanakampi paṇḍakampi purisampi ānenti. Tasmā tesaṃ vasena aññānipi catukkāni dassento ‘‘bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṃ jāgaranti’’ntiādimāha.
在这里,为了让巴利原文的意思不混乱,应当知道前面所说的那些四组,数目是这样计算的:针对人类女人,按三道来算,有三组清净四组、三组清醒四组、三组睡眠四组、三组醉酒四组、三组疯狂四组、三组放逸四组、三组已死未被啃食四组、三组大多数未被啃食四组、三组大多数被啃食四组,一共二十七组四组。非人女人也一样,畜生女人也一样,这样在女人这一类里就有八十一组四组。双性人这一类也和女人这一类一样。至于黄门和男人这两类,按两道来算,各有五十四组四组。这样一来,全部加起来就是二百七十组四组,这些的意思都很浅显易懂。巴利
Tattha pāḷiyā asammohatthaṃ vuttacatukkāni evaṃ saṅkhyāto veditabbāni – manussitthiyā tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vasena tīṇi suddhikacatukkāni, tīṇi jāgarantīcatukkāni, tīṇi suttacatukkāni, tīṇi mattacatukkāni, tīṇi ummattacatukkāni, tīṇi pamattacatukkāni, tīṇi mataakkhāyitacatukkāni, tīṇi yebhuyyena akkhāyitacatukkāni, tīṇi yebhuyyena khāyitacatukkānīti sattavīsati catukkāni. Tathā amanussitthiyā; tathā tiracchānagatitthiyāti itthivāre ekāsīti catukkāni. Yathā ca itthivāre evaṃ ubhatobyañjanakavāre. Paṇḍakapurisavāresu pana dvinnaṃ maggānaṃ vasena catupaṇṇāsa catupaṇṇāsa honti. Evaṃ sabbānipi dvesatāni, sattati ca catukkāni honti, tāni uttānatthāniyeva.
不过,在所有情形中,关于“已死、大多数没被啃食、已被啃食”这个地方,有这样的判定:在铜掌岛,据说曾有两位同一位老师门下的持律长老——伍巴帝萨长老和普萨迭瓦长老。大怖畏发生时,他们护持并保存了律藏。其中,伍巴帝萨长老更为精通。他也有两位弟子——玛哈巴杜玛长老与大苏摩长老。其中,大苏摩长老听了九遍律藏,玛哈巴杜玛长老则与他一起听了九遍,又独自听了九遍,共听了十八遍;因此玛哈巴杜玛长老在他们之中更为精通。后来,大苏摩长老听了九遍律藏后,离开老师去了恒河彼岸。于是玛哈巴杜玛长老说:“啊,这位持律者真勇敢,竟然认为老师还在世就可以离开到别处去住。难道不是应当趁老师还在世时,多遍学习律藏和义注也不放手,时常听闻,每年复诵吗?”巴利
Sabbavāresu panettha ‘‘mataṃ yebhuyyena akkhāyitaṃ khāyita’’nti etasmiṃ ṭhāne ayaṃ vinicchayo – tambapaṇṇidīpe kira dve vinayadharā samānācariyakā therā ahesuṃ – upatissatthero ca, phussadevatthero ca. Te mahābhaye uppanne vinayapiṭakaṃ pariharantā rakkhiṃsu. Tesu upatissatthero byattataro. Tassāpi dve antevāsikā ahesuṃ – mahāpadumatthero ca mahāsumatthero ca. Tesu mahāsumatthero nakkhattuṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ assosi, mahāpadumatthero tena saddhiṃ navakkhattuṃ, visuñca ekakova navakkhattunti aṭṭhārasakkhattuṃ assosi; ayameva tesu byattataro . Tesu mahāsumatthero navakkhattuṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ sutvā ācariyaṃ muñcitvā aparagaṅgaṃ agamāsi. Tato mahāpadumatthero āha – ‘‘sūro vata, re, esa vinayadharo yo dharamānakaṃyeva ācariyaṃ muñcitvā aññattha vasitabbaṃ maññati. Nanu ācariye dharamāne vinayapiṭakañca aṭṭhakathā ca anekakkhattuṃ gahetvāpi na vissajjetabbaṃ, niccakālaṃ sotabbaṃ, anusaṃvaccharaṃ sajjhāyitabba’’nti.
有一次,在那些以律藏为重的比丘们所处的时代,伍巴帝萨长老正坐着,为以玛哈巴杜玛长老为首的五百位弟子讲解第一巴拉基格学处中的这一段。弟子们问他:“尊者,在大部分没被啃食的情况下是巴拉基格,在大部分已被啃食的情况下是土喇咤亚,那么一半被啃食的情况应该算什么呢?”长老说:“贤友们,诸佛制定巴拉基格时,不会有所保留地制定,而是毫无保留、彻底涵盖、断绝后路,在巴拉基格事上就只制定巴拉基格。因为这条学处属于世间共许的过犯,不是因制定才成为过犯的。所以,如果一半被啃食的情况应该是巴拉基格,正自觉者一定会制定。然而在这里看不到巴拉基格的影子,只看到土喇咤亚的影子。”巴利
Evaṃ vinayagarukānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kāle ekadivasaṃ upatissatthero mahāpadumattherappamukhānaṃ pañcannaṃ antevāsikasatānaṃ paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpade imaṃ padesaṃ vaṇṇento nisinno hoti. Taṃ antevāsikā pucchiṃsu – ‘‘bhante, yebhuyyena akkhāyite pārājikaṃ, yebhuyyena khāyite thullaccayaṃ, upaḍḍhakkhāyite kena bhavitabba’’nti? Thero āha – ‘‘āvuso, buddhā nāma pārājikaṃ paññapentā na sāvasesaṃ katvā paññapenti, anavasesaṃyeva katvā sabbaṃ pariyādiyitvā sotaṃ chinditvā pārājikavatthusmiṃ pārājikameva paññapenti. Idañhi sikkhāpadaṃ lokavajjaṃ, na paṇṇattivajjaṃ. Tasmā yadi upaḍḍhakkhāyite pārājikaṃ bhaveyya, paññapeyya sammāsambuddho. Pārājikacchāyā panettha na dissati, thullaccayameva dissatī’’ti.
另外要明白:世尊制定“死尸上的巴拉基格”时,大多把界限放在“大部分还没被啃食”的情况,是为了说明“超过这个范围就不再是巴拉基格”。制定“土喇咤亚”时,大多把界限放在“大部分已被啃食”的情况,也是为了说明“超过这个范围就不再是土喇咤亚”。所谓“已被啃食、未被啃食”,只适用于死尸,不适用于活人。因为活人身上,哪怕只剩指甲盖大小的皮、肉或筋,也仍然是巴拉基格。即使特征部位完全被啃掉、皮肉都没有了,但只要特征部位的形状还能辨认,还能插入,也仍然是巴拉基格。如果把特征部位的形状彻底破坏,整个特征部位被切断、四周削平、拔除,那就按伤口缩小来判,是土喇咤亚。对从特征部位掉下来的肉块行淫,是恶作。至于死尸,不管整个身体已被啃食还是未被啃食,只要三道还没被啃食,对那里行淫就是巴拉基格;大部分未被啃食时,是巴拉基格;一半被啃食以及大部分已被啃食时,是土喇咤亚。巴利
Apica matasarīre pārājikaṃ paññapento bhagavā yebhuyyena akkhāyite ṭhapesi ‘‘tato paraṃ pārājikaṃ natthī’’ti dassetuṃ. Thullaccayaṃ paññapento yebhuyyena khāyite ṭhapesi ‘‘tato paraṃ thullaccayaṃ natthī’’ti dassetuntipi veditabbaṃ. Khāyitākhāyitañca nāmetaṃ matasarīrasmiṃyeva veditabbaṃ, na jīvamāne. Jīvamāne hi nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇepi chavimaṃse vā nhārumhi vā sati pārājikameva hoti. Yadipi nimittaṃ sabbaso khāyitaṃ chavicammaṃ natthi, nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ paññāyati, pavesanaṃ jāyati, pārājikameva. Nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ pana anavasesetvā sabbasmiṃ nimitte chinditvā samantato tacchetvā uppāṭite vaṇasaṅkhepavasena thullaccayaṃ. Nimittato patitāya maṃsapesiyā upakkamantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Matasarīre pana yadipi sabbaṃ sarīraṃ khāyitaṃ hoti, yadipi akkhāyitaṃ, tayo pana maggā akkhāyitā, tesu upakkamantassa pārājikaṃ. Yebhuyyena akkhāyite pārājikameva. Upaḍḍhakkhāyite ca yebhuyyena khāyite ca thullaccayaṃ.
对活人的身体,在眼睛、鼻子、耳朵的孔口、膀胱口,或在刀等造成的伤口等处,因为淫欲把男根插进去,哪怕只插进芝麻粒那么一点点,都是土喇咤亚。在身体其他部位,比如腋窝等处,是恶作。对已经死了但还没腐烂的尸体,在巴拉基格的范围内就犯巴拉基格,在土喇咤亚的范围内就犯土喇咤亚,在恶作的范围内就犯恶作。可是,当尸体膨胀、腐烂、发青、布满苍蝇、爬满蛆虫,从九个疮口流着脓,因为腐尸的样子让人根本没法靠近时,那就谈不上巴拉基格的事,也谈不上土喇咤亚的事;在这样的尸体上,不管从哪里下手,都只是恶作。对畜生,比如象、马、牛、驴、骆驼、水牛等,插进鼻子的,是土喇咤亚;插进膀胱口的,也是土喇咤亚。对一切畜生,在眼睛、耳朵、伤口等处,是恶作;在身体其他部位,也是恶作。对死了的畜生,如果尸体还没腐烂,在巴拉基格的范围内就犯巴拉基格,在土喇咤亚的范围内就犯土喇咤亚,在恶作的范围内就犯恶作。巴利
Manussānaṃ jīvamānakasarīre akkhināsakaṇṇacchiddavatthikosesu satthakādīhi katavaṇe vā methunarāgena tilaphalamattampi aṅgajātaṃ pavesentassa thullaccayameva. Avasesasarīre upakacchakādīsu dukkaṭaṃ. Mate allasarīre pārājikakkhette pārājikaṃ, thullaccayakkhette thullaccayaṃ, dukkaṭakkhette dukkaṭaṃ. Yadā pana sarīraṃ uddhumātakaṃ hoti kuthitaṃ nīlamakkhikasamākiṇṇaṃ kimikulasamākulaṃ navahi vaṇamukhehi paggaḷitapubbakuṇapabhāvena upagantumpi asakkuṇeyyaṃ, tadā pārājikavatthuñca thullaccayavatthuñca vijahati; tādise sarīre yattha katthaci upakkamato dukkaṭameva. Tiracchānagatānaṃ hatthi-assa-goṇa-gadrabha-oṭṭhamahiṃsādīnaṃ nāsāya thullaccayaṃ. Vatthikose thullaccayameva. Sabbesampi tiracchānagatānaṃ akkhikaṇṇavaṇesu dukkaṭaṃ, avasesasarīrepi dukkaṭameva. Matānaṃ allasarīre pārājikakkhette pārājikaṃ, thullaccayakkhette thullaccayaṃ, dukkaṭakkhette dukkaṭaṃ.
对于腐烂的尸骸,则如前所说,一切处都是恶作。如果以身相触的贪欲或淫欲,对活着的男子,没有插入其膀胱口,而用生殖器碰触生殖器,是恶作。如果以淫欲,对女人,没有插入而用生殖器碰触生殖器,是土喇咤亚。不过《大注》中说:“以淫欲用口碰触女人生殖器,是土喇咤亚。”在《皮革犍度》中,因为“六群比丘在阿致罗筏底河中,对渡河的母牛,抓角、抓耳、抓颈、抓尾,甚至骑上牛背,还有以染心碰触生殖器”(《大品》252)这一事缘,而笼统地说:“诸比丘,不应以染心碰触生殖器,谁碰触,犯土喇咤亚。”(《大品》252)这一切都应综合对照,使它们不相矛盾,然后来理解。怎样才不相矛盾呢?首先,《大注》所说“以淫欲用口碰触”,那里“口”指的是生殖器口。而且因为说了“以淫欲”,就应知道这里的意思正是如此。因为对女人生殖器,用普通的嘴不可能构成淫欲的行为。在《犍度》中,那些骑上牛背的人,如果是以淫欲用生殖器碰触生殖器,应知道是针对他们而说土喇咤亚。否则就应是恶作。有些人说:“在《犍度》中,也是针对用口碰触,因为业粗重而说土喇咤亚。《注》中也是取这个意思而说‘以淫欲用口碰触,是土喇咤亚’。”因此,应当好好考察,在两种判断中,取更合理的那一种。不过通达律的人称赞前一种。若以身相触的贪欲,用普通的嘴或生殖器口碰触女人生殖器,是桑喀地谢思。对雌性畜生,用生殖器口碰触其尿道,依照前面所说的方式,是土喇咤亚。若以身相触的贪欲,是恶作。巴利
Kuthitakuṇape pana pubbe vuttanayeneva sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena vā methunarāgena vā jīvamānakapurisassa vatthikosaṃ appavesento nimittena nimittaṃ chupati, dukkaṭaṃ. Methunarāgena itthiyā appavesento nimittena nimittaṃ chupati, thullaccayaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘itthinimittaṃ methunarāgena mukhena chupati thullaccaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Cammakkhandhake ‘‘chabbaggiyā bhikkhū aciravatiyā nadiyā gāvīnaṃ tarantīnaṃ visāṇesupi gaṇhanti, kaṇṇesupi gaṇhanti, gīvāyapi gaṇhanti, cheppāyapi gaṇhanti, piṭṭhimpi abhiruhanti, rattacittāpi aṅgajātaṃ chupantī’’ti (mahāva. 252) imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā avisesena vuttaṃ – ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, rattacittena aṅgajātaṃ chupitabbaṃ, yo chupeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 252). Taṃ sabbampi saṃsanditvā yathā na virujjhati tathā gahetabbaṃ. Kathañca na virujjhati? Yaṃ tāva mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘methunarāgena mukhena chupatī’’ti. Tatra kira nimittamukhaṃ mukhanti adhippetaṃ. ‘‘Methunarāgenā’’ti ca vuttattāpi ayameva tattha adhippāyoti veditabbo. Na hi itthinimitte pakatimukhena methunupakkamo hoti. Khandhakepi ye piṭṭhiṃ abhiruhantā methunarāgena aṅgajātena aṅgajātaṃ chupiṃsu, te sandhāya thullaccayaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Itarathā hi dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Keci panāhu ‘‘khandhakepi mukheneva chupanaṃ sandhāya oḷārikattā kammassa thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyampi taṃ sandhāyabhāsitaṃ gahetvāva methunarāgena mukhena chupati thullaccayanti vutta’’nti. Tasmā suṭṭhu sallakkhetvā ubhosu vinicchayesu yo yuttataro so gahetabbo. Vinayaññū pana purimaṃ pasaṃsanti. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena pana pakatimukhena vā nimittamukhena vā itthinimittaṃ chupantassa saṅghādiseso. Tiracchānagatitthiyā passāvamaggaṃ nimittamukhena chupantassa vuttanayeneva thullaccayaṃ. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena dukkaṭanti.
铺展四法的分类讨论巴利
Santhatacatukkabhedakathā
61-62 世尊这样为保护依法修行的比丘,先举出二百七十种四法,然后观察到:将来会有恶比丘,故意找借口说“这铺盖物没有属于任何人的已执取,用有执受的东西去碰它,哪有什么过错?”他们因此根本无法在教法上站稳脚跟。为了说明这一点,世尊把二百七十种四法中的每一个四法,各按四种铺盖等分类拆开来讲,于是说出“比丘的冤家把女人带到比丘跟前,用大便道、小便道、口,让比丘的男根坐进去,以有盖的碰无盖的”等话。巴利
61-62. Evaṃ bhagavā paṭipannakassa bhikkhuno rakkhaṇatthaṃ sattatidvisatacatukkāni nīharitvā ‘‘idāni ye anāgate pāpabhikkhū ‘santhataṃ imaṃ na kiñci upādinnakaṃ upādinnakena phusati, ko ettha doso’ti sañcicca lesaṃ oḍḍessanti, tesaṃ sāsane patiṭṭhā eva na bhavissatī’’ti disvā tesu sattatidvisatacatukkesu ekamekaṃ catukkaṃ catūhi santhatādibhedehi bhinditvā dassento bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṃ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena passāvamaggena mukhena aṅgajātaṃ abhinisīdenti santhatāya asanthatassātiādimāha.
在这里,“有盖的、无盖的”等说法中,应当这样理解其搭配:所谓“有盖的女人”,就是她的三条道——大便道、小便道、口中——无论哪一条,用布、树叶、树皮条、皮革、铅片等任何东西缠裹起来,或者塞进去遮住。所谓“有盖的”,就是他的男根被同样的布等任何东西遮住。以有盖女人的道,让无盖比丘的男根插入。对此,不论是有执受的触无执受的、无执受的触有执受的、无执受的触无执受的,还是有执受的触有执受的,只要进入的深度达到了所说的“进入这么多就犯巴拉基格”的程度,那么在所有情况下,如果是有乐受的,在巴拉基格的范围内就犯巴拉基格,在土喇咤亚的范围内就犯土喇咤亚,在恶作的范围内就只犯恶作。如果把女人女根做成木桩状再遮盖上,触碰木桩的,犯恶作。如果把男人男根做成木桩状再遮盖上,把木桩插入的,犯恶作。如果把两者都做成木桩状再遮盖上,用木桩碰木桩的,犯恶作。如果在女人女根中放入竹管、芦苇节等任何东西,触碰它的下部,哪怕只进入芝麻粒那么大,也犯巴拉基格。触碰上部,或者从两侧中任何一侧进入,也犯巴拉基格。四面都不触碰,进入后碰到它的底部,也犯巴拉基格。但如果侧面和底部都不触碰,只是悬空进入再抽出,犯恶作。在外面触碰木桩,也只是恶作。正如对女人女根所说的那样,应当知道在一切处都是这个标准。巴利
Tattha santhatāya asanthatassātiādīsu santhatāya itthiyā vaccamaggena passāvamaggena mukhena asanthatassa bhikkhussa aṅgajātaṃ abhinisīdentīti iminā nayena yojanā veditabbā. Tattha santhatā nāma yassā tīsu maggesu yo koci maggo paliveṭhetvā vā anto vā pavesetvā yena kenaci vatthena vā paṇṇena vā vākapaṭṭena vā cammena vā tipusīsādīnaṃ paṭṭena vā paṭicchanno. Santhato nāma yassa aṅgajātaṃ tesaṃyeva vatthādīnaṃ yena kenaci paṭicchannaṃ. Tattha upādinnakena vā anupādinnakaṃ ghaṭṭiyatu, anupādinnakena vā upādinnakaṃ, anupādinnakena vā anupādinnakaṃ, upādinnakena vā upādinnakaṃ, sace yattake paviṭṭhe pārājikaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ, tattakaṃ pavisati, sabbattha sādiyantassa pārājikakkhette pārājikaṃ; thullaccayakkhette thullaccayaṃ, dukkaṭakkhette dukkaṭameva hoti. Sace itthinimittaṃ khāṇuṃ katvā santhataṃ, khāṇuṃ ghaṭṭentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Sace purisanimittaṃ khāṇuṃ katvā santhataṃ, khāṇuṃ pavesentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Sace ubhayaṃ khāṇuṃ katvā santhataṃ, khāṇunā khāṇuṃ ghaṭṭentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Sace itthinimitte veḷunaḷapabbādīnaṃ kiñci pakkhittaṃ, tassa heṭṭhābhāgaṃ cepi phusanto tilaphalamattaṃ paveseti, pārājikaṃ. Uparibhāgaṃ cepi ubhosu passesu ekapassaṃ cepi phusanto paveseti, pārājikaṃ. Cattāripi passāni aphusanto pavesetvā tassa talaṃ cepi phusati, pārājikaṃ. Yadi pana passesu vā tale vā aphusanto ākāsagatameva katvā pavesetvā nīharati, dukkaṭaṃ. Bahiddhā khāṇuke phusati dukkaṭameva. Yathā ca itthinimitte vuttaṃ, evaṃ sabbattha lakkhaṇaṃ veditabbanti.
比丘的敌对者四种分类的注释巴利
Bhikkhupaccatthikacatukkabhedavaṇṇanā
63-64 讲完有盖物的四种分类之后,现在要说:因为不只是把人类女人等带到比丘面前,也会把比丘带到她们面前。所以,为了显示这种分类,又以“比丘的仇敌把比丘带到人类女人面前”等方式,把所有这些四法分类再次提取出来加以显示。其中,判断应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
63-64. Evaṃ santhatacatukkabhedaṃ vatvā idāni yasmā na kevalaṃ manussitthiādike bhikkhussa eva santike ānenti. Atha kho bhikkhumpi tāsaṃ santike ānenti, tasmā tappabhedaṃ dassento ‘‘bhikkhupaccatthikā bhikkhuṃ manussitthiyā santike’’ti ādinā nayena sabbāni tāni catukkāni punapi nīharitvā dassesi. Tesu vinicchayo vuttanayeneva veditabboti.
关于国王的仇敌等四种类别的分别论述巴利
Rājapaccatthikādicatukkabhedakathā
65 65. 不过,并不是只有比丘的敌人会这样做,国王的敌人等也会这样做。因此,为了说明那种分类,就说了“国王的敌人”等。其中,国王本身就是敌人,所以叫“国王的敌人”。要知道,他们无论是亲自带来,还是命令别人带来,都是带来。盗贼本身就是敌人,所以叫“盗贼的敌人”。所谓“恶徒”,是指沉迷于淫欲之乐的城市流氓男子,或者好色之徒、好酒之徒等;恶徒本身就是敌人,所以叫“恶徒的敌人”。所谓“香”,指的是心脏;拔取心脏的,就叫“取香者”;取香者本身就是敌人,所以叫“取香者的敌人”。据说这些人不靠农耕、经商等谋生,而是通过拦路抢劫、屠杀村庄等来养活妻儿。他们为了事业成功,向天神祈求,为了给天神献祭,就拔取人的心脏。可是人什么时候都很难找到,而在林中居住的比丘却很容易找到。他们抓住持戒的比丘,心想“杀害持戒者是很重的罪”,为了毁掉他的戒行,就把女人等带来他那里,或者把他带到那里去。这就是这里的差别。其余部分应按照前面所说的方法来理解。在这四种情况中,四种分类都应按照比丘的敌人那一部分所说的方法来理解。不过在圣典中,这些是简要说的。巴利
65. Yasmā pana na bhikkhupaccatthikā eva evaṃ karonti, rājapaccatthikādayopi karonti. Tasmā tampi pabhedaṃ dassento ‘‘rājapaccatthikā’’tiādimāha. Tattha rājāno eva paccatthikā rājapaccatthikā. Te ca sayaṃ ānentāpi aññehi āṇāpentāpi ānentiyevāti veditabbā. Corā eva paccatthikā corapaccatthikā. Dhuttāti methunupasaṃhitakhiḍḍāpasutā nāgarikakerāṭiyapurisā, itthidhuttasurādhuttādayo vā; dhuttā eva paccatthikā dhuttapaccatthikā. Gandhanti hadayaṃ vuccati, taṃ uppāṭentīti uppalagandhā, uppalagandhā eva paccatthikā uppalagandhapaccatthikā. Ete kira na kasivaṇijjādīhi jīvanti, panthaghātagāmaghātādīni katvā puttadāraṃ posenti. Te kammasiddhiṃ patthayamānā devatānaṃ āyācetvā tāsaṃ balikammatthaṃ manussānaṃ hadayaṃ uppāṭenti. Sabbakāle ca manussā dullabhā. Bhikkhū pana araññe viharantā sulabhā honti. Te sīlavantaṃ bhikkhuṃ gahetvā ‘‘sīlavato vadho nāma bhāriyo hotī’’ti maññamānā tassa sīlavināsanatthaṃ manussitthiādike vā ānenti; taṃ vā tattha nenti. Ayamettha viseso. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Bhikkhupaccatthikavāre vuttanayeneva ca imesu catūsupi vāresu catukkāni veditabbāni. Pāḷiyaṃ pana saṃkhittena vuttāni.
犯与不犯分别的注释巴利
Āpattānāpattivāravaṇṇanā
66 现在,对于前面所说的“与女人在三道中行淫法”等,为了避免混淆,这里说“以道入道”等。其中,“以道入道”是指用女人的三道中的某一道,把自己的生殖器插入;或者当两道已经破裂连通时,用尿道插入粪道,或者用粪道插入尿道。“以道入非道”是指从尿道等道插入后,从它旁边的伤口抽出来。“以非道入道”是指从道旁边的伤口插入,然后从道抽出来。“以非道入非道”是指当两个伤口已经破裂连通时,从一个伤口插入,从另一个伤口抽出来。按照这部经的次第,在一切伤口的情况下,概要来说,应当知道这是土喇咤亚。巴利
66. Idāni yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘manussitthiyā tayo magge methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassā’’tiādi, ettha asammohatthaṃ ‘‘maggena magga’’ntiādimāha. Tattha maggena magganti itthiyā tīsu maggesu aññatarena maggena attano aṅgajātaṃ paveseti atha vā sambhinnesu dvīsu maggesu passāvamaggena vaccamaggaṃ vaccamaggena vā passāvamaggaṃ paveseti. Maggena amagganti passāvādimaggena pavesetvā tassa sāmantā vaṇena nīharati. Amaggena magganti maggasāmantena vaṇena pavesetvā maggena nīharati. Amaggena amagganti dvīsu sambhinnavaṇesu ekena vaṇena pavesetvā dutiyena nīharati. Imassa suttassa anulomavasena sabbattha vaṇasaṅkhepe thullaccayaṃ veditabbaṃ.
现在,对于后面将要说的“不知者、不欢喜者无犯”,为了避免混淆,这里说了“比丘对熟睡的比丘”等话。这里的用意是:醒来后如果生起欢喜心,那么即使他说“他在我熟睡时对我做了非礼的事,我不知情”,也脱不了罪。两者都应当灭摈,也就是说两个人都要以灭摈的方式摈出。其中,侵犯者不需要自己承认;被侵犯者则要先询问,承认之后才灭摈。如果不欢喜,就不应灭摈。这个规则也适用于沙弥品。巴利
Idāni yaṃ parato vakkhati ‘‘anāpatti ajānantassa asādiyantassā’’ti, tattha asammohatthaṃ ‘‘bhikkhu suttabhikkhumhī’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ adhippāyo – yo paṭibuddho sādiyati so ‘‘suttamhi mayi eso vippaṭipajji, nāhaṃ jānāmī’’ti na muccati. Ubho nāsetabbāti cettha dvepi liṅganāsanena nāsetabbā. Tatra dūsakassa paṭiññākaraṇaṃ natthi, dūsito pucchitvā paṭiññāya nāsetabbo. Sace na sādiyati, na nāsetabbo. Esa nayo sāmaṇeravārepi.
像这样,在各处说明了犯戒和无犯之后,现在专门说明无犯的情况,所以说“不知者无犯”等。其中,所谓“不知者”,是指陷入深睡、完全不知道别人对自己做了什么的人,就像在毗舍离大林中白天休息的比丘那样。对这样的人无犯。这也是经中说过的:“世尊,我不知道。”
“比丘,不知者无犯。”所谓“不欢喜者”,是指虽然知道但不喜欢、不接受的人,就像当场立刻起身的比丘那样。这也是经中说过的:“世尊,我不欢喜。”
“比丘,不欢喜者无犯。”巴利
Evaṃ tattha tattha taṃ taṃ āpattiñca anāpattiñca dassetvā idāni anāpattimeva dassento ‘‘anāpatti ajānantassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ajānanto nāma yo mahāniddaṃ okkanto parena kataṃ upakkamampi na jānāti vesāliyaṃ mahāvane divāvihāragato bhikkhu viya. Evarūpassa anāpatti. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘‘nāhaṃ bhagavā jānāmī’ti; ‘anāpatti, bhikkhu, ajānantassā’’’ti (pārā. 75). Asādiyanto nāma yo jānitvāpi na sādiyati, tattheva sahasā vuṭṭhitabhikkhu viya. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘‘nāhaṃ bhagavā sādiyi’nti. ‘Anāpatti, bhikkhu, asādiyantassā’’ti.
所谓疯人,就是因胆汁而发疯的人。胆汁有两种:固定胆汁和非固定胆汁。其中,非固定胆汁像血液一样遍布全身,当它失调时,众生就会出现瘙痒、疥疮、身体颤抖等症状,这些可以通过医药治疗来平息。而固定胆汁则位于胆囊中,当它失调时,众生就会发疯,产生颠倒的认知,抛弃惭愧心,做出不合宜的行为。即使践踏了轻戒或重戒,他们也毫无知觉;医药治疗也治不好。对这样的疯人,不算犯戒。巴利
Ummattako nāma pittummattako. Duvidhañhi pittaṃ – baddhapittaṃ, abaddhapittañcāti. Tattha abaddhapittaṃ lohitaṃ viya sabbaṅgagataṃ, tamhi kupite sattānaṃ kaṇḍukacchusarīrakampādīni honti. Tāni bhesajjakiriyāya vūpasamanti. Baddhapittaṃ pana pittakosake ṭhitaṃ. Tamhi kupite sattā ummattakā honti vipallatthasaññā hirottappaṃ chaḍḍetvā asāruppācāraṃ caranti. Lahukagarukāni sikkhāpadāni maddantāpi na jānanti. Bhesajjakiriyāyapi atekicchā honti. Evarūpassa ummattakassa anāpatti.
所谓“心散乱者”,是指心放逸、被夜叉弄得发疯的人。据说,夜叉会显现恐怖的所缘,或者把手从嘴巴伸进去,按压心脏的物质,让众生心散乱、产生颠倒的认知。对这样的心散乱者,无犯。不过,这两者有这样的差别:因胆汁而发疯的人,一直处于疯狂状态,得不到正常的认知;被夜叉弄得发疯的人,则时不时能恢复正常的认知。但在这里,不管是因胆汁而发疯,还是被夜叉弄得发疯,只要完全失念、什么都不知道,把火、金子、粪便、檀香都看成一样而行事,对这样的人无犯。但如果时不时恢复认知、知道自己在做什么还去做,那就有犯。巴利
Khittacitto nāma vissaṭṭhacitto yakkhummattako vuccati. Yakkhā kira bheravāni vā ārammaṇāni dassetvā mukhena hatthaṃ pavesetvā hadayarūpaṃ vā maddantā satte vikkhittacitte vipallatthasaññe karonti. Evarūpassa khittacittassa anāpatti. Tesaṃ pana ubhinnaṃ ayaṃ viseso – pittummattako niccameva ummattako hoti, pakatisaññaṃ na labhati. Yakkhummattako antarantarā pakatisaññaṃ paṭilabhatīti. Idha pana pittummattako vā hotu yakkhummattako vā, yo sabbaso muṭṭhassati kiñci na jānāti, aggimpi suvaṇṇampi gūthampi candanampi ekasadisaṃ maddantova vicarati, evarūpassa anāpatti. Antarantarā saññaṃ paṭilabhitvā ñatvā karontassa pana āpattiyeva.
所谓“受痛苦逼迫者”,是指被极强烈的苦受折磨,以至于什么都不知道的人。对这样的人,无犯。巴利
Vedanāṭṭo nāma yo adhimattāya dukkhavedanāya āturo kiñci na jānāti, evarūpassa anāpatti.
所谓“最初造作者”,是指在每一种行为中最先做的那个人。但在这里,苏定长老就是最初造作者,所以他没有犯戒。其余的人,比如犯母猴戒的比丘、瓦吉之子比丘等人,则确实有犯。巴利
Ādikammiko nāma yo tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kamme ādibhūto. Idha pana sudinnatthero ādikammiko, tassa anāpatti. Avasesānaṃ makkaṭīsamaṇavajjiputtakādīnaṃ āpattiyevāti.
不过,在这个学处里,为了精通它,应当了解这些杂项内容:巴利
Imasmiṃ pana sikkhāpade kosallatthaṃ idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃveditabbaṃ –
“ 生起与唯作,还有想与有心;
世所非难、业,以及善与受。”巴利
‘‘Samuṭṭhānañca kiriyā, atho saññā sacittakaṃ; Lokavajjañca kammañca, kusalaṃ vedanāya cā’’ti.
在这里,“生起”是指从总摄一切的角度说的六种学处生起。这些会在《附随》中说明。简略地说,所谓学处——有六种生起,有四种生起,有三种生起,有咖提那生起,有羊毛生起,有弃舍责任等生起。巴利
Tattha ‘‘samuṭṭhāna’’nti sabbasaṅgāhakavasena cha sikkhāpadasamuṭṭhānāni. Tāni parivāre āvi bhavissanti. Samāsato pana sikkhāpadaṃ nāma – atthi chasamuṭṭhānaṃ, atthi catusamuṭṭhānaṃ, atthi tisamuṭṭhānaṃ, atthi kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ, atthi eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ, atthi dhuranikkhepādisamuṭṭhānanti.
在这里,有些是依造作而生起,有些是依非造作而生起,有些是依造作与非造作而生起;有些则可能依造作而生起,也可能依非造作而生起;有些则可能依造作而生起,也可能依造作与非造作而生起。巴利
Tatrāpi kiñci kiriyato samuṭṭhāti, kiñci akiriyato samuṭṭhāti, kiñci kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhāti, kiñci siyā kiriyato, siyā akiriyato samuṭṭhāti, kiñci siyā kiriyato siyā kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhāti.
在这里也有想解脱,也有非想解脱。其中,凡是能获得心支的,就是想解脱;另一种则是非想解脱。巴利
Tatrāpi atthi saññāvimokkhaṃ, atthi nosaññāvimokkhaṃ. Tattha yaṃ cittaṅgaṃ labhatiyeva, taṃ saññāvimokkhaṃ; itaraṃ nosaññāvimokkhaṃ.
另外,有些是有心的,有些是无心的。凡是与心一起生起的,就是有心的;凡是不依靠心也能生起的,就是无心的。这一切又分为两种:世间罪和施设罪。它们的特征前面已经说过了。巴利
Puna atthi sacittakaṃ, atthi acittakaṃ. Yaṃ saheva cittena āpajjati, taṃ sacittakaṃ; yaṃ vināpi cittena āpajjati, taṃ acittakaṃ . Taṃ sabbampi lokavajjaṃ paṇṇattivajjanti duvidhaṃ. Tesaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ vuttameva.
从业、善和受的角度来看,这里也有学处属于身业,也有属于语业的。其中应当知道:通过身门犯的,是身业;通过语门犯的,是语业。还有些学处是善的,有些是不善的,有些是无记的。能生起犯戒的心一共有三十二种——八种欲界善心、十二种不善心、十种欲界唯作心,以及属于善和唯作的两种神通心。其中,以善心犯的,就是善;以其余那些心犯的,就是其余。还有些学处具备三种受,有些具备两种受,有些具备一种受。其中,犯戒时带着三种受中某一种受而犯的,是具备三种受;犯戒时带着乐受或舍受而犯的,是具备两种受;犯戒时只带着苦受而犯的,应当知道是具备一种受。就是这样。巴利
Kammakusalavedanāvasenāpi cettha atthi sikkhāpadaṃ kāyakammaṃ, atthi vacīkammaṃ. Tattha yaṃ kāyadvārikaṃ, taṃ kāyakammaṃ; yaṃ vacīdvārikaṃ, taṃ vacīkammanti veditabbaṃ. Atthi pana sikkhāpadaṃ kusalaṃ, atthi akusalaṃ, atthi abyākataṃ. Dvattiṃseva hi āpattisamauṭṭhāpakacittāni – aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalāni, dvādasa akusalāni, dasa kāmāvacarakiriyacittāni, kusalato ca kiriyato ca dve abhiññācittānīti. Tesu yaṃ kusalacittena āpajjati, taṃ kusalaṃ; itarehi itaraṃ. Atthi ca sikkhāpadaṃ tivedanaṃ, atthi dvivedanaṃ, atthi ekavedanaṃ. Tattha yaṃ āpajjanto tīsu vedanāsu aññataravedanāsamaṅgī hutvā āpajjati, taṃ tivedanaṃ; yaṃ āpajjanto sukhasamaṅgī vā upekkhāsamaṅgī vā āpajjati, taṃ dvivedanaṃ; yaṃ āpajjanto dukkhavedanāsamaṅgīyeva āpajjati, taṃ ekavedananti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ –
“ 生起与唯作,还有想与有心;
世间罪与业,以及受之善。”巴利
‘‘Samuṭṭhānañca kiriyā, atho saññā sacittakaṃ; Lokavajjañca kammañca, kusalaṃ vedanāya cā’’ti.
了解了这些杂项之后,关于它们的生起等各方面,这条学处从生起来说是一种生起;从支分来说则是两种生起,由身和心而生起。它也是作业生起,因为只有在正在造作的时候才犯这条戒。由于没有与淫欲相应的欲想而得以脱离,所以是想解脱。“不知者、不许可者无犯”——这是已经说过的。只有以淫欲心才犯它,不是离开心而犯,所以是有心。只有由贪欲才应当犯,所以是世间罪。只从身门生起,所以是身业。不过在这里心只是支分,不能依据心而成立业性。由贪心而应当犯,所以是不善心。犯它的时候或者具备乐受,或者具备舍受,因此应当知道是两种受。这一切在犯戒中都适用。然而依照学处的标题,一切注释书中的解说都已载入,所以才这样说。巴利
Imaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ viditvā tesu samuṭṭhānādīsu idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samuṭṭhānato ekasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Aṅgavasena dukasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kāyacittato samuṭṭhāti. Kiriyasamuṭṭhānañca karontoyeva hi etaṃ āpajjati. Methunapaṭisaṃyuttāya kāmasaññāya abhāvena muccanato saññāvimokkhaṃ. ‘‘Anāpatti ajānantassa asādiyantassā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Methunacitteneva naṃ āpajjati, na vinā cittenāti sacittakaṃ. Rāgavaseneva āpajjitabbato lokavajjaṃ. Kāyadvāreneva samuṭṭhānato kāyakammaṃ. Cittaṃ panettha aṅgamattaṃ hoti, na tassa vasena kammabhāvo labbhati. Lobhacittena āpajjitabbato akusalacittaṃ. Sukhasamaṅgī vā upekkhāsamaṅgī vā taṃ āpajjatīti dvivedananti veditabbaṃ. Sabbañcetaṃ āpattiyaṃ yujjati. Sikkhāpadasīsena pana sabbaaṭṭhakathāsudesanā ārūḷhā, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ.
制伏事注释巴利
Vinītavatthuvaṇṇanā
“猴子、瓦吉之子……中间省略……老年出家者、鹿”——这是什么?这些是世尊亲自裁断的各个制伏事的摄颂。那些制伏事,是结集法的长老们为了让持律者容易学习而安立的。而事偈,则是优波离长老在佛陀还在世时就立下的,目的是让未来的持律者依据这个特征在律中作出裁断。所以在这里,应当好好把握所说的特征,据此裁断第一学处。第二学处等,则依据制伏事中所说的特征来裁断。因为制伏事对持律者来说,就像工匠的遮覆模型那样,是隐藏的样板。巴利
Makkaṭīvajjiputtā ca…pe… vuḍḍhapabbajito migoti idaṃ kiṃ? Imā vinītavatthūnaṃ bhagavatā sayaṃ vinicchitānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ vatthūnaṃ uddānagāthā nāma. Tāni vatthūni ‘‘sukhaṃ vinayadharā uggaṇhissantī’’ti dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi ṭhapitāni. Vatthugāthā pana dharamāneyeva bhagavati upālittherena ṭhapitā ‘‘iminā lakkhaṇena āyatiṃ vinayadharā vinayaṃ vinicchinissantī’’ti. Tasmā ettha vuttalakkhaṇaṃ sādhukaṃ sallakkhetvā paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ vinicchinitabbaṃ. Dutiyādīnañca vinītavatthūsu vuttalakkhaṇena dutiyādīni. Vinītavatthūni hi sippikānaṃ paṭicchannakarūpāni viya vinayadharānaṃ paṭicchannakavatthūni hontīti.
67 67. 其中,前两件事的含义在“随制”部分已经说过。第三件事中,“以在家相”是指以在家人的样子,穿着白衣。第四件事没有什么可说的。从这之后的七件事中,“茅衣”是用茅草编结而成的衣。“树皮衣”是指苦行者的树皮衣。“木板衣”是把木板缝成衣的形状做成的衣。“发毯”是用头发搓成线织成的毯。“尾毛毯”是用牦牛尾毛织成的毯。“枭羽衣”是用猫头鹰的羽毛做成的下衣。“兽皮”是带毛带蹄的鹿皮。第十二件事中,“贪染”是指以身相触而产生的贪爱,并因此染着;佛陀知道那贪染后,说:“犯桑喀地谢思。”巴利
67. Tattha purimāni dve vatthūni anupaññattiyaṃyeva vuttatthāni. Tatiye vatthumhi gihiliṅgenāti gihivesena odātavattho hutvā. Catutthe natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ. Tato paresu sattasu vatthūsu kusacīranti kuse ganthetvā katacīraṃ. Vākacīraṃ nāma tāpasānaṃ vakkalaṃ. Phalakacīraṃ nāma phalakasaṇṭhānāni phalakāni sibbitvā katacīraṃ. Kesakambaloti kesehi tante vāyitvā katakambalo. Vālakambaloti camaravālehi vāyitvā katakambalo. Ulūkapakkhikanti ulūkasakuṇassa pakkhehi katanivāsanaṃ. Ajinakkhipanti salomaṃ sakhuraṃ ajinamigacammaṃ. Dvādasame vatthumhi sārattoti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena sāratto; taṃ rāgaṃ ñatvā bhagavā ‘‘āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti āha.
68 第十三事中,“莲华色”是指那位长老尼,她是舍卫城一位富豪的女儿,在十万劫前就已圆满誓愿。她天生肤色极其好看,呈青莲华色,而内在因为没有烦恼热恼,所以更加光彩照人。她就是因为那肤色的美妙,得到了“莲华色”这个名字。“心被系缚”是指从在家时起就心生爱染;据说他是她的亲戚童子。“那时”是一个表示紧接着的接续词,意思是就在她坐在床榻上之后立刻。因为白天从外面回来、关上门坐下的人,起初会有一片黑暗。他就在那片黑暗还没有从她那里消失的时候,做了这件事,这就是其含义。“玷污”就是侵犯。然而长老尼并无过失,她提起自己的沙门想,不怀悦纳地坐着,对于以非正法意图的触碰,就像一堆火、一根石柱、一段坚硬的木桩。他满足了自己的欲愿后离去。就在他离开那位长老尼视线范围的时候,这大地虽然能承载须弥山,却仿佛无法承受那个恶人仅一臂长的身躯,裂开而现出缝隙。他刹那之间便成了无间地狱火焰的薪柴。世尊听闻此事后说:“诸比丘,不怀悦纳者无罪”,并针对长老尼在《法句经》中说了这首偈——巴利
68. Terasame vatthumhi uppalavaṇṇāti sā therī sāvatthiyaṃ seṭṭhidhītā satasahassakappe abhinīhārasampannā. Tassā pakatiyāpi atidassanīyā nīluppalavaṇṇā kāyacchavi, abbhantare pana kilesasantāpassa abhāvena ativiya virocati. Sā tāyeva vaṇṇapokkharatāya ‘‘uppalavaṇṇā’’ti nāmaṃ labhi. Paṭibaddhacittoti gihikālato paṭṭhāya rattacitto; so kira tassā ñātidārako hoti. Atha khoti anantaratthe nipāto; mañcake nisinnānantaramevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Divā bāhirato āgantvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nisinnānañhi paṭhamaṃ andhakāraṃ hoti. So yāvassā taṃ andhakāraṃ na nassati, tāvadeva evamakāsīti attho. Dūsesīti padhaṃsesi. Therī pana anavajjā attano samaṇasaññaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā asādiyantī nisīdi asaddhammādhippāyena parāmaṭṭhā aggikkhandha-silāthambha-khadirasārakhāṇukā viya. Sopi attano manorathaṃ pūretvā gato. Tassā theriyā dassanapathaṃ vijahantasseva ayaṃ mahāpathavī sinerupabbataṃ dhāretuṃ samatthāpi taṃ pāpapurisaṃ byāmamattakaḷevaraṃ dhāretuṃ asakkontī viya bhijjitvā vivaramadāsi. So taṅkhaṇaññeva avīcijālānaṃ indhanabhāvaṃ agamāsi. Bhagavā taṃ sutvā ‘‘anāpatti, bhikkhave, asādiyantiyā’’ti vatvā theriṃ sandhāya dhammapade imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi –
“ 如水珠不沾莲叶,如芥子不沾锥尖;
对诸欲不沾染的人,我称他为婆罗门。”巴利
‘‘Vāri pokkharapatteva, āraggeriva sāsapo; Yo na limpati kāmesu, tamahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇa’’nti. (dha. pa. 401);
69 在第十四个事例中,“女性相显现”的意思是:有人在夜里入睡时,原本的男性身形——胡须、牙齿等一切特征——全都消失,女性身形随之出现。所谓“同一位戒师、同一次达上”,是说:我允许他仍以先前所受的戒师为戒师,仍以先前所受的达上为达上。不必再另请戒师,也不必再受一次达上,这就是这段话的意思。所谓“同样的戒腊”,是说:从比丘受达上那时起,一直到计算戒腊为止,我允许就以那个戒腊计算。不必从这时起重新计算戒腊,这就是这段话的意思。所谓“与比丘尼共处”,是说:我允许他与比丘尼们交往、共住、相伴,这就是这段话的意思。这里要表达的是:她已经不适合住在比丘众中间了,应当前往比丘尼的住处,和比丘尼们一起住。所谓“那些比丘与比丘尼共通的犯行”,是指那些需要对人说罪或需要出罪的犯行,是比丘和比丘尼共通的。对于这些犯行,“应在比丘尼面前出罪”,意思是:对所有这些犯行,都应先由比丘尼们作完律仪程序,然后我允许她在比丘尼面前出罪。所谓“于那些犯行无犯”,是指那些比丘与比丘尼不共通的犯行,比如故意出精之类,对这些犯行无犯。因为性别转变,那些犯行就已经出罪了。即使后来原本的性别再次出现,他对那些犯行仍然是无犯的。以上是这里依律文所作的判定。巴利
69. Cuddasame vatthumhi itthiliṅgaṃ pātubhūtanti rattibhāge niddaṃ okkantassa purisasaṇṭhānaṃ massudāṭhikādi sabbaṃ antarahitaṃ itthisaṇṭhānaṃ uppannaṃ. Tameva upajjhaṃ tameva upasampadanti pubbe gahitaupajjhāyameva pubbe kataupasampadameva anujānāmi. Puna upajjhā na gahetabbā; upasampadā na kātabbāti attho. Tāniyevavassānīti bhikkhuupasampadato pabhuti yāva vassagaṇanā, taṃyeva vassagaṇanaṃ anujānāmi. Na ito paṭṭhāya vassagaṇanā kātabbāti attho. Bhikkhunīhi saṅgamitunti bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ saṅgamituṃ saṅgantuṃ samaṅgī bhavituṃ anujānāmīti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – appatirūpaṃ dānissā bhikkhūnaṃ majjhe vasituṃ, bhikkhunupassayaṃ gantvā bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ vasatūti. Yā āpattiyo bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīhi sādhāraṇāti yā desanāgāminiyo vā vuṭṭhānagāminiyo vā āpattiyo bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ sādhāraṇā. Tā āpattiyo bhikkhunīnaṃ santike vuṭṭhātunti tā sabbāpi bhikkhunīhi kātabbaṃ vinayakammaṃ katvā bhikkhunīnaṃ santike vuṭṭhātuṃ anujānāmīti attho. Tāhi āpattīhi anāpattīti yā pana bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇā sukkavissaṭṭhi-ādikā āpattiyo, tāhi anāpatti. Liṅgaparivattanena tā āpattiyo vuṭṭhitāva honti. Puna pakatiliṅge uppannepi tāhi āpattīhi tassa anāpattiyevāti ayaṃ tāvettha pāḷivinicchayo.
不过,这是律文之外对性别转变的判定:在这两种性别特征当中,男性特征更胜,女性特征较劣。因此,男性特征会被强力的不善业所灭除,女性特征则会因微弱的善业而留存。而女性特征消失时,是被微弱的不善业所灭除;男性特征留存时,则是因强力的善业而留存。如此,两者都因不善业而消失,因善业而获得。巴利
Ayaṃ pana pāḷimutto okkantikavinicchayo – imesu tāva dvīsu liṅgesu purisaliṅgaṃ uttamaṃ, itthiliṅgaṃ hīnaṃ; tasmā purisaliṅgaṃ balavaakusalena antaradhāyati. Itthiliṅgaṃ dubbalakusalena patiṭṭhāti. Itthiliṅgaṃ pana antaradhāyantaṃ dubbalaakusalena antaradhāyati. Purisaliṅgaṃ balavakusalena patiṭṭhāti. Evaṃ ubhayampi akusalena antaradhāyati, kusalena paṭilabbhati.
在这种情况下,如果两位比丘一起诵经或讨论法义,然后在同一个房间里躺下入睡,其中一人出现了女性特征,那么两人都犯共宿罪。如果他醒来后看到自己发生了这种变化,心里痛苦、郁闷,就在夜里告诉另一位比丘,另一位应当安慰他说:“算了,别担心。这是轮回的过患。正自觉者已经开了门,不管是比丘还是比丘尼,法门没有关闭,通往天界的路没有障碍。”安慰之后,应当这样对他说:“你应该去比丘尼住处。你有没有认识的比丘尼?”如果他有这样的比丘尼,就说有;如果没有,就说没有。然后应当对那位比丘说:“请你照顾我;现在先带我去比丘尼住处。”那位比丘应当带上他,去他所认识的比丘尼那里,或者去自己认识的比丘尼那里。去的时候不应该一个人去,要和四五位比丘一起,带上火把和手杖,把原先的安排处理好,说“我们去某个地方”,然后出发。如果寺院在村外很远的地方,途中因为经过别的村子、渡河、夜间离开住处、脱离僧团等,都不算犯戒。到了比丘尼住处后,应当对那些比丘尼说:“你们认识某位比丘吗?”她们说:“认识,尊者。”就说:“他出现了女性特征,请你们照顾他。”如果她们说:“萨度,尊者,现在我们也诵经、听法,你们回去吧。”然后给予照顾,而且她们是令人满意、善于照顾、有惭耻心的,那就不能惹恼她们再到别处去。如果去了,就摆脱不了经过别的村子、渡河、夜间离开住处、脱离僧团等罪。但如果她们虽然有惭耻心,却不善于照顾,那就可以到别处去。即使她们没有惭耻心,但愿意照顾,也可以舍弃她们到别处去。如果她们既有惭耻心又善于照顾,但不是亲戚,而在附近的村子里另有亲戚能照顾他,据说也可以去她们那里。去了之后,如果他在比丘身份时是依止而住的,就应该在合适的比丘尼面前重新受依止。如果论母或律已经学得很熟、学得很好,就没有再学的理由。如果他在比丘身份时是僧团中的常随众,那就在她面前已受具足戒、善受具足戒。否则应当在别人面前受依止。以前依止那位而住的人,也应当在别人面前受依止。即使是已满戒腊的沙弥,也应当在别人面前重新受戒和尚。巴利
Tattha sace dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ekato sajjhāyaṃ vā dhammasākacchaṃ vā katvā ekāgāre nipajjitvā niddaṃ okkantānaṃ ekassa itthiliṅgaṃ pātubhavati, ubhinnampi sahaseyyāpatti hoti. So ce paṭibujjhitvā attano taṃ vippakāraṃ disvā dukkhī dummano rattibhāgeyeva itarassa āroceyya, tena samassāsetabbo – ‘‘hotu, mā cintayittha. Vaṭṭasseveso doso. Sammāsambuddhena dvāraṃ dinnaṃ, bhikkhu vā hotu bhikkhunī vā, anāvaṭo dhammo avārito saggamaggo’’ti. Samassāsetvā ca evaṃ vattabbaṃ – ‘‘tumhehi bhikkhunupassayaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Atthi vo kāci sandiṭṭhā bhikkhuniyo’’ti. Sacassā honti tādisā bhikkhuniyo atthīti, no ce honti natthīti vatvā so bhikkhu vattabbo – ‘‘mama saṅgahaṃ karotha; idāni maṃ paṭhamaṃ bhikkhunupassayaṃ nethā’’ti. Tena bhikkhunā taṃ gahetvā tassā vā sandiṭṭhānaṃ attano vā sandiṭṭhānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ santikaṃ gantabbaṃ. Gacchantena ca na ekakena gantabbaṃ. Catūhi pañcahi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ jotikañca kattaradaṇḍañca gahetvā saṃvidahanaṃ parimocetvā ‘‘mayaṃ asukaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ gacchāmā’’ti gantabbaṃ. Sace bahigāme dūre vihāro hoti, antarāmagge gāmantara-nadīpāra-rattivippavāsa-gaṇaohīyanāpattīhi anāpatti. Bhikkhunupassayaṃ gantvā tā bhikkhuniyo vattabbā – ‘‘asukaṃ nāma bhikkhuṃ jānāthā’’ti? ‘‘Āma, ayyā’’ti. ‘‘Tassa itthiliṅgaṃ pātubhūtaṃ, saṅgahaṃ dānissa karothā’’ti. Tā ce ‘‘sādhu, ayyā, idāni mayampi sajjhāyissāma, dhammaṃ sossāma, gacchatha tumhe’’ti vatvā saṅgahaṃ karonti, ārādhikā ca honti saṅgāhikā lajjiniyo, tā kopetvā aññattha na gantabbaṃ. Gacchati ce, gāmantara-nadīpāra-rattivippavāsa-gaṇaohīyanāpattīhi na muccati. Sace pana lajjiniyo honti, na saṅgāhikāyo; aññattha gantuṃ labbhati. Sacepi alajjiniyo honti, saṅgahaṃ pana karonti; tāpi pariccajitvā aññattha gantuṃ labbhati. Sace lajjiniyo ca saṅgāhikā ca, ñātikā na honti, āsannagāme pana aññā ñātikāyo honti paṭijagganikā, tāsampi santikaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Gantvā sace bhikkhubhāvepi nissayapaṭipanno, patirūpāya bhikkhuniyā santike nissayo gahetabbo. Mātikā vā vinayo vā uggahito suggahito, puna uggaṇhanakāraṇaṃ natthi. Sace bhikkhubhāve parisāvacaro, tassa santikeyeva upasampannā sūpasampannā. Aññassa santike nissayo gahetabbo. Pubbe taṃ nissāya vasantehipi aññassa santikeyeva nissayo gahetabbo. Paripuṇṇavassasāmaṇerenāpi aññassa santikeyeva upajjhā gahetabbā.
他在比丘身份时所决意的三衣和钵,那些决意就失效了,需要重新决意。覆肩衣和浴衣应当受持。如果有多余的衣或多出来的钵,经过戒律程序处理后存放着,那些戒律程序全部失效,需要重新办理。已受持的油、蜂蜜、糖浆等,受持也失效了。如果在受持后的第七天性别特征发生转变,重新受持后七天内仍然可以使用。不过,在比丘时期受持的属于别的比丘的东西,那个受持不失效。两人共有而没有分配存放的,由保持原状的人保管。已经分配、专属于这个人的,那个受持就失效了。这在《附随》中也有说到——巴利
Yaṃ panassa bhikkhubhāve adhiṭṭhitaṃ ticīvarañca patto ca, taṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ vijahati, puna adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Saṅkaccikā ca udakasāṭikā ca gahetabbā. Yaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ vā atirekapatto vā vinayakammaṃ katvā ṭhapito hoti, taṃ sabbampi vinayakammaṃ vijahati, puna kātabbaṃ. Paṭiggahitatelamadhuphāṇitādīnipi paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahanti. Sace paṭiggahaṇato sattame divase liṅgaṃ parivattati, puna paṭiggahetvā sattāhaṃ vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pana bhikkhukāle aññassa bhikkhuno santakaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ, taṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahati. Yaṃ ubhinnaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ avibhajitvā ṭhapitaṃ, taṃ pakatatto rakkhati. Yaṃ pana vibhattaṃ etasseva santakaṃ, taṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati. Vuttampi cetaṃ parivāre –
“ 油、蜂蜜、糖浆,还有酥油;
自己接过来之后,就先放好;
在七日未过之时;
若有因缘而受用时,就犯戒。
这些问题是由善巧者们思考出来的。”巴利
‘‘Telaṃ madhuṃ phāṇitañcāpi sappiṃ; Sāmaṃ gahetvāna nikkhipeyya; Avītivatte sattāhe; Sati paccaye paribhuñjantassa āpatti; Pañhā mesā kusalehi cintitā’’ti. (pari. 480);
这段话是针对性别特征转变的情况而说的。所谓“受持”,会因为性别特征转变、死亡、舍戒、还俗、把物品给予未受具足戒的人、无所顾惜地舍弃、以及被强行夺走而失效。所以,即使只是受持了一小块诃子放在那里,她所有的受持也都失效了。但在比丘的住处,凡是属于她的东西,不管已经受持还是没受持而放在那里,全都归她所有,可以让人拿来使用。不过其中属于她的固定物品,比如住所或楼阁,她想给谁就可以给谁。在十三种僧团许可中,凡是她在还是比丘时得到的许可,全部失效。先前分得的住所也失效。如果在后来分得住所时性别特征发生转变,比丘尼僧团想把她得到的利养给她,应当先征得同意再给。如果比丘尼因为共通的覆藏罪正在接受别住时性别特征发生转变,只应给她半月敬悦。如果在正行敬悦时发生转变,也只应再给她半月敬悦。如果在敬悦已经行完之后发生转变,应由比丘尼僧团为她作出罪甘马。如果恶作果报已尽、正在行半月敬悦时性别特征再次发生转变,只应给她六夜敬悦。如果在半月敬悦已经行完之后发生转变,则应由比丘僧团为她作出罪甘马。巴利
Idañhi liṅgaparivattanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Paṭiggahaṇaṃ nāma liṅgaparivattanena, kālaṃkiriyāya, sikkhāpaccakkhānena, hīnāyāvattanena, anupasampannassa dānena, anapekkhavissajjanena, acchinditvā gahaṇena ca vijahati. Tasmā sacepi harītakakhaṇḍampi paṭiggahetvā ṭhapitamatthi, sabbamassa paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati. Bhikkhuvihāre pana yaṃkiñcissā santakaṃ paṭiggahetvā vā appaṭiggahetvā vā ṭhapitaṃ, sabbassa sāva issarā, āharāpetvā gahetabbaṃ. Yaṃ panettha thāvaraṃ tassā santakaṃ senāsanaṃ vā uparopakā vā, te yassicchati tassa dātabbā. Terasasu sammutīsu yā bhikkhukāle laddhā sammuti, sabbā sā paṭippassambhati. Purimikāya senāsanaggāho paṭippassambhati. Sace pacchimikāya senāsane gahite liṅgaṃ parivattati, bhikkhunisaṅgho cassā uppannaṃ lābhaṃ dātukāmo hoti, apaloketvā dātabbo. Sace bhikkhunīhi sādhāraṇāya paṭicchannāya āpattiyā parivasantassa liṅgaṃ parivattati, pakkhamānattameva dātabbaṃ. Sace mānattaṃ carantassa parivattati, puna pakkhamānattameva dātabbaṃ. Sace ciṇṇamānattassa parivattati, bhikkhunīhi abbhānakammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sace akusalavipāke parikkhīṇe pakkhamānattakāle punadeva liṅgaṃ parivattati, chārattaṃ mānattameva dātabbaṃ. Sace ciṇṇe pakkhamānatte parivattati, bhikkhūhi abbhānakammaṃ kātabbanti.
在紧接着的比丘尼变性事例中,一切判定都应依照这里所说的方法来了知。不过,这里有一个差别:即使她是在比丘尼期间犯了作媒罪,而且这罪是覆藏的,也不给别住,只应给六夜敬悦。如果她在行半月敬悦时变性,这不算障碍,仍然只应给六夜敬悦。如果她在敬悦已经行完之后变性,比丘们不必再给敬悦,直接为她出罪。如果比丘们还没给敬悦,她又变性了,那就应由比丘尼们只给半月敬悦。如果她在行六夜敬悦时又变性,也只应给半月敬悦。如果她在敬悦已行完之后发生变性,应由比丘尼作出罪甘马。如果再次变性,即使她仍安住在比丘尼身份中,那些先前已经止息的罪,仍然是妥善止息的。巴利
Anantare bhikkhuniyā liṅgaparivattanavatthumhi idha vuttanayeneva sabbo vinicchayo veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – sacepi bhikkhunikāle āpannā sañcarittāpatti paṭicchannā hoti, parivāsadānaṃ natthi, chārattaṃ mānattameva dātabbaṃ. Sace pakkhamānattaṃ carantiyā liṅgaṃ parivattati, na tenattho, chārattaṃ mānattameva dātabbaṃ. Sace ciṇṇamānattāya parivattati, puna mānattaṃ adatvā bhikkhūhi abbhetabbo. Atha bhikkhūhi mānatte adinne puna liṅgaṃ parivattati, bhikkhunīhi pakkhamānattameva dātabbaṃ. Atha chārattaṃ mānattaṃ carantassa puna parivattati, pakkhamānattameva dātabbaṃ. Ciṇṇamānattassa pana liṅgaparivatte jāte bhikkhunīhi abbhānakammaṃ kātabbaṃ . Puna parivatte ca liṅge bhikkhunibhāve ṭhitāyapi yā āpattiyo pubbe paṭippassaddhā, tā suppaṭippassaddhā evāti.
70 从这以下,“与母亲行淫法”等四件事,其含义本身就很清楚。巴利
70. Ito parāni ‘‘mātuyā methunaṃ dhamma’’ntiādīni cattāri vatthūni uttānatthāniyeva.
71 71. 在“软背”这件事里,据说那位比丘以前是跳舞的。他为了练熟技艺而反复练习,所以背变得柔软。因此他不能那样做。巴利
71. Mudupiṭṭhikavatthumhi so kira bhikkhu naṭapubbako. Tassa sippakosallatthaṃ parikammakatā piṭṭhi mudukā ahosi. Tasmā evaṃ kātuṃ asakkhi.
在“垂者”这件事里,那位比丘的男根很长,往下垂,因此被称为“垂者”。巴利
Lambīvatthumhi tassa bhikkhussa aṅgajātaṃ dīghaṃ hoti lambati, tasmā lambīti vutto.
从这里往下,两个“伤口事”本身就很清楚了。在“彩画事”里,所谓“彩画”,就是指彩绘的图像。巴利
Ito parāni dve vaṇavatthūni uttānāneva. Lepacittavatthumhi lepacittaṃ nāma cittakammarūpaṃ.
在“木偶事”里,所谓“木偶”,就是木制的人像。就像在这两件事里一样,在其他诸如象牙像、布像、铜像等没有执受的女性像上,以淫欲心对密处行事,不管精液有没有泄出,都只是恶作。以身相触的贪欲心行事,也同样只是恶作。但如果是以泄精的贪欲心行事,泄了精就犯桑喀地谢思,没泄精就犯重罪。巴利
Dārudhītalikavatthumhi dārudhītalikā nāma kaṭṭharūpaṃ. Yathā ca imesu dvīsu evaṃ aññesupi dantarūpa-potthakarūpa-loharūpādīsu anupādinnakesu itthirūpesu nimitte methunarāgena upakkamantassa asuci muccatu vā mā vā, dukkaṭameva. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena upakkamantassāpi tatheva dukkaṭaṃ. Mocanarāgena pana upakkamantassa mutte saṅghādiseso, amutte thullaccayanti.
72 72. 在孙达拉这件事里,这个叫孙达拉的人是王舍城一户良家子弟,因为信心而出家;他因为相貌端正,得到了“孙达拉”这个名字。有个女人看见他在街上走,生起了爱欲,就对他做出这种种非礼的举动。但那位长老是不来,所以他没有接受。这种事对其他人来说,则不是他们能做到的。巴利
72. Sundaravatthumhi ayaṃ sundaro nāma rājagahe kuladārako saddhāya pabbajito; attabhāvassa abhirūpatāya ‘‘sundaro’’ti nāmaṃ labhi. Taṃ rathikāya gacchantaṃ disvā samuppannachandarāgā sā itthī imaṃ vippakāraṃ akāsi. Thero pana anāgāmī. Tasmā so na sādiyi. Aññesaṃ pana avisayo eso.
从这以下的四种事例中,那些比丘愚钝无智,听信了女人的话,照那样做了之后,后来心生悔恨。巴利
Ito paresu catūsu vatthūsu te bhikkhū jaḷā dummedhā mātugāmassa vacanaṃ gahetvā tathā katvā pacchā kukkuccāyiṃsu.
73 73. “所宣说”等三事本身含义清楚。关于两种断头的情况,判定如下:在张开的圆口中,把男根放进去时,如果碰到下方、上方或两侧任何一侧,就是巴拉基格。即使不碰四个侧面,放进去后在内部碰到上颚,也还是巴拉基格。如果不碰四个侧面和上颚,只是悬在空处放进去又拿出来,就是恶作。但如果牙齿紧紧闭合,口中没有空隙,而且牙齿外面被嘴唇的肉盖住,那么在那种不被风吹到的湿润处,即使只放进像芝麻果那么一点,也还是巴拉基格。如果嘴唇的肉被割掉,只在牙齿上动作,就是土喇咤亚。如果牙齿向外突出,无法用嘴唇盖住,在那里动作,或者用伸到外面的舌头动作,也只是土喇咤亚。对活人的身体,用伸到外面的舌头动作,也只是土喇咤亚。但如果用外面的舌头卷住后放进嘴里,就是巴拉基格。对于脖子以上被砍断的头,从下方把男根放进去并碰到上颚,也是巴拉基格。巴利
73. Akkhāyitādīni tīṇi vatthūni uttānatthāneva. Dvīsu chinnasīsavatthūsu ayaṃ vinicchayo – vaṭṭakate mukhe vivaṭe aṅgajātaṃ pavesento sace heṭṭhā vā upari vā ubhayapassehi vā chupantaṃ paveseti, pārājikaṃ. Catūhipi passehi achupantaṃ pavesetvā abbhantare tālukaṃ chupati, pārājikameva. Cattāri passāni tālukañca achupanto ākāsagatameva katvā paveseti ca nīharati ca, dukkaṭaṃ. Yadi pana dantā suphusitā, antomukhe okāso natthi, dantā ca bahi oṭṭhamaṃsena paṭicchannā, tattha vātena asamphuṭṭhaṃ allokāsaṃ tilaphalamattampi pavesentassa pārājikameva. Uppāṭite pana oṭṭhamaṃse dantesuyeva upakkamantassa thullaccayaṃ. Yopi danto bahi nikkhamitvā tiṭṭhati , na sakkā oṭṭhehi pidahituṃ. Tattha upakkamantepi bahi nikkhantajivhāya upakkamantepi thullaccayameva. Jīvamānakasarīrepi bahi nikkhantajivhāya thullaccayameva. Yadi pana bahijivhāya paliveṭhetvā antomukhaṃ paveseti, pārājikameva. Uparigīvāya chinnasīsassapi adhobhāgena aṅgajātaṃ pavesetvā tālukaṃ chupantassa pārājikameva.
在骨堆这件事上,即使只是前往坟场,也犯恶作。收集骨头也一样;以淫欲心对准女根部位而行动,以及以身触淫欲心而行动,不论泄不泄出,都只是恶作。但如果是以泄欲心而行动,泄出了就犯桑喀地谢思,没泄出就只是粗罪。巴利
Aṭṭhikavatthumhi susānaṃ gacchantassāpi dukkaṭaṃ. Aṭṭhikāni saṅkaḍḍhantassāpi, nimitte methunarāgena upakkamantassāpi, kāyasaṃsaggarāgena upakkamantassāpi, muccatu vā mā vā, dukkaṭameva. Mocanarāgena pana upakkamantassa muccante saṅghādiseso, amuccante thullaccayameva.
在雌龙这件事里,不管是雌龙少女,还是紧那罗女等其他任何一种,在所有情况下都犯巴拉基格。巴利
Nāgīvatthumhi nāgamāṇavikā vā hotu kinnarīādīnaṃ vā aññatarā, sabbattha pārājikaṃ.
在夜叉女的故事中,所有的天神也都是夜叉女。巴利
Yakkhīvatthumhi sabbāpi devatā yakkhīyeva.
在《饿鬼事》里,那些被焦渴等苦折磨的雌饿鬼,根本没法靠近人。不过也有住在宫殿里的雌饿鬼:她们在黑分月时恶业成熟受报,到了白分月就像天神一样享受福乐。对这样的雌饿鬼或雌夜叉,如果出现被看见、被抓住、被抚摸、被触碰、被碰触的情况,就犯巴拉基格。即使没被看见,但出现了其他几种情况,也还是犯巴拉基格。如果没被看见、没被抓住,只是被抚摸、触碰、碰触,让那个人失去知觉,满足了自己的欲望就走了,这叫作“非境界”。所以在这种非境界的情况下不犯戒。黄门的事已经很清楚了。巴利
Petīvatthumhi nijjhāmataṇhikādipetiyo allīyitumpi na sakkā. Vimānapetiyo pana atthi; yāsaṃ kāḷapakkhe akusalaṃ vipaccati, juṇhapakkhe devatā viya sampattiṃ anubhonti. Evarūpāya petiyā vā yakkhiyā vā sace dassana-gahaṇa-āmasana-phusana-ghaṭṭanāni paññāyanti, pārājikaṃ. Athāpi dassanaṃ natthi, itarāni paññāyanti, pārājikameva. Atha dassanagahaṇāni na paññāyanti, āmasanaphusanaghaṭṭanehi paññāyamānehi taṃ puggalaṃ visaññaṃ katvā attano manorathaṃ pūretvā gacchati, ayaṃ avisayo nāma. Tasmā ettha avisayattā anāpatti. Paṇḍakavatthu pākaṭameva.
在根已损坏的情况下,所谓“根坏”,就是指身体的净色已经损坏,像枯木桩或荆棘一样,感受不到乐,也感受不到苦。即使他感受不到,只要是以享受的心去使用,仍然构成罪。巴利
Upahatindriyavatthumhi upahatindriyoti upahatakāyappasādo khāṇukaṇṭakamiva sukhaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vā na vedayati. Avedayantassāpi sevanacittavasena āpatti.
在只是碰触的情形里,如果有人心想“我要行淫法”而抓住女人,之后对行淫心生厌离并后悔,那就只是犯恶作。因为行淫的前方便,比如抓手等,在还没到头部之前,都停留在恶作。到了头部时就是巴拉基格。因为第一巴拉基格的近方便就只是恶作,其余三种的近方便是土喇咤亚。不过这个比丘应当理解为:虽然对行淫法心生厌离,却接受了身相触。因此世尊说:“犯桑喀地谢思罪。”巴利
Chupitamattavatthusmiṃ yo ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevissāmī’’ti mātugāmaṃ gaṇhitvā methune virajjitvā vippaṭisārī hoti, dukkaṭamevassa hoti. Methunadhammassa hi pubbapayogā hatthaggāhādayo yāva sīsaṃ na pāpuṇāti, tāva dukkaṭe tiṭṭhanti. Sīse patte pārājikaṃ hoti. Paṭhamapārājikassa hi dukkaṭameva sāmantaṃ. Itaresaṃ tiṇṇaṃ thullaccayaṃ. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu methunadhamme virajjitvā kāyasaṃsaggaṃ sādiyīti veditabbo. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti.
74 74. 在跋迪亚城这件事里,跋迪亚是那座城的名称。生林因为盛产迦提花丛,所以得到了这个名字;那座园林位于该城的近郊。他躺在那里的地上,靠着风吹来的支撑力,沉沉睡去。那时只有单一滋味的有分心在持续运转。见到被弄脏,意思是见到被不净所污染。巴利
74. Bhaddiyavatthusmiṃ bhaddiyaṃ nāma taṃ nagaraṃ. Jātiyāvanaṃ nāma jātipupphagumbānaṃ ussannatāya evaṃ laddhanāmaṃ; taṃ tassa nagarassa upacāre vanaṃ hoti. So tattha nipanno tena vātupatthambhena mahāniddaṃ okkami. Ekarasaṃ bhavaṅgameva vattati. Kilinnaṃ passitvāti asucikiliṭṭhaṃ passitvā.
75 从这之后,与接受相关的四个事例,以及一个不知事例,这五个意思都很浅显明了。巴利
75. Ito parāni sādiyanapaṭisaṃyuttāni cattāri vatthūni, ajānanavatthu cāti pañca uttānatthāneva.
76 76. 在两种不可接受的因缘中,“突然起身”,意思是像被毒蛇咬了、像被火烧了一样,急速地起身。“踩踏后使之滚动”,是说一个不放逸、已开始修观、具足正念的比丘,在迅速起身的同时,就踩踏上去,让它在地上翻滚、转侧、碾压而倒下。因为在这种场合,善凡夫必须守护自己的心;而这位比丘,正是他们当中一位像战场前锋勇士一样的人。巴利
76. Dvīsu asādiyanavatthūsu sahasā vuṭṭhāsīti āsīvisena daṭṭho viya agginā daḍḍho viya ca turitaṃ vuṭṭhāsi. Akkamitvā pavattesīti appamatto bhikkhu āraddhavipassako upaṭṭhitassati khippaṃ vuṭṭhahantova akkamitvā bhūmiyaṃ vaṭṭento parivaṭṭento viheṭhento pātesi. Puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi evarūpesu ṭhānesu cittaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ. Ayañca tesaṃ aññataro saṅgāmasīsayodho bhikkhu.
77 77. 关于开着门躺卧这件事:所谓“白天独处”,是指白天躺着;“关门独处”,是指关上门躺着。在这里,律藏中虽然没有说“这是某某罪”,但在不关门躺卧的过失所引生的事例中,世尊说:“诸比丘,我允许白天独处的人关上门独处。”因此,不关门而独处就说是犯恶作。优波离长老等人正是因为了知世尊的意趣,才写下了义注。由此,“白天犯此罪,不是夜里”(《附随》323)这句话也得以成立。巴利
77. Dvāraṃ vivaritvā nipannavatthumhi divā paṭisallīyantenāti divā nipajjantena. Dvāraṃ saṃvaritvā paṭisallīyitunti dvāraṃ pidahitvā nipajjituṃ. Ettha ca kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ nāma āpattī’’ti na vuttā. Vivaritvā nipannadosena pana uppanne vatthusmiṃ ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, divā paṭisallīyantena dvāraṃ saṃvaritvā paṭisallīyitu’’nti vuttattā asaṃvaritvā paṭisallīyantassa dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Bhagavato hi adhippāyaṃ ñatvā upālittherādīhi aṭṭhakathā ṭhapitā. ‘‘Atthāpatti divā āpajjati no ratti’’nti (pari. 323) imināpi cetaṃ siddhaṃ.
那么,什么样的门应该关,什么样的门不该关呢?用木片、竹片、草席、树叶等随便什么材料做成门扇,下面插进下门臼、上面插进上门槽,这样装成的旋转门,才应该关。其他的门,比如像牛栏里那种木栓门、荆棘门,像村口大门那样装了轮子的门,在木板或草席上装两三个轮子做成的滑动草席门,像店铺里那种往上翻的草席门,在草叶屋里用两三处竹条绑成的插销门,还有布幔门、麻布门——这类门不该关。不过,手里拿着钵去推开门扇时,只有布幔门和麻布门推开不算犯戒,推开其余那些门就犯戒。白天独自静处时,只有旋转门是犯戒的所在,其余的门,不管关没关,躺下都不犯戒。但还是应该关好门再躺下,这是应守的规矩。巴利
Kīdisaṃ pana dvāraṃ saṃvaritabbaṃ, kīdisaṃ na saṃvaritabbaṃ? Rukkhapadaraveḷupadarakilañjapaṇṇādīnaṃ yena kenaci kavāṭaṃ katvā heṭṭhā udukkhale upari uttarapāsake ca pavesetvā kataṃ parivattakadvārameva saṃvaritabbaṃ. Aññaṃ gorūpānaṃ vajesu viya rukkhasūcikaṇṭakadvāraṃ, gāmathakanakaṃ cakkalakayuttadvāraṃ, phalakesu vā kiṭikāsu vā dve tīṇi cakkalakāni yojetvā kataṃ saṃsaraṇakiṭikadvāraṃ, āpaṇesu viya kataṃ ugghāṭanakiṭikadvāraṃ, dvīsu tīsu ṭhānesu veṇusalākā gopphetvā paṇṇakuṭīsu kataṃ salākahatthakadvāraṃ, dussasāṇidvāranti evarūpaṃ dvāraṃ na saṃvaritabbaṃ. Pattahatthassa kavāṭappaṇāmane pana ekaṃ dussasāṇidvārameva anāpattikaraṃ, avasesāni paṇāmentassa āpatti. Divā paṭisallīyantassa pana parivattakadvārameva āpattikaraṃ, sesāni saṃvaritvā vā asaṃvaritvā vā nipannassa āpatti natthi. Saṃvaritvā pana nipajjitabbaṃ, etaṃ vattaṃ.
那么,旋转门要关到什么程度才算关好呢?插上针闩之类的东西,就算关好了。不过,只插一根针状的东西也行,只扣上搭扣也行,门扇碰到门框而掩上就行,稍微没碰到也行。按最宽松的标准,只要头伸不进去,即使没碰到门框也算行。如果是有很多人进出的地方,可以对比丘或沙弥说“贤友,帮忙看着门”,然后躺下。如果比丘们正坐着做衣服或忙别的事,心里想着“他们会看着门”,然后躺下也行。《库伦德注释》里说:“就算跟近事男打个招呼,或者心里想着‘他会看着’,然后躺下也行。只是不能跟比丘尼或女人打招呼。”如果门臼或上门楣坏了、没装好,关不上;或者因为要施工,砖堆、泥土什么的堆在门里面;或者搭了架子,导致关不了门——有这类情况时,不关门躺下也行。如果没有门扇,那就跟已经得到许可一样。睡在上层的人,要把梯子收起来再躺下。如果梯子顶端有盖板,盖上再躺下。在内室躺下的人,把内室门或前门随便关上一扇,就可以躺下。如果是一间屋子两侧都开了门、有人进出,那两扇门都得看着。巴利
Parivattakadvāraṃ pana kittakena saṃvutaṃ hoti? Sūcighaṭikādīsu dinnāsu saṃvutameva hoti. Apica kho sūcimattepi dinne vaṭṭati. Ghaṭikamattepi dinne vaṭṭati. Dvārabāhaṃ phusitvā pihitamattepi vaṭṭati. Īsakaṃ aphusitepi vaṭṭati. Sabbantimena vidhinā yāvatā sīsaṃ nappavisati tāvatā aphusitepi vaṭṭatīti. Sace bahūnaṃ vaḷañjanaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, bhikkhuṃ vā sāmaṇeraṃ vā ‘‘dvāraṃ, āvuso, jaggāhī’’ti vatvāpi nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati. Atha bhikkhū cīvarakammaṃ vā aññaṃ vā kiñci karontā nisinnā honti, ‘‘ete dvāraṃ jaggissantī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvāpi nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati. Kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘upāsakampi āpucchitvā vā, ‘esa jaggissatī’ti ābhogaṃ katvā vā nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati. Kevalaṃ bhikkhuniṃ vā mātugāmaṃ vā āpucchituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha dvārassa udukkhalaṃ vā uttarapāsako vā bhinno vā hoti aṭṭhapito vā, saṃvarituṃ na sakkoti, navakammatthaṃ vā pana iṭṭhakapuñjo vā mattikādīnaṃ vā rāsi antodvāre kato hoti, aṭṭaṃ vā bandhanti, yathā saṃvarituṃ na sakkoti; evarūpe antarāye sati asaṃvaritvāpi nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati. Yadi pana kavāṭaṃ natthi, laddhakappameva. Upari sayantena nisseṇiṃ āropetvā nipajjitabbaṃ. Sace nisseṇimatthake thakanakaṃ hoti, thaketvāpi nipajjitabbaṃ. Gabbhe nipajjantena gabbhadvāraṃ vā pamukhadvāraṃ vā yaṃkiñci saṃvaritvā nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace ekakuṭṭake gehe dvīsu passesu dvārāni katvā vaḷañjanti, dvepi dvārāni jaggitabbāni.
即使是在三层的殿堂里,门也一定要有人看守。如果比丘们托钵回来,进入像铜殿那样的殿堂作日间住处,僧团上座应该对守门人说“请看好门”,或者心里认定“看门是他的责任”,然后再进去躺下。直到僧团中最下座的比丘,也应当这样做。对于先进入的人,心里认定“看门是后面进来的人的责任”,这样也是可以的。如果不告知,也不作意,就在室内门没关好的情况下,或者在室外躺下,那就犯戒。在室内或室外躺下的时候,心里作意“看门是大门处守门人的责任”,然后躺下,这样才是可以的。在铜殿等地方的露台上躺下时,也一定要把门关好。巴利
Tibhūmakepi pāsāde dvāraṃ jaggitabbameva. Sace bhikkhācārā paṭikkamma lohapāsādasadisaṃ pāsādaṃ bahū bhikkhū divāvihāratthaṃ pavisanti, saṅghattherena dvārapālassa ‘‘dvāraṃ jaggāhī’’ti vatvā vā ‘‘dvārajagganaṃ etassa bhāro’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā vā pavisitvā nipajjitabbaṃ . Yāva saṅghanavakena evameva kattabbaṃ. Pure pavisantānaṃ ‘‘dvārajagganaṃ nāma pacchimānaṃ bhāro’’ti evaṃ ābhogaṃ kātumpi vaṭṭati. Anāpucchā vā ābhogaṃ vā akatvā antogabbhe vā asaṃvutadvāre bahi vā nipajjantānaṃ āpatti. Gabbhe vā bahi vā nipajjanakālepi ‘‘dvārajagganaṃ nāma mahādvāre dvārapālassa bhāro’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā nipajjituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Lohapāsādādīsu ākāsatale nipajjantenāpi dvāraṃ saṃvaritabbameva.
这里简要说明一下:这条日间独处的规定,是针对任何有围墙围起、门能关上的地方说的。所以不管是在露天、树下还是凉亭,只要是有门能关上的地方躺下,就必须先把门关好再躺。如果是个大寺院,像大菩提广场、铜殿广场那样很多人进出的地方,门就算关上也没法保持关着,人们找不到门就会爬墙进出,那种地方就不需要关门。晚上开着门躺下,到天亮时起身,没有犯。如果醒了之后又接着睡,就犯了。如果有人事先决定“我要在天亮时起身”,但晚上没关门就躺下,到了自己定的时间又没起来,那他还是犯。不过《大筏注》里说:“这样躺着的人,连不恭敬的恶作罪也逃不掉。”巴利
Ayañhettha saṅkhepo – idaṃ divāpaṭisallīyanaṃ yena kenaci parikkhitte sadvārabandhe ṭhāne kathitaṃ. Tasmā abbhokāse vā rukkhamūle vā maṇḍape vā yattha katthaci sadvārabandhe nipajjantena dvāraṃ saṃvaritvāva nipajjitabbaṃ. Sace mahāpariveṇaṃ hoti, mahābodhiyaṅgaṇalohapāsādaṅgaṇasadisaṃ bahūnaṃ osaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ, yattha dvāraṃ saṃvutampi saṃvutaṭṭhāne na tiṭṭhati, dvāraṃ alabhantā pākāraṃ āruhitvāpi vicaranti, tattha saṃvaraṇakiccaṃ natthi. Rattiṃ dvāraṃ vivaritvā nipanno aruṇe uggate uṭṭhahati, anāpatti. Sace pabujjhitvā puna supati, āpatti. Yo pana ‘‘aruṇe uggate vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti paricchinditvāva dvāraṃ asaṃvaritvā rattiṃ nipajjati, yathāparicchedameva ca na vuṭṭhāti, tassa āpattiyeva. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ nipajjanto anādariyadukkaṭāpi na muccatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
如果有人大部分夜晚不睡,或者走了很远的路,白天疲惫不堪,坐在床上,脚还没从地上抬起来,就因为困得撑不住而躺下,那不算犯戒。但如果已经睡着了,甚至在不知不觉中把脚抬到床上,那就犯戒了。坐着倚靠着睡,不算犯戒。如果有人为了驱除睡意而在经行时摔倒,马上又站起来,那也不算犯戒。但如果摔倒后就躺在那里,不起来,那就犯戒了。巴利
Yo pana bahudeva rattiṃ jaggitvā addhānaṃ vā gantvā divā kilantarūpo mañce nisinno pāde bhūmito amocetvāva niddāvasena nipajjati, tassa anāpatti. Sace okkantaniddo ajānantopi pāde mañcakaṃ āropeti, āpattiyeva. Nisīditvā apassāya supantassa anāpatti. Yopi ca ‘‘niddaṃ vinodessāmī’’ti caṅkamanto patitvā sahasāva vuṭṭhāti, tassāpi anāpatti. Yo pana patitvā tattheva sayati, na vuṭṭhāti, tassa āpatti.
谁会得脱,谁不会得脱?《大跋遮利注》里先说:“只有以单折的姿势躺下的人,才得脱。但如果把双脚从地面移开而躺着,即使是被夜叉附身或失去意识的人,也不得脱。”《库伦德注》则说:“被捆绑后让人放倒躺下的,才得脱。”《大注》里说:“有人在经行时昏厥后跌倒,就地躺下睡着,因为非其境界,所以罪不显现。但老师们不这么说。因此玛哈巴杜玛长老说:仍然有罪。不过有两种人确实能从罪中得脱:一种是被夜叉附身的人,一种是被捆绑后让人放倒躺下的人。”巴利
Ko muccati, ko na muccatīti? Mahāpaccariyaṃ tāva ‘‘ekabhaṅgena nipannakoyeva muccati. Pāde pana bhūmito mocetvā nipanno yakkhagahitakopi visaññībhūtopi na muccatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘bandhitvā nipajjāpitova muccatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘yo caṅkamanto muccitvā patito tattheva supati, tassāpi avisayattā āpatti na dissati. Ācariyā pana evaṃ na kathayanti. Tasmā āpattiyevāti mahāpadumattherena vuttaṃ. Dve pana janā āpattito muccantiyeva, yo ca yakkhagahitako, yo ca bandhitvā nipajjāpito’’ti.
78 78. 在关于巴拉卡恰卡(Bhārukaccha)这件事上,“梦中遗精者无犯”——因为梦中遗精根本不在可自主的范围内,所以才有这样的判定。因此,优波离长老用推理的方式,对这件世尊先前未曾裁决过的事做出了裁决。世尊听后说:“说得好,诸比丘,优波离说得好!优波离解说这个问题,就像在无路之处开出道路,在虚空中示现足迹。”随后将这位长老列为第一:“诸比丘,在我的比丘弟子中,持律第一的,就是优波离。”从此以后,关于苏拔巴(Supabba)等事,其含义本身就已经很清楚了。巴利
78. Bhārukacchakavatthumhi anāpatti supinantenāti yasmā supinante avisayattā evaṃ hoti, tasmā upālitthero bhagavatā avinicchitapubbampi imaṃ vatthuṃ nayaggāhena vinicchini. Bhagavāpi ca sutvā ‘‘sukathitaṃ, bhikkhave, upālinā; apade padaṃ karonto viya, ākāse padaṃ dassento viya upāli imaṃ pañhaṃ kathesī’’ti vatvā theraṃ etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vinayadharānaṃ yadidaṃ upālī’’ti (a. ni. 1.219, 228). Ito parāni supabbādīni vatthūni uttānatthāneva.
80 在与比丘尼往来等事中,那些离车族少年沉迷于嬉戏,就因为自己的行为不检点,做出了这样的事。从那时起,离车族就开始走向衰亡了。巴利
80. Bhikkhunīsampayojanādīsu te licchavikumārakā khiḍḍāpasutā attano anācārena evaṃ akaṃsu. Tato paṭṭhāya ca licchavīnaṃ vināso eva udapādi.
82 82. 在年老出家者的事例中,那女人出于悲悯,心想“我去看看他”,就去了他家。她便向他百般诉说,自己和孩子们如何孤苦无依。他对此毫无留恋,她看出这一点后很生气,强行抓住他说:“来,还俗吧!”他为了挣脱而后退,因为年老体弱,仰面摔倒了。她于是遂了自己的心愿。但那位比丘是不来者,已断尽欲贪,因此没有接受。巴利
82. Vuḍḍhapabbajitavatthumhi dassanaṃ agamāsīti anukampāya ‘‘taṃ dakkhissāmī’’ti gehaṃ agamāsi. Athassa sā attano ca dārakānañca nānappakārehi anāthabhāvaṃ saṃvaṇṇesi. Anapekkhañca naṃ ñatvā kupitā ‘‘ehi vibbhamāhī’’ti balakkārena aggahesi. So attānaṃ mocetuṃ paṭikkamanto jarādubbalatāya uttāno paripati. Tato sā attano manaṃ akāsi. So pana bhikkhu anāgāmī samucchinnakāmarāgo tasmā na sādiyīti.
83 鹿崽的故事本身意思很清楚。巴利
83. Migapotakavatthu uttānatthamevāti.
关于这一点,在《普端严》的普端严性中——巴利
Tatridaṃ samantapāsādikāya samantapāsādikattasmiṃ –
从师资代代相传来说,从阐明缘起和事由的种种差别来说;
既因为远离他人的宗派主张,也因为自宗清净。
从厘清字词、把握词义,到按巴利文的连缀顺序来理解;
从学处的判定,到分别理趣之差别之显示。
智者观之,此中不见纤毫不悦;
是故此为智者所宝,正名周遍悦意(Samantapāsādikā)。
善调应调者,敷演律藏释;
此律乃悲悯世间之世间怙主所说。巴利
Ācariyaparamparato, nidānavatthuppabhedadīpanato; Parasamayavivajjanato, sakasamayavisuddhito ceva. Byañjanaparisodhanato, padatthato pāḷiyojanakkamato; Sikkhāpadanicchayato, vibhaṅganayabhedadassanato. Sampassataṃ na dissati, kiñci apāsādikaṃ yato ettha; Viññūnamayaṃ tasmā, samantapāsādikātveva. Saṃvaṇṇanā pavattā, vinayassa vineyyadamanakusalena; Vuttassa lokanāthena, lokamanukampamānenāti.
1 2 3 4